A Foodcentric Life

  • 4th of July
  • Meet Chef Sally
  • Recipe Index
  • Subscribe
menu icon
go to homepage
  • 4th of July
  • Meet Chef Sally
  • Recipe Index
  • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
  • search icon
    Homepage link
    • 4th of July
    • Meet Chef Sally
    • Recipe Index
    • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
  • ×
    Home » Recipes

    Roasted Broccoli with Parmesan and Lemon

    02/05/2018 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

    roasted broccoli

    Broccoli is endlessly versatile: steam it, snack on it raw with dip, shred it for slaw, or purée it into soup. But roasted? That's where it turns sweet and nutty. This roasted broccoli with parmesan gets a bright finish of lemon zest and toasted pine nuts and comes together with minimal prep. It's a fast and tasty side that pairs with just about any main and it always gets eaten.

    A serving platter of green broccoli spears with parmesan cheees and lemon zest garnish.

    We eat broccoli a few times a week, and I love roasting vegetables-so roasted broccoli was a natural evolution. Toss florets with a little olive oil, kosher salt, black pepper, and a pinch of granulated garlic, then slide the pan into a hot oven for about 15 minutes. To serve, finish with lemon zest, toasted pine nuts, and a shower of Parmesan. Simple-and so good.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Roasted Broccoli

    • Quick & foolproof. Minimal prep; the oven does the work in about 15 minutes.
    • Actually crave-worthy veggies. Roasting turns broccoli sweet, nutty, and irresistible.
    • Parmesan finish. A salty, savory lift (for dairy-free, skip it or use a vegan Parm alternative).

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for roasted broccoli on a counter in glass prep bowls.
    • Broccoli - Choose crowns if possible. This is the top part, less stem and waste. Skip pre-cut bags; they're often small, uneven, and less fresh.
    • Lemon - Zest for brightness and color; serve with wedges for a fresh squeeze at the table.
    • Oil - Extra-virgin olive oil or avocado oil-just enough to lightly coat so the edges brown.
    • Garlic - Granulated garlic powder for even flavor without burning. (Not garlic salt.)
    • Parmesan - Finely grated for a salty, nutty finish. For dairy-free, skip or use a vegan-style Parmesan.
    • Nuts - Pine nuts bring buttery crunch; toast lightly in a dry skillet while the broccoli roasts or use raw.

    Please see the recipe card for measurement, salt, and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Cheese - Try Pecorino Romano (saltier, sharper).
    • Nuts - Try pistachios, walnuts, cashews, or slivered almonds. Toast briefly for extra flavor.
    • Heat: Add red pepper flakes or a pinch of Aleppo pepper before roasting.
    • Balsamic glaze - Add a light drizzle of balsamic glaze after roasting.
    • Crunch: Sprinkle with toasted breadcrumbs right before serving for extra texture.

    Looking for another terrific broccoli recipe? Try my Crunchy Broccoli Bacon Salad (for your bacon lovers)

    Chef's Tip: Temperature & Timing

    • Why 400°F: More forgiving than 425°F-browns without scorching, but you can go wtih 425°F, just keep an eye on the broccoli while roasting.
    • Floret size: For bite-size florets, roast 14-18 min at 400°F; larger needs longer.
    • Convection: Check 2-3 min earlier.
    • Parmesan: Add in the last 1-2 min or off-heat as a garnish.

    How To Roast Broccoli

    Pre-heat the oven to 400°F and ready a rimmed baking sheet lined with parchment.

    Trimming a head of green broccoli into smaller florets for roasting.
    1. Wash broccoli and trim broccoli into florets. Be sure it is completely dry before roasting.
    Broccoli florets arranged flat on a baking tray for roasting.

    2. Toss florets with oi, garlic, salt, and pepper. Lay flat in a single layer on the baking tray.

    Roasted broccoli on a baking tray atop parchment paper.

    3. Roast until edges are lightly browned and stems are tender when pierced, about 15 minutes.

    A serving platter of green broccoli spears with parmesan cheees and lemon zest garnish.

    4. Arrange broccoli on a platter and sprinkle with the parmesan, lemon zest, and nuts to serve.

    Serving Suggestions For Roasted Broccoli

    • With proteins: Roast chicken, seared salmon, steak, or pork tenderloin.
    • Pasta toss: Combine with hot penne, a splash of pasta water, lemon zest, and Parmesan.
    • Grain bowl: Spoon over quinoa or farro; finish with olive oil and extra lemon.
    • Eggs & brunch: Fold into a frittata or serve alongside soft-scrambled eggs.

    Storage & Reheating

    • Fridge: Store in an airtight container up to 3 days.
    • Reheat: Sheet pan at 400°F for 5-7 minutes to re-crisp; add fresh lemon zest and a little Parm to revive.

    This is not ideal for freezing as the broccoli really softens.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do I keep roasted broccoli from getting soggy?

    Dry florets thoroughly after washing, don't crowd the pan, and use enough heat. A preheated heavy sheet pan helps with browning.

    Should I use parchment or a bare sheet pan?

    Parchment = easy cleanup, good browning. Preheated bare pan = deepest browning, but watch closely and use a light film of spray oil to prevent sticking.

    Can I roast frozen broccoli (IQF)?

    Many sources say yes, and you can get passable results with high heat and careful technique. But fresh broccoli is best for roasting. IQF-individually quick-frozen-broccoli may release slightly less water than block-frozen, yet it still tends to steam as it heats, so browning is limited. For true roasted flavor and texture, use fresh; keep frozen for soups, casseroles, or a quick sauté. In a pinch, use the IQF broccoli spears right out of the freezer, and higher heat, 425°F - 450°F.

    More Green Veggie Recipes

    While many people don't think they are veggie lovers, these green veggies recipes might just change their mind. And be sure to check out the sides & veggies recipe index for more ideas.

    • Broccoli bacon salad
      Crunchy Broccoli Salad with Bacon
    • broccoli cabbage slaw
      Broccoli Slaw Recipe with Creamy Apple Cider Dressing
    • A bowl of burnished roasted Brussels sprouts glazed with Balsamic.
      Brussels Sprouts with Balsamic Vinegar
    • lemon thyme brussels sprouts
      Sautéed Brussels Sprouts with Lemon and Thyme

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this roasted broccoli with parmesan, please leave and comment and let me know. I enjoy hearing from you and appreciate your feedback, plus comments are good for others readers. And please add a star rating. Thanks!

    📖 Recipe

    roasted broccoli

    Roasted Broccoli with Lemon and Parmesan

    Sally Cameron
    Another great way to get more veggies onto your plate, roasted broccoli takes just minutes in the oven, top with pine nuts, lemon zest and Parmesan or non-dairy cheesy sprinkle. Broccoli browns are just broccoli heads with some of the thick stem already cut off. Many stores sell the top "crowns", but you can buy heads of broccoli as well. Parchment is available in rolls at most grocery stores next to foil, or online in pre-cut sheets (which are super handy).
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 20 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 203 kcal

    Equipment

    • Baking sheet tray
    • Parchment

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 pounds broccoli crowns
    • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 lemon, zested
    • ½ teaspoon granulated garlic
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • 3 tablespoon pine nuts
    • 2-3 tablespoons grated Parmesan cheese or dairy free vegan cheese powder

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat the oven to 400°F and line a half sheet baking pan with parchment. Trim broccoli into florets with some stem left. Slice larger pieces in half top to bottom. For trimming help, see photos in post. 
    • Toss florets with oil. Lay florets flat in a single layer and sprinkle evenly with garlic, pepper and salt. Roast for 15 minutes or until the edges are just browned and stems are tender when pierced with a sharp paring knife. Timing will depend on your oven. To serve, sprinkle with pine nuts, lemon zest and Parmesan.

    Notes

    Link to the dairy free cheesy sprinkle is here

    Nutrition

    Calories: 203kcalCarbohydrates: 17gProtein: 8gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gCholesterol: 2mgSodium: 265mgPotassium: 776mgFiber: 6gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 1439IUVitamin C: 204mgCalcium: 133mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Turkey Broth Recipe

    11/18/2022 by Sally Cameron 13 Comments

    Rich brown roasted turkey broth in glass jars on a kitchen counter.

    If you've never made homemade turkey broth, it's time you do! After years of making this recipe, I've perfected a method for the richest, most flavorful turkey broth recipe, starting with roasted turkey legs and thighs plus caramelized vegetables. This is truly amazing broth, slow-simmered for hours (or an Instant Pot option) until golden and deeply savory. It's the secret to incredible Thanksgiving gravy, soups, and sauces, with a depth of flavor no store-bought version can touch.

    Finished golden brown turkey broth.

    Is turkey stock the same as turkey broth? Basically, yes. Technically, broth is made with meaty turkey pieces, while stock is made mostly from bones. You'll also hear it called turkey bone broth or turkey stock-the terms are often used interchangeably. This recipe is a foundational flavor engine for your Thanksgiving gravy and for soups, stews, and risotto after.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love this Turkey Broth Recipe

    • Rich flavor, simple process - Roasting the turkey pieces and vegetables first creates a deeply flavored broth with almost no extra effort.
    • Two options - Stovetop or Instant Pot/pressure cooker, both mostly hands off.
    • Better than store-bought - The depth, aroma, and clean ingredients make this homemade broth unbeatable.
    • Make ahead and freeze - Break the process into two easy days, freeze portions for soups, sauces, and gravies later.

    To make a terrific turkey soup, use this recipe for chicken vegetable soup and swap leftover turkey and turkey broth.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Turkey broth ingredients.

    Instead of using a roasted turkey carcass, this recipe starts with fresh turkey parts-just like making chicken stock, but richer from roasting.

    • Turkey - Use a mix of legs, thighs, backs, or whatever your butcher has. Starting with meaty pieces gives the broth a richer body and golden color.
    • Onions - Brown, yellow, or sweet onions add savory depth. Avoid red onions, which can tint the broth. Onions form part of the classic flavor base for stocks and broths.
    • Carrots - Add natural sweetness and balance. Together with onion and celery, they form the classic French mirepoix base that builds flavor.
    • Celery ribs - Essential for aromatic, earthy flavor and balance in the broth.
    • Garlic (optional)- I add a whole head of garlic, sliced in half crosswise. It gently perfumes the broth with savory depth without making it taste "garlicky." You can skip it if you prefer a more neutral broth.
    • White wine or dry vermouth (optional) - Adds depth and subtle acidity to round out the flavors. Small airline size bottles are perfect to keep on hand for cooking.
    • Bay leaves - Leaves add a faint herbal note that brings everything together.
    • Parsley - Fresh flat-leaf (Italian) parsley adds brightness. Skip the dried.
    • Thyme - Fresh sprigs are best. Toss them in whole. A must-have herb for turkey broth.
    • Black peppercorns - Use whole peppercorns for gentle spice and rounded flavor.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's Tip: Why I Add Garlic - I tuck a whole head of garlic, sliced in half crosswise right through the papery skin, into the pan with the turkey parts and vegetables because it contributes roasted depth, sweetness, and "umami". Roasting the garlic mellows the sharp, raw garlic flavor and caramelizes its natural sugars, so it doesn't make the broth taste garlicky. Instead, it adds gentle sweetness, savory depth, and a rich, golden flavor-especially wonderful for turkey gravy and soups. If you prefer a very neutral broth, you can leave it out.

    Use turkey broth in this French Onion Soup, it's a great alternative to beef broth.

    Chef's Tip - Remove the Skin Before Roasting. Removing the skin before roasting gives you a cleaner, more refined turkey broth. It reduces grease from the start and leaves more room in the pot for meaty, collagen-rich pieces that build body and depth of flavor. You'll spend less time skimming, get a broth that freezes and reheats beautifully, and still achieve a rich golden color from the roasted meat and vegetables.

    How to Make Turkey Broth

    Start in the oven: Roasting is the secret step to a rich, deeply flavorful turkey broth. Roasting the turkey pieces, bones, and vegetables intensifies their natural flavor and gives the broth that beautiful golden-brown color. It's the difference between a good turkey broth and a truly great one.

    Because this recipe makes a large batch (perfect for freezing), the stovetop stockpot method is ideal. You'll get the best flavor and high yield by simmering slowly for several hours, rather than using a smaller pressure cooker or slow cooker.

    If you prefer to use an Instant Pot, it works great (I do it), see notes below for my turkey broth Instant Pot method.

    Raw turkey pieces and vegetables in pan.

    Step 1: Roast the turkey and vegetables

    Remove as much skin as possible from the turkey pieces. Distribute the turkey parts in a large roasting pan, then top with roughly chopped carrots, celery, onion, and a split head of garlic (unpeeled).

    Roast the turkey and vegetables for 1 hour at 375°F, then add 1 cup of dry white wine or dry white vermouth and roast for another 30 minutes. This is what you use to make the broth. Allow the roasted turkey and vegetables to cool, refrigerate until the next day to make the broth. Breaking up the process make it more manageable.

    Note - When I use my pressure cooker, I do it all in one day as it is faster (about 4 ½ hours total).

    Chef's tip: How much salt? None. Never add salt to your broth. Any broth. Add salt to the dish you're cooking with the broth. This gives you more control over the salt levels in a dish.

    Turkey and veggies after roasting.

    Step 2: Start the broth

    Early the next morning, place everything in a large 10-12 quart stock pot and cover with 5 quarts of cold water to start. Add bay leaves, fresh thyme, parsley, and black peppercorns to the pot. 

    Turn up the heat to get the pot to a simmer, then turn down to low for a low gentle bubble for 10-12 hours. As the broth cooks down and the water level drops, add boiling water from a tea kettle. Over a 12 hour period I add from 1-3 quarts to keep the water level up.

    Simmering broth on the stovetop.

    Cooking long and slow ensures extracting the most flavor and nutrition for fantastic turkey broth. The house will smell like roasting turkey and you will have a rich, golden brown broth, full of flavor.

    Chef's Tip: Simmer Don't Boil. Keep the broth at a gentle simmer, not a rolling boil. Boiling breaks up the proteins and vegetables, turning the broth cloudy and muddy in flavor. Slow simmering draws out flavor and keeps the clarity of the broth.

    Step 3: Strain and chill

    Strain the broth through a fine sieve into a large clean pot. Don't use plastic as it will slow cooling. Discard the spent bones, meat and vegetables.

    A pot of chilling broth in an ice bath.

    Quickly chill the strained broth by placing the pot in an ice water bath. Fill a sink half full with with cold water and ice. To speed cooling, place something under the pot like a trivet so cold water circulates underneath (the photo is chicken broth).

    Stir broth occasionally for faster cooling. You want the broth cooling as quickly as possible for food safety. Cool to 70°F before refrigerating. 

    Chef's tip: If you want to skip the roasting process you can still make great turkey broth. The flavors will not be as rich but it's still delicious.

    Step 4: Refrigerate and degrease

    Transfer the cold broth to large storage containers and cover to refrigerate overnight. I use these commercial kitchen style Cambro containers.

    In the morning, remove any fat that has solidified on top. Divide broth into containers, label and freeze for Thanksgiving and after. Homemade turkey broth will add big flavors to your Thanksgiving recipes.

    Chef's Tip: Make the broth Monday of Thanksgiving week and it will be good until Thursday. For longer use, freeze it. You can also make it a week or more ahead and freeze.

    Instant Pot Turkey Broth Method (Pressure Cooker)

    These days, I make turkey broth in the Instant Pot more often than I do on the stove. You won't get the bigger volume you can achieve with a large stockpot, but the pressure cooking environment extracts flavor exceptionally well. You get a deep, rich broth in a fraction of the time. It's faster, it's reliable, with great results.

    Roast the turkey parts and veggies as the directions outline. Use 5 pounds of turkey thighs (stripped of skin) plus a few less vegetables, and you'll get about 2 ½ quarts of rich, roasted turkey broth. Fill with water to the max line, lock on the lid, press the broth setting and set for 2 hours.

    After two hours, allow natural pressure release then strain and chill. It follows my Instant Pot chicken broth recipe but with turkey.

    How to Use Turkey Broth

    Roasted turkey broth is what i use to make my turkey gravy on Thanksgiving. It's also terrific in soups, such as this turkey and wild rice soup recipe, and this pumpkin risotto, just about anywhere you would use a good broth. For good sipping on a chilly day, remember to add a little salt for flavor.

    A white bowl of rich French onion soup with a cheesy crouton on top and sprinkle of fresh herbs.

    I use it to make my easy French onion soup. Look at the photo above and see how dark and rich the soup looks. That's not beef broth but homemade turkey broth! Another soup it's terrific in is my creamy black bean and pumpkin soup, plus it's a really simple soup to make.

    Black bean pumpkin soup with a sauce spider web on top.

    How to Freeze Turkey Broth

    If you don't plan to use your turkey broth within 4 days, portion and freeze it for later. Turkey broth freezes beautifully and keeps for up to 3 months.

    Best containers for freezing:
    I freeze all of my broths in Souper Cubes®. The ½-cup, 1-cup, and 2-cup Souper Cubes are ideal for portioning, thawing, and cooking. Glass Mason jars, or square glass containers with tight-fitting lids also work.

    To thaw frozen broth:

    1. Refrigerator method (best): Transfer containers to the refrigerator for 24 hours to thaw slowly.
    2. Cold-water method: Submerge sealed containers in a bowl of cold water until partially thawed, then heat gently on the stovetop over low heat.
    3. Microwave method: Defrost at 40% power or on the "manual defrost" setting until slushy, then transfer to a pot and finish thawing on low.

    ⚠️ Food Safety Tip: Never thaw broth on the counter at room temperature. It puts the broth in the temperature danger zone (41°F-135°F) where bacteria can grow rapidly.

    Recipe FAQs

    How can I use turkey broth?

    Use turkey broth in place of chicken broth for soups, stews, risotto and just about any where you need broth, being sure the flavor is complimentary.

    Should I add salt when making turkey broth?

    No. Keeping your broth unsalted makes it more versatile, so you can season precisely when using it in soups, sauces, or gravy later.

    Can I make turkey broth in the Instant Pot?

    Yes. Roast the turkey pieces and vegetables first for rich flavor, then transfer to your Instant Pot. Do this is two batches for a 6-quart Instant Pot. Add cold water to the max fill line and cook on High Pressure for 2 hours, followed by a natural release. Strain and cool before using or freezing. The longer cook time extracts deeper flavor and gelatin from the bones for a richer broth.

    Do I need to roast the turkey and vegetables first?

    Technically no, but roasting creates deeper flavor and color. The caramelization adds that rich golden brown hue and roasted aroma that separates homemade from store-bought broth.

    Why is my turkey broth cloudy?

    Cloudy broth usually means it boiled too hard. Always keep it at a gentle simmer and avoid stirring. Boiling emulsifies fat and proteins into the liquid, making it look cloudy. It's still delicious, just not clear.

    More Broth and Soups Recipes

    For more broth recipes, try my long-simmered chicken bone broth, Instant Pot chicken broth, or vegetable broth. And here's my terrific Thanksgiving stuffing recipe where you can use this turkey broth.

    • Instant pot chicken broth
      Easy Instant Pot Chicken Broth
    • Golden homemade broth on a counter with onions, carrots, celery, and parsley.
      Low Sodium Vegetable Broth
    • Golden chicken bone broth in glass jars with carrots, celery, and parsley, cooling on the counter.
      Chicken Bone Broth (Homemade)
    • Gray bowl with bean and kale soup topped with parmesan and basil.
      Hearty Tuscan White Bean Soup

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make this turkey broth recipe, please comment and let me know. I appreciate hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers. And if you have any questions, comment or email me.

    📖 Recipe

    Rich brown roasted turkey broth in glass jars on a kitchen counter.

    Turkey Broth Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    There is no comparison to the flavor of homemade broth. Roast the turkey parts and vegetables, then make the broth. Make ahead and freeze for using Thanksgiving Day for gravy and afterwards for soup.
    5 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
    Simmering Time 10 hours hrs
    Total Time 12 hours hrs
    Course Broth, Soup, stock
    Cuisine American
    Servings 16 Yield 3-4 quarts
    Calories 45 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large stainless steel roasting pan 14"x16"
    • OR a large heavy duty disposable aluminum pan works You may need to double them up for strength or place the pan on a rimmed baking sheet pan for support. Dispose of after use.
    • large stock pot (10-12 quart)

    Ingredients
      

    For the oven

    • 7 pounds turkey pieces thighs, necks, legs
    • 1 large onion brown, yellow, sweet, white
    • 3-4 large carrots
    • 3-4 celery ribs
    • 1 whole head garlic
    • 1 cup white wine or dry white vermouth or water

    For the stockpot

    • 3 bay leaves fresh or dry
    • ½ bunch Italian parsley
    • ½ bunch fresh thyme
    • 2 teaspoons whole black peppercorns
    • 5 quarts cold water
    • Boiling hot water to fill pot as needed

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Heat oven, prep turkey

    • Pre-heat oven to 375° (190 c) and get out a large roasting pan. Remove as much skin and any extra fat that you can from turkey pieces. Place pieces into the roasting pan in a single layer.

    Prep veggies and roast

    • Roughly chop onions, carrots and celery. Split garlic head horizontally through the center (no need to peel). Add vegetables and garlic to the roasting pan with the turkey. Place pan in the oven and roast for 1 hour. At the end of the hour, add the wine and roast another 30 minutes.

    Make the broth

    • Place roasted turkey and vegetables into a large stock pot (10-12 quarts). Add bay leaves, parsley, thyme, peppercorns and cold water. Bring the pot to just under a boil, turn down to low and barely simmer for 10-12 hours. You want the pot to be at a slow, gentle bubble to extract as much flavor as possible. When the water level drops about 2", add a little boiling water from a tea kettle, keeping the ingredients just under water.
    • At the end of 10-12 hours, remove all meat, vegetables, herbs and discard, as they will be spent. Drain broth through a fine sieve into a clean large pot or bowl. Place in a sink filled with ice and cold water to cool quickly. Place pot on a trivet or small rack to help water circulation under the pot for faster cooling. Stir occasionally. You want the broth to cool as quickly as possible for food safety.
    • When stock is cool, below 70°, cover and place in the refrigerator. The next morning, remove any fat solidified on top, place into containers, label and freeze.

    Notes

    To thaw broth, place containers from the freezer into the refrigerator for 24 hours and thaw slowly. Alternatively, place frozen containers in a sink with cool water to start the thaw, then place semi-frozen broth into a pot and heat over low until liquid, or use the microwave at low power.
    Do not leave broth out on the counter to thaw at room temperature as this is not food safe.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cupCalories: 45kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 9gFat: 1.5gCholesterol: 9.6mgSodium: 84mgPotassium: 211mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gCalcium: 29mgIron: 0.5mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Caesar Pasta Salad with Chicken

    08/23/2024 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    A Caesar pasta salad ready to serve with salad servers and dressing in a marble counter.

    Combine two beloved classics-Chicken Caesar Salad and Pasta Salad-into one irresistible dish: Caesar Pasta Salad! Crisp romaine lettuce, tender chicken, and perfectly cooked pasta all tossed in a creamy Caesar dressing. Add crunchy croutons, and a generous sprinkle of salty Parmesan cheese, and you've got a salad that's sure to become a new favorite. Make it gluten-free or not, even vegetarian if desired. Plus, there are three ways to make this salad!

    A large shallow bowl of caesar pasta salad with romaine, curly pasta, croutons, chicken and dressing in a small pitcher.

    This caesar pasta salad is perfect for gatherings, meal prep, or any time you crave a fresh, satisfying meal. It's especially nice in hot weather when cool foods are not just welcome but needed. Use grilled chicken or rotisserie chicken, homemade caesar dressing or bottled, and store or homemade croutons.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Three ways: Make all of the parts homemade, some homemade, or buy them all.
    • Make ahead of time and combine to serve.
    • Use leftover grilled chicken or rotisserie chicken
    • Make it with gluten-free pasta or use regular pasta.
    • Make homemade croutons or use store-bought.
    • It's a great main dish as it's got everything.

    For another terrific pasta salad, try this lemony Mediterranean pasta salad.

    Recipe Ingredients

    I've listed just the Caesar pasta salad and dressing ingredients, but have recipe links to the homemade gluten-free croutons and grilled chicken if you want to make it all as I do.

    For the Caesar Pasta Salad

    • Chicken: Use either grilled chicken breast or rotisserie chicken, whatever cooked chicken is easiest.
    • Lettuce: Crisp romaine leaves are the best for a Caesar salad. Get whole heads and tear or chop yourself.
    • Caesar dressing: You can buy bottled but homemade take just a minute in a blender with only healthy ingredients (and it's gluten-free).
    • Pasta: Choose a short pasta shape such as rotini pasta, bow-tie pasta, penne pasta or elbow pasta. Use either gluten-free pasta or regular wheat pasta.
    • Croutons: Once again, either store bought for speed and ease or use my homemade croutons recipe. They are sooo good.
    • Parmesan cheese: For Caesar dressing if you are making homemade, plus more for over the top as a garnish.

    For Homemade Caesar Dressing

    What make a good Caesar salad? The dressing. This creamy homemade Caesar dressing is restaurant quality, made in a minute in the blender.

    Caesar salad dressing ingredients in small bowls.
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is best but avocado oil will work.
    • Lemon: The acidity in fresh lemon juice lifts the flavor.
    • Egg: You only need the yolk, emulsifies the dressing.
    • Mustard: Go with Dijon mustard for flavor plus it's a natural emulsifier in dressings.
    • Anchovy: Anchovy paste in the tube adds a subtle depth of flavor without being fishy, but it is optional. Trust me, I can't stand anchovy but it's good in this dressing.
    • Garlic: Fresh is best, finely zest.
    • Vinegar: Balsamic vinegar adds richness and depth.
    • Worcestershire sauce: A must! Adds a savory, umami boost to Caesar dressing.
    • Parmesan cheese: Adds a salty, savory flavor, or tryn Mexican Cotija.

    Please see the recipe card for all measurements, plus salt and pepper.

    If you love creamy dressings, try this creamy ginger vinaigrette.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • For a vegetarian Caesar pasta salad, swap the chicken with hard boiled eggs (1-2 per person), halved and served on top of the salad. Another good add is chickpeas (garbanzo beans).
    • Toasted pepitas make a fantastic extra garnish and take minutes to make.
    • Add cooked or grilled corn kernels for more texture and flavor.
    • For more color, add a chopped red onion, halved grape tomatoes, fresh cherry tomatoes, or slivers of colorful bell peppers.

    How to Make Caesar Pasta Salad

    This is a salad of components: Romaine lettuce, leftover cooked chicken, Caesar dressing, pasta, and croutons. You can make Caesar pasta salad 3 ways:

    • All homemade, and can be done ahead.
    • Partially homemade.
    • All store purchased, just assembly.

    My photos are for if you are making Caesar pasta salad with all homemade components. Make the Caesar dressing the day of serving as it has a raw egg yolk. It takes a minute in the blender.

    Homemade components: gluten-free croutons recipe, Caesar dressing recipe. For chicken, I used leftover boneless skinless grilled chicken. Make the marinade in the blender, add the chicken, and grill the next day, then chill and chop.

    Bread cubes tossed with butter and olive oil in a glass bowl.
    Step 1: Start the croutons or make them ahead of time, if making homemade.
    Pouring dry pasta into a large pot of boiling water to cook.
    Step 2: Boil pasta in a large pot of salted water, then drain, rinse with cold water, dry and chill.
    Chopping romaine leaves for a salad on a white cutting board.
    Step 3: Chop the romaine leaves and wash, then dry well.
    A bowl of homemade caesar dressing with spoon.
    Step 4: Make the Caesar dressing in the blender.
    Grilled chicken breasts on the grill, with nice grill marks.
    Step 5: Grill chicken a day or two ahead, or use leftover or rotisserie chicken. Cool and chop.
    A Caesar pasta salad ready to serve with salad servers and dressing in a marble counter.
    Step 6: Once all of the components are ready, toss to serve in a large mixing bowl with extra dressing on the side.

    Serving Suggestions

    When you add the chicken to this Caesar pasta salad it's truly a complete meal. Serve it with extra dressing, extra Parmesan, and extra croutons (because they are fantastic), so everyone can customize if desired. For more of a side salad, skip the chicken.

    You can also skip the croutons and serve with crusty garlic bread.

    Recipe FAQs

    What type of pasta works best for Caesar pasta salad?

    Short shaped pastas work the best for a Caesar pasta salad. Look for rotini, corkscrew pasta (cavatappi), elbow macaroni, fusilli, and farfalle (bowtie pasta). Penne or mini penne may also work.

    How do I keep the pasta from getting mushy?

    Cook the pasta until just done, called al dente. Taste a piece to test. Don't overcook it. Then drain and rinse the pasta under cold running water to stop the cooking process. Drain well and lay the past out on a clean kitchen towel to dry before chilling in the refrigerating (if making ahead) or using in the salad.

    Can I make Caesar pasta salad ahead of time?

    Yes, this is a great make ahead salad. Ready each component ahead of time and refrigerate, then toss together and dress at serving time for the best texture.

    More Great Salads and Pasta Recipes

    • chinese chicken salad
      Healthy Chicken Salad Recipe with Ginger Salad Dressing
    • Chicken blueberry salad
      Blueberry Vinaigrette
    • A white bowl of sun-dried tomato pesto pasta with basil and parmesan garnish.
      Creamy Sun-Dried Tomato Pesto Pasta
    • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
      Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this Caesar salad dressing, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A Caesar pasta salad ready to serve with salad servers and dressing in a marble counter.

    Caesar Pasta Salad

    Sally Cameron
    This Caesar pasta salad is a terrific main course salad. Make it gluten-free if desired, and notes for vegetarian diners. Make your own homemade caesar dressing or use bottled. Serve extra croutons, Parmesan, and dressing on the side. See links at the end for homemade chicken and croutons.
    No ratings yet
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Assemble time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr
    Course Entree, Main Course, Salad
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 628 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large pot to cook pasta
    • blender if making homemade caesar dressing
    • Baking sheet for croutons
    • Parchment paper

    Ingredients
      

    Caesar Salad

    • 12 ounces hearts of romaine 3 large heads in a package
    • 4-6 ounces pasta gluten-free or regular, cooked
    • 1 pound chopped cooked chicken grilled or rotisserie
    • 1 cup croutons gluten-free or regular
    • 4 tablespoons grated parmesan cheese

    Caesar Dressing (yield ¾ cup)

    • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or more to taste
    • 1 large egg yolk
    • 1 teaspoon dijon mustard
    • 1 teaspoon worcestershire sauce
    • ½ teaspoon anchovy paste in a tube optional
    • 1 large garlic clove finely chopped or zested
    • ½ teaspoon balsamic vinegar
    • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons finely grated Parmesan cheese or Mexican Cotija cheese
    • 2 pinches sea salt
    • 2 pinches white pepper or black pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Homemade Caesar dressing

    • Place the lemon juice egg yolk, mustard, anchovy paste, garlic, vinegar, and Worcestershire sauce in a blender and puree on lowest speed for a few seconds to blend.
    • With the blender top on and the center top removed, slowly stream the oil into the blender until dressing is creamy and emulsified. Increase the speed as you go. Add the Parmesan and puree until creamy. If the dressing gets too thick, add either a little more lemon juice or warm water to make it the consistency you prefer.
      Refrigerate the dressing until serving time in an airtight container. Due to the egg yolk, the dressing lasts 2-3 days max in the refrigerator. Be sure to label and date.

    Make the salad

    • Pasta: Cook the pasta in a large pot of boiling sated water, then drain and rinse with cold water to stop the cooking process. Drain again and allow pasta to dry on a clean kitchen towel or baking sheet. Refrigerate until serving time so it's cold.
      In the mean time work on the other parts of the salad.
    • Lettuce: Slice the hearts of romaine crosswise into 1-inch strips. Separate the leaves and wash (if not pre-washed), then dry well and chill. Using a salad spinner makes it easy.
    • Chicken: Cube or shred the cooked chicken.

    Serving the salad

    • Add the romaine, chicken, and pasta to a large salad bowl and toss with a few tablespoons of Caesar dressing. Top with the croutons and Parmesan cheese. Serve extra dressing on the side along with more cheese and croutons.

    Notes

    For the chicken:
    For the grilled chicken that I use, make this super easy blender lemon chicken marinade, marinate boneless, skinless breasts for an hour or overnight, then grill for 12 minutes. 
    For the croutons:
    Here's my recipe for gluten-free croutons.
    To make this vegetarian:
    Swap the chicken for hard boiled eggs and/or chickpeas (garbanzo beans. Use canned beans, rinsed and drained well. 
    Nutrition calculation just for the dressing:
    Serving is 2 tablespoons. 
    calories: 179kcal, carbs 1 g, protein 1 g, fat 19g, cholesterol 32mg, sodium 54mg, potassium 22mg, fiber 0, sugar 0. For all numbers please see the dressing recipe card. 
     
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 628kcalCarbohydrates: 32gProtein: 44gFat: 35gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 22gCholesterol: 148mgSodium: 502mgPotassium: 619mgFiber: 3gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 7558IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 142mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Gluten-Free Crepes (Sweet or Savory)

    08/14/2024 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    Two golden folded crepes on a white plate with blueberry jam and whipped cream.

    Easy gluten-free crepes bring all the magic of classic French crepes to your kitchen. These thin, delicate pancakes are simple to make and work with both sweet and savory fillings or no filling at all. They taste every bit as delicious as traditional crepes and freeze beautifully, so they're perfect for special breakfasts, quick desserts, or light lunches. A dairy-free option is included too.

    Plates of golden crepes topped with blueberries, powdered sugar, and whipped cream.

    While I fell in love with crepes at the street stands of Paris, I still remember my first Crepe Suzette at a tiny French restaurant in San Diego. I was instantly hooked. After going gluten-free, I updated my recipe so we could still enjoy them. These gluten-free crepes are easy, flexible, and made with simple ingredients you probably already have on hand.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Gluten-Free Crepes Recipe Highlights

    • Sweet or savory - Serve gluten-free crepes for breakfast, lunch, dinner, or dessert.
    • Make ahead friendly - Refrigerate or freeze the crepes for later.
    • Flexible for everyone - Not gluten-free? Use all-purpose flour or white whole wheat flour.
    • Dairy-free option - Use unsweetened oat milk and dairy-free butter to grease the pan while cooking.
    • Easy to serve - Fill and roll, or simply fold and stack crepes with your favorite fillings.

    For another gluten-free breakfast recipe try these golden crisp waffles.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Flour, eggs, milk and ingredients to make crepes on a counter.
    • Flour - Use a gluten-free flour blend but you can make them with all purpose flour (wheat flour) as well. The gluten-free ones are so good no one would know they are gluten-free crepes. Seriously.
    • Milk - I use what I have in the fridge, usually low fat but whole milk is good too.
    • Eggs - Large eggs, clean, un-cracked.
    • Butter - I use unsalted butter for gluten-free crepes, especially sweet crepes.
    • Sugar - To reduce sugar, I usually use monk fruit, but you can use regular or superfine sugar. Use sweetener only for sweet, dessert crepes. Omit for savory crepes.
    • Flavorings - For dessert crepes, a little vanilla extract is nice. For savory crepes, omit.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and salt.

    For another style of pancake, try these hearty buckwheat pancakes, entirely gluten-free.

    Chef's notes on flours: I've made gluten-free crepes with both King Arthur Gluten-Free Measure for Measure flour (with xanthan gum) and King Arthur Gluten-Free All-Purpose flour (without). Both work well. The all-purpose flour without xanthan gum may make a slightly more tender crepe. Similar gluten-free flour blends should work too. I have not tested this recipe with cornstarch-heavy blends such as Cup4Cup.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Almond flavor - For dessert crepes, try almond extract instead of vanilla extract.
    • Citrus twist - Make lemon crepes with fresh lemon zest and a little lemon juice, or add a touch of orange flower water.
    • Dairy-free option - For dairy-free crepes, use plant-based butter and dairy-free milk. Unsweetened oat milk is my recommendation, though almond milk should work too.
    • Savory crepes - Omit the vanilla and sugar for savory fillings.

    Tools for Making Crepes

    None of these tools for making crepes are expensive, plus they are versatile and good for many uses beyond crepes. This is what I use for making crepes, but I've listed alternatives.

    • A crepe pan: The best pan is a 10" non-stick crepe pan. The good news is they are inexpensive, and not only usable for crepes but for eggs and other foods. The crêpe pan I use is light weight and allows you to handle and swirl the batter to cover the pan bottom to make a crepe. You can also use a 10" nonstick skillet instead of a special crepe pan. The benefit of a real crepe pan is the sides are low, so it's easier to turn the crepes.
    • A mini off-set spatula: This cheap little tool is something I reach for often, not just for crepes. If you don't want to bother, use a fork. You need something to gently life the edges of the crepe while it cooks to peak underneath, then grab the edges to flip it.
    • Blender: While you can make gluten-free crepe batter by hand in a medium bowl with a whisk, a good blender does a better job. If making crepe batter by hand, whisk it very well until smooth and if needed, strain out any lumps. 
    • Fine sieve: A fine sieve is a basic tool everyone should have in the kitchen. Flour for crepes must be sifted to lighten and aerate the batter and remove any lumps. You can also use an old fashioned sifter. If you like to bake, you'll love having a sifter. It's faster than using a sieve, but both work. Find them at kitchen stores, Walmart, online, etc.
    • Parchment paper: I buy handy 9" parchment rounds to layer finished and cooled crepes when making them ahead. You can use parchment squares or wax paper as well and trim them to fit. The rounds fit perfect, and you can use them to line cake pans and springform pans.

    How to Make Gluten-Free Crepes

    Note: I've made gluten-free crepes with ¼ cup of batter for very thin crepes, and with ⅓ cup, for crepes that are just a little sturdier (and still delicious). That's only 1 tablespoon difference, both work.

    Sifted flour on  parchment paper with a sifter and sieve.
    Step 1: Sift the flour to lighten it and remove any lumps.
    Flour, eggs, milk, vanilla in a blender container to make crepe batter.
    Step 2: Add milk, flour, eggs, vanilla, and sugar, and salt to the blender.
    Pale yellow batter inside a blender container.
    Step 3: Blend on low speed blend until smooth, about 45 seconds. Crepe batter will be thin and will thicken a bit upon resting and refrigerating.
    A Pyrex glass measuring container with light yellow batter covered in plastic.
    Step 4: Pour the batter into a container, cover and let the batter rest refrigerated for 30 minutes(or longer). Can be made ahead. Melt butter when ready to make crepes.

    Chef's tip: Why rest the batter? For better results. So the flour hydrates, any bubbles dissipate for a smoother batter, and for more delicate crepes. The flavor is also better. Rest 30 minutes. I've made batter up to 2 days in advance then whisked well to reincorporate. I also get it out of the refrigerate and let it stand to get the chill off, until the temperature is closer to room temperature.

    Yellow batter in a crepe pan for making crepes, finished crepes on a plate.
    Step 5: Place pan over medium heat. Brush with a small amount of melted butter. Pour scant ⅓ cup of batter and immediately turn and swirl the pan in a circular motion until the batter coats the bottom of the pan entirely. Cook 60 seconds on first side. Crepe should be set and edges done.
    A golden crepe in a black shallow pan finished cooking.
    Step 6: Lift the edge of the crepe and with your fingers gently turn it over to the second side. Shake the pan a bit to re-center. Cook another 45 seconds. Turn the heat down a bit if needed so they don't brown too quickly.
    A stack of golden crepe between rounds of parchment paper on a plate.
    Step 7: As each crepe is completed, slide it out of the pan onto a flat plate. When done, layer them between parchment paper or wax paper.

    When crepes are cool, wrap in plastic film then into a zip-stye bag. Refrigerate for 3-4 days or freeze up to 4 months (remember to label and date).

    Chef's tip: Frozen crepes are fragile. Place as many gluten-free crepes as you need in the refrigerator overnight to thaw and handle with care so they don't break. Allow crepes to thaw completely before unwrapping and separating to prevent tearing. The parchment layers really help with handling.

    Serving Suggestions

    In France, one of the simplest and most beloved ways to enjoy crepes is crêpe au sucre, served with melted butter and a sprinkle of sugar. Crepes filled with Nutella are another favorite. At home, an easy way to serve gluten-free crepes is with good jam, fresh fruit, and a light dusting of powdered sugar or powdered monk fruit for a no-sugar option. Find more ideas below.

    Two golden folded crepes on a white plate with blueberry jam and whipped cream.

    Sweet Crepe Ideas

    Find your favorite fillings and toppings. Fill crepes with lightly sweetened vanilla whipped cream, also called Chantilly cream, or whipped ricotta sweetened with a little honey. Another option is pureed cottage cheese, blended smooth in a food processor and sweetened however you like.

    For breakfast, a drizzle of maple syrup is delicious. For dessert, try strawberry coulis, jam, fresh berries, or a little whipped cream. I usually keep it simple with jam, berries, or whipped cream, or all three if I'm serving crepes to friends for dessert.

    For a topping that works well for both breakfast and dessert, try this cinnamon apple compote or blueberry compote.

    Savory Crepe Ideas

    For breakfast, fill savory crepes with softly scrambled eggs and cheese. For lunch or dinner, try a creamy chicken, mushroom, or creamed spinach filling.

    A little French restaurant near our house serves buckwheat crepes filled with slices of ham, then topped with a poached egg and cheese. Always a treat.

    Savory vegetables make a great filling too, like this roasted vegetable ratatouille, another terrific French-inspired dish.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do I make crepe batter smooth and lump-free?

    The best way to achieve lump free crepe batter is with a blender on low speed. Without a blender, whisk well in a bowl until smooth and if lumps persist, strain the batter through a fine sieve before using. Another tip, strain your flour before mixing.

    Should I let the crepe batter rest before cooking?

    After mixing, rest crepe batter in the refrigerator for 30-60 minutes so the flour has a chance to hydrate. This is especially important for gluten-free crepes.

    What type of pan is best for making crepes?

    While I've used carbon steel pans, a non-stick pan frying pan will do. Best is a non-stick crepe pan for making crepes. They are shallow, so the crepes are easy to turn, and not a heavy pan, so they are easy to swirl the batter and handle. The good thing is that non-stick crepe pans are inexpensive and worth buying if you love crepes. They make making crepes easy, so you can enjoy them more often.

    Can I make crepes ahead of time?

    You can definitely make crepes ahead of time. Cool crepes then stack them between pieces of parchment paper or wax paper and refrigerate until serving time.

    To freeze, just wrap the stack in plastic film and then in a zip-style bag. To freeze, wrap the stack of crepe in layers of plastic wrap then into a freezer-safe bag. Label and date for up to two months. To thaw, place them in the refrigerator overnight. When thawed, gently remove the layers an fill as desire with sweet or savory options.

    More Breakfast and Brunch Recipes

    Looking for more breakfast and brunch inspiration? Here are a few reader-favorite recipes to add to your table, whether you're planning a cozy weekend breakfast or a special brunch spread.

    • A golden cinnamon muffin with dripping glaze on a muffin paper.
      Bakery Style Cinnamon Muffins (Gluten-Free)
    • A golden cheesy frittata in a cast iron skillet sprinkled with parmesan and chopped parsley.
      Ham and Cheese Frittata
    • Dutch baby oven pancakes
      Gluten-Free Dutch Baby (German Pancakes)
    • Stacked buckwheat pancakes on a white plate with syrup and blueberries.
      The Best Buckwheat Pancakes Recipe

    If You Make Gluten-Free Crepes

    Let me know if you made these gluten-free crepes by adding a comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Two golden folded crepes on a white plate with blueberry jam and whipped cream.

    Gluten-free Crepes

    Sally Cameron
    The classic thin French pancakes called crepes, made gluten-free (or with all purpose wheat flour). Delicious for a sweet dessert or for a more savory breakfast, lunch or dinner. Easy and fun to make, crepes freeze so you can make them ahead to use anytime.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 18 minutes mins
    Total Time 23 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, Dessert, Dinner
    Cuisine French
    Servings 4 to 5, 8-10 crepes, 2 per person
    Calories 189 kcal

    Equipment

    • 10" non-stick crepe pan or non-stick fry pan
    • blender
    • Sifter or fine sieve
    • Mini off-set spatula or fork
    • Small pastry brush optional but makes buttering the pan easier

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 cup gluten-free flour or regular all purpose flour (wheat)
    • 2 cups low fat milk whole milk or plant milk
    • 2 large eggs
    • 2 tablespoons sugar or monk fruit for sweet crepes only
    • ¾ teaspoon vanilla extract sweet crepes only
    • 1 pinch salt
    • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter or plant butter, melted

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Make crepe batter

    • Sift the flour onto a piece of wax paper or parchment paper. Add the milk to the blender, then the sifted flour, eggs, sugar or monk fruit, vanilla, and pinch of salt. Blend on low speed for about 45 seconds, until blended. Don't use high speed. Note: for savory crepes, omit the sugar and vanilla.

    Refrigerate batter

    • Pour the crepe batter into an airtight container and refrigerate for 30 minutes to hydrate flour. Can be made ahead up to 2 days.

    Make the crepes

    • Remove the batter from the refrigerator. Whisk crepe batter to re-incorporate into a smooth batter.
    • Melt the butter in a small bowl in the microwave. Place the pan over medium heat to get hot, then turn down to medium low. Brush a little melted butter over the pan surface, it should sizzle just a little.
      Pour in a scant ⅓ cup of batter and immediately lift the pan and gently swirl so the batter evenly covers the bottom of the pan. Don't worry if the first one is not perfect looking. It will still taste great.
    • Cook the first side of the crepe approximately 60 seconds. Lift an edge to see if it is lightly golden, the with your fingers (it's a little hot) pick up the crepe and turn it over. Shake the pan to re-center if needed. Cook approximately 30-45 seconds longer, the slide the crepe out of the pan onto a flat plate.
      Continue making crepes, brushing between each one with a very small amount of butter. Stack crepes as you go.

    To serve

    • Fold into quarters serve and top as preferred, or to refrigerate for another day.
      Stack them each between a layer of parchment of wax paper then wrap well in plastic film and refrigerate for 3-4 days. Alternatively, freeze crepes for up to two months. Be sure to label and date the package. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight.

    Notes

    Nutrition calculation was done with standard sugar. If you make them with monk fruit (as I do), it is only 3 grams of sugar per crepe (and 21 carbs for 2). Numbers are included for the crepes only, not for any topping or fillings you might enjoy. 
    If crepes are frozen, they are fragile until completely thawed so handle them carefully so they don't break. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight for best results. Separating them is easy if you've layered between parchment paper. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2crepesCalories: 189kcalCarbohydrates: 27gProtein: 8gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 85mgSodium: 73mgPotassium: 179mgFiber: 2gSugar: 10gVitamin A: 363IUCalcium: 147mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    The Best Roasted Tomato Sauce

    07/22/2024 by Sally Cameron 106 Comments

    roasted tomato marinara

    As farmers' markets overflow with fresh, ripe summer tomatoes, now is the perfect time to make a batch of roasted tomato sauce. Skip the stockpot and reach for your roasting pan to create a richly concentrated and flavorful sauce that captures the essence of summer. While 'the best' is a bold statement, this recipe has been shared more than 50,000 times through the years. It's a reader favorite for good reason, since 2011.

    Jars of rich red roasted tomato sauce on a wood counter with fresh tomatoes and garlic cloves.

    In late summer when prices are low, I'll bring home 10-20 pounds of fresh tomatoes and make my own roasted tomato sauce. Roasting tomatoes concentrates their natural sweetness. Adding garlic, onions, and herbs adds wonderful flavor. Store-bought pasta sauce can't hold a candle to this!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Roasted tomato sauce freezes well for a quick meal in colder months to come.
    • Takes advantage of fresh summer tomatoes.
    • Terrific with many dishes like this easy chicken parmesan, and of course simply with a bowl of pasta.

    If you love homemade tomato sauce, here's another recipe, my easy homemade marinara sauce. Make it in about 30 minutes with canned tomatoes.

    Roasted Tomato Sauce Ingredients

    Ingredients for roasted tomato sauce on a marble counter with tomatoes, onion, garlic, oil, wine.
    • Tomatoes: Use meaty, fresh ripe tomatoes, whatever looks best and is a good price as you need a lot of tomatoes. Check out your local farmer's markets. Different types of tomatoes is good
    • Garlic: Use fresh garlic cloves, not garlic powder, for that punch of flavor. A must for tomato sauce.
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is the best.
    • Wine: A little dry red wine adds nice flavor but it's optional.
    • Herbs: Fresh oregano, fresh basil leaves, or some of each.
    • Onions: Yellow, brown, or white, all are fine.
    • Red pepper flakes: If you want to add a little spiciness.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and black pepper.

    Here's another of my favorite tomato-based sauces; mushroom marinara. Rich and meaty but no meat!

    Chef Sally's tip on wine: When I cook with wine I use the mini airline size bottles so I don't have to open a big bottle. They work great, are inexpensive, and easy to keep in the pantry. Wine enhances flavor in cooking, but of course using it is optional.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • To offset the acidity of the tomatoes, some people add a little sugar. If your tomatoes are sweet, you probably won't need it, but you can use it if perferred. Another option is a little monk fruit.
    • Another nice addition is a tablespoon or two of balsamic vinegar. Add this when pureeing the roasted tomato sauce. It adds nicely to the flavor of the sauce. 
    • To use dried herbs instead of fresh herbs, use a dried Italian seasoning blend. Use ⅓ to ½ as much as fresh herbs.

    Chef's tips on tomatoes: So what's a good tomato for this sauce? I usually buy a combination of heirloom varieties like Brandywine and Purple Cherokee (a purple beefsteak) and Roma tomatoes, for fun color and flavor mixed in. Red beefsteak tomatoes are excellet too. Buy what looks best and is a good price as this is a lot of tomatoes! A mix is great for roasted pasta sauce. For more info on varieties of tomatoes read this.

    Recipe Instructions

    Ten pounds of colorful chopped tomatoes on a black cutting board with a knife.
    • Step 1: Pre-heat a hot oven or two ovens to 425°F.
    • Step 2: Wash the tomatoes and core them, depending on variety. Beefsteak and heirloom tomatoes have bigger cores. If you are using Romas, you may only need to chop them. Chop the tomatoes into larger chunks. Add them to the roasting pans.
    • Step 3: Roughly chop onions and peel garlic cloves leaving them whole. Add them to the roasting pans, diving the quantity between the two.
    • Step 4: Add olive oil, chopped herbs, wine (if using), salt and pepper and toss with your hands to mix.
    • Step 5: Roast the tomatoes. Timing is approximately 1:15 minutes, depending on how juicy the tomatoes are, how concentrated you want your roasted tomato sauce, and your ovens. It might take a little longer.
    • Stir the sauce half way through. Check their progress around 45 minutes. Don't leave the ovens open too long. Roast until the tomatoes and onions are a nicely shriveled with browned edges and there is still a little juice in the pan bottom.
    A stainless steel roasting pan of roasted tomatoes, onions, herbs, and garlic.
    • Step 6: When roasting is complete, allow pans to cool long enough to handle, then spoon everything carefully into a food processor or blender in batches and puree. For a chunky sauce, do a few pulses. For a smooth sauce, process for a little longer. Your preference.
    Roasted tomatoes, onions, garlic cloves, and herbs in a food processor to be pureed.

    Another tool option, use a stick blender (immersion blender). They are a handy tool that takes up a lot less kitchen space than a food processor or high powered blender for smaller kitchens. Be sure to puree in a tall pot in the kitchen sink to reduce splatter (and wear an apron!).

    Chef's tip on yield: My most recent batch of roasted tomato sauce yielded 3 beautiful quarts. At other times, the yield has been 2 quarts. Maybe the tomatoes were more or less juicy, or maybe I reduced it farther in roasting. Either way, the sauce is fantastic and thick after pureeing.

    Pureed tomato sauce in a food processor workbowl ready to enjoy.

    Recipe Tips and Tricks

    Use one large roasting pan (like you use for a turkey) for a half batch or two large roasting pans for a full batch. For a full batch with one roasting pan, split this recipe into two batches. If you have double ovens or one really large oven, you might be able to do two pans at once with two roasting pans. If you only have one roasting pan, try borrowing a second from a friend.

    Another option is using a big electric roaster like you might do a turkey in. Electric roasters are great tools and I've used them for other recipes but not for roasted tomato sauce. You'll have to experiment with timing.

    Don't use disposable, uncoated aluminum pans. The acidity in tomatoes reacts with the aluminum with the possibility of leaving an unpleasant metallic taste.

    While the long terms effects of aluminum leaching into foods it not fully known (there are conflicting reports), acidic foods like tomatoes are better off in stainless steel or anodized aluminum. Anodized aluminum roasting pans work because the manufacturing process hardens the metal making it non-reactive.

    Read Tip: Willie says "I've been making this for a few years now - the best marinara sauce EVER! ? I use two stainless steel cookie sheets (don't have 2 roasting pans) and switch top and bottom, half way thru cooking". See here entire comment below.

    Serving and Storing Suggestions

    • Serve over your favorite pasta noodle. It's a good basic spaghetti sauce, or for penne or rotini (corkscrew).
    • For a lower carb dinner, serve over zucchini noodles.
    • It makes a terrific pizza sauce!
    • Roasted tomato sauce is also terrific with my ricotta and kale stuffed shells recipe.
    • Serve as a dipping sauce with a grilled cheese sandwich. Oh, it's so good.
    Finished tomato sauce in glass jars and silicone molds for freezing.

    How Do I Store Roasted Tomato Sauce?

    Roasted tomato sauce will keep in the refrigerator for 5 days in an airtight container, or freezer for up to 6 months. I've used glass jars (like a mason jar or a ball jar) and these portioned silicone freezing cubes.

    Store roasted tomato sauce in them or when the sauce is frozen solid, pop the cubes out and store in freezer-safe zip bags, labeled and dated.

    When you fill jars, don't fill them all of the way to the top. Leave a little head space for expansion.

    To thaw frozen sauce, place in the refrigerator overnight, pour into a pan over medium heat with a lid on low heat. On of my favorite things to label jars with is these removable labels. They work great.

    Roasted Tomato Sauce Canning Notes

    I used to can this sauce with a pressure canner so it was pantry stable. Now I just freeze the finished sauce.

    Low-acid foods such as tomato sauce should optimally be processed using a pressure canner, not a water bath. Only a pressure canner can reach the 240 degrees necessary to safely process low-acid foods (a ph value greater than 4.6).

    For instructions on preparing canned tomatoes, check out this article from Simply Canning.

    A jar of rich red, chunky roasted tomato sauce without a lid and red ripe tomatoes.

    Recipe FAQs

    Which type of tomatoes are best for roasting?

    Meatier tomatoes are best for making a roasted tomato sauce. Buy either Roma tomatoes or plum tomatoes, but you can use any variety of tomatoes depending on availability and personal preference. I often use heirloom tomatoes.

    If the tomatoes have lots of seeds, squeeze or slice some of them out after halving or quartering. A combination of tomatoes make for good flavor. If you want a really red sauce, use all red tomatoes, or mix in colors for fun and flavor.

    Do I need to peel the tomatoes before roasting them?

    No need to peel tomatoes before roasting as the skins soften during roasting and add nice texture to the finished sauce. Plus, there is good nutrition in those skins, so I recommend not peeling. It's definitely a time saver too. For a smoother roasted tomato sauce, puree longer in a food processor or blender.

    What herbs and spices work well in roasted tomato sauce?

    Traditional herbs for roasted tomato sauce include basil, oregano, thyme, rosemary, Italian parsley, and bay leaf. Soft leaf herbs blend into the finished sauce easily when pureeing. Herbs such as bay leaf must be removed, as you do not want to eat them. Rosemary, if chopped, will blend in, or use sprigs then remove after roasting.

    More Recipes With Tomatoes

    Here are more recipe for you using tomatoes, from oven roasted cherry tomatoes to an easy marinara, bolognese, and mushroom sauce.

    • A white bowl of red and gold roasted cherry tomatoes with fresh thyme leaves.
      Garlic Roasted Tomatoes with Thyme
    • Pot full of homemade marinara.
      Easy Pasta Sauce With Tomato Sauce
    • bison bolognese with pasta
      Bison Bolognese(Ground Bison Meat Sauce)
    • mushroom marinara pasta sauce
      Mushroom Tomato Sauce

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this roasted tomato sauce recipe, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    Recipe originally published in September 19, 2011.

    📖 Recipe

    roasted tomato marinara sauce | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Roasted Tomato Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Roasting tomatoes makes an incredibly rich and concentrated tomato sauce. To roast this many tomatoes at once, you need two roasting pans so as not to crowd the ingredients. That may require two ovens or roasting in two batches. If you don't own a roasting pan, find a friend who does and borrow one. Freezes beautifully. Serving is ¾ cup.
    5 from 5 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 50 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr
    Course Sauce
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 16 Yield 3 quarts (12 cups)
    Calories 133 kcal

    Equipment

    • Stainless steel roasting pans
    • Food processor or blender
    • Double ovens or split the batch into two

    Ingredients
      

    • 10 pounds fresh tomatoes
    • 16 large whole garlic cloves, peeled
    • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • ½ cup dry red wine optional
    • 6 tablespoons fresh oregano leaves or basil leaves (or both) or 2 tablespoons dried
    • 2 medium onions roughly chopped
    • 1-2 tablespoons Balsamic vinegar optional
    • 2 teaspoons sea salt
    • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ¼-1/2 teaspoon red pepper flakes optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Pre-heat Ovens

    • Pre-heat the oven (s) to 425°F. Get out two large stainless steel roasting pans (like for roasting a turkey).

    Prep Tomatoes

    • Wash the tomatoes. Depending on the type of tomato, you may need to cut out the core first, as with large Beefsteak or Heirloom varieties. You may not need to with Roma or plum tomatoes Cut tomatoes into large chunks. Don't cut the pieces too small. Big chunks are good. Smaller pieces roast too fast.

    Roast Tomatoes

    • Place tomatoes in the roasting pan. Add garlic cloves, oil, wine or broth, oregano, onion, salt and pepper. Toss with your hands. Place pans in the oven and roast until tomatoes have reduced and are starting to get a few black edges. The pan should still have some juices, not be dry.  Depending on your oven it should take about 60 minutes. Stir half way through. If the tomatoes are really juicy, it may take longer.

    Cool and Puree

    • Remove pans from oven, set on the stove top and allow to cool until you can handle it. Carefully transfer the roast tomatoes into a food processor and pulse 5-6 times or until you get the preferred texture. You can also use a blender and process in batches. Serve or cool completely and freeze in portions.

    Notes

    Canning tomatoes requires a pressure canner. See notes in the post, and read about canning tomatoes on recommended links.
    For tomatoes, use what is best at the market. Roma tomatoes, plum tomatoes, beefsteaks, and heirloom tomatoes all work great in this recipe. 
    The yield for this recipe is 2-3 quarts, depending on how far you roast or reduce the tomatoes. This sauce will keep fresh in the refrigerator for 4-5 days, or freeze for up to 6 months. Some batches I've reduced the sauce way down with little juice left in the pan. This last batch I did not go as far and got 3 beautiful quarts of sauce. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 0.75cupCalories: 133kcalCarbohydrates: 15gProtein: 3gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gSodium: 307mgPotassium: 731mgFiber: 5gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 2404IUVitamin C: 41mgCalcium: 68mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Tropical Mango Pineapple Smoothie

    08/17/2024 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    A bright yellow mango pineapple smoothie in a glass with lime and fruit wedge.

    Refreshing on a hot day, enjoy tropical flavors with this mango pineapple smoothie, bursting with the vibrant flavors of ripe mango, pineapple, and lime juice. Skip the fast food version that's loaded with sugar and make this healthier alternative at home in minutes. Naturally sweetened with whole fruit, it's also packed with protein from Greek yogurt and fiber, making it a great way to start the day.

    Ever order a McDonald's mango pineapple smoothie? Just reading the nutrition label could send you into sugar shock. It's the kind of smoothie that gives smoothies a bad name. A medium mango pineapple smoothie at the golden arches has a whopping 57 grams of sugar (14 teaspoons) and almost no protein (3 grams). Let's fix that right now so you can enjoy this tropical smoothie at home.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Make it in minutes or make it ahead for a grab-and-go breakfast.
    • High in protein and fiber, a healthy mango pineapple smoothie recipe.
    • Use frozen fruit or fresh fruit.
    • Way less sugar than a fast food mango pineapple smoothie.

    If you love mango in smoothies, try this bright green smoothie with mango and spinach. Sounds crazy but it's terrific and a beautiful color. 

    Recipe Ingredients

    Two glasses of bright golden mango pineapple smoothies with lime and pineapple wedges.

    While this smoothie is a tropical delight, it is still a higher sugar smoothie. Be careful how much fruit you add. If you eat low carb or watch your sugar intake, keep this smoothie recipe as a treat, not an everyday smoothie.

    • Milk: Coconut milk adds more of a tropical touch, but almond milk, hemp seed milk, dairy milk, or cashew milk all work.
    • Yogurt: Buy unflavored plain Greek yogurt for the best protein.
    • Protein powder: Use your preferred. I generally use whey protein.
    • Mango: Fresh mango or frozen mango. Frozen mango chunks make it frosty and thicker.
    • Pineapple: Use fresh pineapple or frozen pineapple.
    • Lime: A little fresh lime juice lifts the flavor and tempers the sweetness.
    • Turmeric: Just a little adds golden color (optional), plus it's good for you.
    • Vanilla: What's more tropical than vanilla? Add a little vanilla extract or vanilla paste, if you are not using vanilla protein powder.

    For lower sugar smoothies, try berry smoothies and check out my smoothies recipe index page.

    Chef's tip: One tropical fruit I skip in a mango pineapple smoothie is banana. Often used in smoothie recipes to make them creamy, this smoothie recipe doesn't need more sugar, as it gets nice creaminess from the yogurt. Can you add banana? Yes, fresh banana or frozen banana. I don't think it is needed, but it's up to you.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • It might sound crazy but a little mild curry powder is nice!
    • Swap lemon juice for lime juice.
    • Use either all protein powder or all yogurt to meet your protein needs.
    • For more fiber and protein, add a tablespoon of ground flax seed.
    • If you want it sweeter, try a little maple syrup, honey, or monk fruit (for no added sugar). 
    • Try coconut water for your liquid, but read the labels for added sugar.
    • Add a vanilla extract, ground vanilla, or use vanilla protein powder. 

    Fresh pineapple mango salsa is terrific with chicken, fish, shrimp, and many other dishes. It's brightly flavored and delicious if you've never made it.

    Chef's tip: What NOT to use in a pineapple mango smoothie? Skip any mango puree concentrate, pineapple puree, pineapple juice, fruit juice concentrate, or orange juice concentrate. Why? They are pure sugar as the fiber is gone, and they really spike your blood sugar. Use whole fruit that still has the fiber and you'll do much better.

    Another good combination with pineapple is frozen cucumber. Sounds crazy but it's really refreshing! Look at my cucumber smoothie post for how to cut up and freeze the cucumber.

    Smoothie Instructions

    A blender container with ingredients for a smoothie.
    A pureed mango smoothie in a blender ready for pouring.

    Any blender will do but a high-speed blender purees better and works faster.

    To the blender container add the milk first, then the yogurt, fruit, protein powder, lime juice, and turmeric (if using). Blend away, start low to grind up the fruit, then turn it up to high to puree.

    Serving Suggestions

    A bright yellow mango pineapple smoothie with pineapple and lime garnish.

    Serve right away or soon after blending. Keep it refrigerated if you are not drinking it right away, or in an insulated thermos if on the go.

    You can make a mango pineapple smoothie the night ahead of time and shake well to re-blend in the morning or after a workout. They are a great quick breakfast.

    For another classic smoothie, try this strawberry banana smoothie with yogurt.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I prepare a mango pineapple smoothie in advance?

    It's best enjoyed fresh, but you can prepare it in advance and store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours. Shake, stir, or re-blend before drinking.

    How can I make a protein-rich mango pineapple smoothie?

    To increase the protein, try adding protein powder, Greek yogurt, silken tofu, or a handful of nuts and seeds (hemp seeds, chia seeds) to increase the protein level. Use a combination of options to round out your protein needs. One more tip, compare milk protein levels and try a higher protein option such as homemade hemp seed milk.

    Is it necessary to add sweeteners like honey or sugar?

    No, sweeteners are not needed in a smoothie including tropical fruit as they are naturally higher in sugar. If you feel you need it sweeter, use an alternative sweetener without sugar such as monk fruit.

    Do I need a high-powered blender to make a mango pineapple smoothie?

    You can make a smoothie with almost any blender. A high-powered blender creates a smoother texture, but a regular blender or personal blender also work. You might need to blend longer or add a little more liquid to achieve the desired consistency.

    More Healthy Fruity Smoothies

    • Top down shot of a deep pink cherry smoothie in a tall glass with banana and a cherry.
      5-Minute Cherry Smoothie Recipe
    • A bright pink berry smoothie with fresh raspberries inside the glass.
      Raspberry Smoothie (High Protein & Easy)
    • chocolate blueberry smoothie
      Chocolate Blueberry Smoothie (high protein)

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make this mango pineapple smoothie, I hope you'll comment and let me know how you liked it. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I appreciate hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    A bright yellow mango pineapple smoothie in a glass with lime and fruit wedge.

    Mango Pineapple Smoothie

    Sally Cameron
    A tropical dreamy creamy smoothie with mango and pineapple, blend in a minute for breakfast or a post workout refuel. Make it the night ahead if desired and keep well refrigerated, shake well before enjoying.
    No ratings yet
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Breakfast, smoothie
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1
    Calories 254 kcal

    Equipment

    • High speed blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 10 ounces unsweetened almond milk or milk of choice
    • ½ cup plain greek yogurt
    • ½ cup chopped mango fresh or frozen
    • ¼ cup pineapple fresh or frozen
    • ½ scoop protein powder plain or vanilla
    • ½ teaspoon turmeric powder optional
    • 1 lime juiced
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract or vanilla paste

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add liquid to the blender first, then yogurt, then all other ingredients and blend on high until smooth and creamy. For a frostier smoothie add a few ice cubes.

    Notes

    Smoothie milk options:
    Hemp seed milk, dairy milk, almond milk, cashew milks, and coconut milk really adds tropical flavor, all make this a delicious smoothie. 
    For more tips on making healthy smoothies, please read my Healthy Smoothie Guide.
    Nutritional information is an estimate provided to you as a courtesy. You should calculate the actual nutritional information with the products and brands you are using with your preferred nutritional calculator if there are questions. 
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 254kcalCarbohydrates: 32gProtein: 26gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 0.5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 30mgSodium: 430mgPotassium: 463mgFiber: 5gSugar: 21gVitamin A: 994IUVitamin C: 70mgCalcium: 539mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    5-Minute Cherry Smoothie Recipe

    06/28/2024 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    Top down shot of a deep pink cherry smoothie in a tall glass with banana and a cherry.

    Got 5 minutes for a quick breakfast that's healthy? Whip up this creamy cherry smoothie. Use fresh or frozen cherries, either sweet cherries or tart cherries. Cherry season is fleeting so take advantage of the season while you can and enjoy this cherry smoothie. Prep them ahead if needed, they hold well in the refrigerator.

    Two glasses or bright pink cherry smoothie with dark cherries in the background.

    You know it's summer when cherries show up at the market. Beyond using cherries for fabulous desserts like this easy cherry cake, a cherry smoothie is one of my favorite ways to enjoy cherries. While fresh cherries are the essence of summer, frozen cherries work year round for this terrific smoothie.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Use fresh or frozen cherries.
    • Works with tart cherries or sweet cherries.
    • A simple smoothie recipe but customizable with great add-in options.
    • High protein with Greek yogurt (if you do dairy).

    Recipe Ingredients

    Simple ingredients for a cherry smoothie in glass bowls.
    • Milk: I use homemade unsweetened almond milk but use your milk of choice.
    • Cherries: Both tart cherries and sweet dark cherries make a great smoothie, as well as both fresh and frozen.
    • Yogurt: I recommend buying plain Greek yogurt for the thick creaminess and high protein that is adds to a cherry smoothie.
    • Banana: Fresh banana or frozen banana are good. Frozen makes a thicker, colder smoothie.
    • Flavoring: Just a little almond extract really adds complimentary flavor to the cherries, or use vanilla extract for a cherry vanilla smoothie.
    • Sweetening: Choose a mild honey for sweetness. How much you use will depend on the natural sweetness of the cherries. Also try maple syrup, but it has a definite taste.

    Chef's cherry tip: Fresh cherries or frozen cherries? I've used purchased frozen cherries, fresh pitted cherries, and fresh cherries that I pitted then froze for this cherry smoothie. They all work but my first choice is the fresh pitted then frozen cherries. Yes, it's a bit of work to pit and freeze your own fresh cherries but I find the flavor the best. Outside of cherry season, I'll go through my frozen stash and then use store-frozen cherries if available.

    Ways to Customize a Cherry Smoothie

    Want a healthy cherry smoothie recipe? Try some of these substitutions and variations.

    • Milk variations: try homemade coconut milk, cashew milk, dairy milk, hemp seed milk, or oat milk, (each will change the flavor a little).
    • Make it a vegan cherry smoothie with non-dairy milk and yogurt.
    • Add protein powder for higher protein, either whey, almond, egg white, or a plant-based blend.
    • For a black forest chocolate cherry smoothie add cocoa powder or use chocolate protein powder.
    • For no-added sugar, use a monk fruit honey or simple syrup for sweetening.
    • Skip the sweetening and instead use a vanilla Greek yogurt.
    • For a boost of healthy fats, add a tablespoon of almond butter, peanut butter, cashew butter, coconut butter, or even MCT oil.
    • For added fiber and protein add 1-2 tablespoons of flaxseed meal.
    • One thing I add to my smoothies everyday is a supplement called creatine. It helps with building muscle, staying strong, and improving cognition and memory. Here's a great article on creatine. It's not just for body builders or men.
    • One more add-in worth mentioning is tart cherry powder. Known to be great for joints, muscle soreness, and post workout recovery. Plus it tastes great in smoothies.

    Be sure the check out my Ultimate Guide to Making Healthy Smoothies!

    Smoothie Instructions

    Making smoothies is best with a high-speed blender.

    Cherries, banana, and milk in a blender container.
    Step 1: Add milk to the blender first, then protein powder if using. Next add the cherries, bananas, sweetener, and extract.
    A pink and bubbly blended cherry smoothie in a blender container.
    Step 2: Start blender on slow speed to start grinding the fruit together, then power up to high and blend until smooth as desired.

    How to Store Cherries

    Cherries like things cool and dry, making moisture is the enemy of cherries. I wash mine as soon as I get home with this produce wash, then allow them to dry completely on a clean kitchen towel. Do not put them away unless they are dry or you run the risk of moldy cherries.

    When cherries are totally dry, place them in a storage container with a layer of paper towels at the bottom to minimize condensation or moisture.

    They will last 3-4 days in the refrigerator. Beyond that, freeze extra cherries.

    Chef's tip on cherries: How can you tell tart cherries (sour cherries) from sweet cherries? By the color. Tart cherries are bright red while sweet cherries are the dark red ones. Read here about the health benefits of cherries.

    How to Freeze Cherries

    Pitted frozen whole dark red cherries on a sheet tray.
    Step 1: Pit and freeze whole cherries on a rimmed sheet tray until firm.
    Bagged dark red cherries frozen for storage.
    Step 2: Store frozen cherries in freezer safe containers or zip bags.

    To freeze cherries, wash and dry first, then pit them with a cherry pitter tool and lay them in a single layer on a plastic or parchment line rimmed baking sheet tray that will fit in your freezer (I use quarter sheet size). Freeze for several hours until firm, then store them in a freezer safe container.

    Frozen cherries are best up to 6 months but can last up to a year properly frozen and stored. So while it's cherry season, freeze as many as you can for the months ahead.

    Here's another beautiful fruit smoothie and my other go-to recipe, this raspberry smoothie.

    Top down shot of a deep pink cherry smoothie in a tall glass with banana and a cherry.

    Serving Suggestions

    Enjoy a cherry smoothie right out of the blender or make it the night ahead and store it in an airtight container like a wide mouth ball jar with tight fitting lid. Refrigerate for a great grab-and-go breakfast or workout refuel.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do I pit cherries for a smoothie?

    The best way to pit cherries for a smoothie or any other recipe is with an inexpensive tool called a cherry pitter. Find them online and where cooking tools are sold. Without a cherry pitter you can use a paring knife, but it's slower and messier.

    How can I make my cherry smoothie creamier?

    For a creamy cherry smoothie, add yogurt. Use Greek yogurt as it is thicker than regular yogurt. Banana adds creaminess to smoothies, either fresh or frozen. Another creamy add-in is your favorite nut butter.

    How do I make a cherry smoothie thicker?

    To make a thicker smoothie, try freezing your fruit if it's fresh. Add Greek yogurt or ground flaxseed, which also adds fiber and fat. If the smoothie does not have banana, it's a great thickener for a smoothie. Lastly, add a few ice cubes.

    More Smoothie Recipes

    Smoothies have been my go-to breakfast and post-workout preference for more than 25 years! For more healthy smoothie recipes, try the links below and check out the smoothie recipe page where I am adding more smoothie recipes.

    • A bright pink berry smoothie with fresh raspberries inside the glass.
      Raspberry Smoothie (High Protein & Easy)
    • two chocolate smoothies in glasses on an antique tray.
      Chocolate Banana Smoothie
    • Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.
      Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this cherry smoothie, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Top down shot of a deep pink cherry smoothie in a tall glass with banana and a cherry.

    Cherry Smoothie

    Sally Cameron
    Bright pink, sweet and smooth, grab some cherries while they are in season and enjoy this cherry smoothie!
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, smoothie
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1
    Calories 403 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • ½ cup unsweetened almond milk or your favorite milk
    • 1 cup pitted cherries, fresh or frozen about 5 ounces or 13-14 cherries
    • 2 teaspoons honey or other sweetener, optional
    • 1 small banana fresh or frozen
    • ¾ cup plain greek yogurt 5 ounces
    • ½ teaspoon almond extract or vanilla extract optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add milk to blender first, then yogurt, fruit, honey, and extract if using. Start low to grind the fruit together then increase speed and puree to desired consistency.
      Enjoy cherry smoothie right out of the blender or make it ahead and refrigerate for later enjoyment or overnight for a grab-and-go breakfast or post-workout refuel.

    Notes

    How to Customize a Cherry Smoothie

    • Milk variations: try homemade coconut milk, cashew milk, dairy milk, hemp seed milk, or oat milk, (each will change the flavor a little).
    • Make it vegan with non-dairy milk and yogurt.
    • Add protein powder for higher protein, either whey, almond, egg white, or a plant-based blend.
    • For a black forest chocolate cherry smoothie add cocoa powder or use chocolate protein powder.
    • For reduced sugar, use a monk fruit honey or simple syrup for sweetening.
    • Skip the sweetening and instead use a vanilla yogurt.
    • For a boost of healthy fats, add a tablespoon of almond butter, peanut butter, coconut butter, or even MCT oil.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 403kcalCarbohydrates: 60gProtein: 21gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 7mgSodium: 216mgPotassium: 999mgFiber: 8gSugar: 42gVitamin A: 161IUVitamin C: 19mgCalcium: 387mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Raspberry Smoothie (High Protein & Easy)

    04/01/2024 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    A bright pink berry smoothie with fresh raspberries inside the glass.

    This delicious raspberry smoothie is one of my favorite, go-to smoothie recipes. Why? It's a super simple smoothie and I am crazy about raspberries! If you are too, you're going to love this smoothie using frozen raspberries. Perfect for busy mornings when you have little time and still want to eat healthy. Blend one up today or make it the night ahead.

    A beautiful pink raspberry smoothie in a small glass with a bowl of raspberries.

    I've been drinking and creating smoothie recipes for more than 25 years, and here's a simple favorite, my raspberry smoothie. It's easy to keep the ingredients on hand for whenever you need them. Plus, there are lots of ways to vary it to meet your personal needs.

    Why You'll Love This Raspberry Smoothie

    • Quick and easy raspberry smoothie recipe.
    • Just a few simple ingredients.
    • Healthy for breakfast, afternoon snack, or a post-workout re-fuel.
    • Satisfy a sweet tooth in a healthy way.

    If you love raspberries, try grilled shrimp salad with raspberry vinaigrette, and for a terrific mocktail, try this raspberry shrub recipe, it's refreshing and no alcohol.

    Smoothie Ingredients

    Keeping the ingredients simple allows the flavor of the raspberries to shine through for a delicious smoothie.

    Ingredients for a raspberry smoothie in glass bowls.
    • Raspberries: Frozen raspberries are easiest for smoothies, but use fresh berries if you prefer, or use them for garnish if desired. Frozen is easy to keep on hand and usually less expensive than fresh.
    • Milk: For a non-dairy milk smoothie use unsweetened almond milk, hemp milk, cashew milk, oat milk, organic soy milk, or use dairy milk if preferred. All will add their own little flavor differences.
    • Sweetener: I use monk fruit for no added sugar, but mild honey or simple syrup work as well. Try this monk fruit simple syrup for no sugar added, maple syrup or monk fruit no-sugar maple syrup. Sweetener is optional, just enjoy it with the natural sweetness.
    • Banana: Use frozen banana for a frostier smoothie or fresh banana. Half of a banana will do. A barely yellow banana has less sugar. An overripe banana is higher in sugar and have a stronger taste that can overpower the flavor of the raspberry.
    • Protein powder: Add a scoop of protein powder (or mored depending on your brand and how much protein you need). This is what we use for whey protein, or for plant-based, try this almond protein powder or this for a good vegan protein blend. Use either plain or vanilla protein powder.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • For healthy fats, add a tablespoon of MCT oil, coconut butter, peanut butter, or nut butter, or use a few tablespoons of full-fat coconut milk.
    • Add a little vanilla extract.
    • Use a raspberry fruit blend with other berries.
    • Don't want to use protein powder? Try plain Greek yogurt, vanilla Greek yogurt, or even plain cottage cheese.
    • Alternate raspberries with another fresh fruit such as blackberries, blueberries, strawberries, plums or peaches.
    • Make a raspberry coconut smoothie using homemade coconut milk. It's creamy and delicious.
    • Use a power add-in such as pomegranate powder or tart cherry powder for an extra nutritional boost.

    How to Make a Raspberry Smoothie

    Use a high-powered blender for the best results and the creamiest texture.

    A bright pink raspberry smoothie in the blender.

    Add the milk to the blender first, then add the rest of your ingredients and blend until smooth.

    Chef's smoothie tip: This is a pretty thick smoothie. If you want it thinner, add more milk. If you want to make smoothie bowls, try using less milk for an even thicker smoothie.

    A bright pink berry smoothie with fresh raspberries inside the glass.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve raspberry smoothie right out of the blender or make it ahead, place it in an airtight container with a tight fitting lid and refrigerate. Great for grab-and-go mornings.

    For another terrific, fruity pink smoothie make this cherry smoothie with fresh or frozen cherries.

    Chef's tip on temperature: If you want it colder for warm summer days, add a few ice cubes to the blender for a frosty texture. If you want it not so cold for a wintery day, use fresh raspberries or thawed frozen raspberries and fresh banana.

    More Healthy Smoothie Recipes

    Smoothies are easy to make in so many delicious and healthy ways. Try one of these other smoothie recipes to mix up your morning or check out the smoothie recipe index where I am adding more smoothie recipes.

    • Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.
      Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)
    • two chocolate smoothies in glasses on an antique tray.
      Chocolate Banana Smoothie
    • coconut mango smoothie
      Spiced Mango Coconut Smoothie

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this raspberry smoothie, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A bright pink berry smoothie with fresh raspberries inside the glass.

    Raspberry Smoothie

    Sally Cameron
    Sweet, creamy, and a terrific healthy way to start your day. Make it in a minute!
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Breakfast, smoothie
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1 16 ounce or 2 8-ounce
    Calories 278 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 10 ounces almond milk or milk of choice
    • 5 ounces frozen raspberries ½ a 10-ounce package
    • ½ small banana fresh or frozen
    • 1 scoop protein powder or as needed
    • 1 teaspoon granulated monk fruit or honey

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add the milk to the blender first, then add the rest of the ingredients and blend until smooth.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 278kcalCarbohydrates: 41gProtein: 29gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 50mgSodium: 415mgPotassium: 485mgFiber: 11gSugar: 15gVitamin A: 159IUVitamin C: 42mgCalcium: 476mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    The Best Buckwheat Pancakes Recipe

    03/25/2024 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    Stacked buckwheat pancakes on a white plate with syrup and blueberries.

    Golden and delicious, buckwheat pancakes are an easy weekend breakfast and perfect for holiday breakfasts and brunches. They are not your usual pancake. With a name like buckwheat you'd think it's wheat, but it's naturally gluten-free. This pancake recipe works for everyone. This weekend make a batch of these hearty pancakes, or make them ahead and re-heat to save time.

    A big stack or buttermilk buckwheat pancakes dripping with maple syrup.

    Buckwheat might be a trending ingredient but it's been used for centuries. Think of Japanese buckwheat soba noodles, French buckwheat crepes, or Russian blini made with buckwheat flour. You can make fantastic buckwheat pancakes at home.

    Buckwheat is a naturally gluten-free grain-like seed that's high in protein and fiber, like quinoa. It has a nutty, earthy taste and a rich brown color. Enjoy this delicious buckwheat pancake recipe piled with your favorite toppings.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Buckwheat pancakes taste more earthy with a nutty flavor.
    • Enjoy with a variety of toppings including maple syrup, honey, fruit syrups, and berries.
    • Make them ahead and warm them up to save time.
    • Make them with all buckwheat flour or a combination of buckwheat flour and gluten-free flour or regular flour.
    • Make totally gluten-free pancakes or regular buckwheat pancakes.

    Why is it the best recipe? Because it's been tested over and over again and it works!If you'd rather have waffles, try these golden gluten-free waffles.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for buckwheat pancakes in bowls ready to make batter.
    • Buckwheat flour: A terrific whole grain flour with protein and fiber, and naturally gluten-free. Find it in most grocery stores. There are different kinds of buckwheat flour. See note below in Chef's tip.
    • Flour: To blend with the buckwheat flour. Use either a gluten-free flours blend or all purpose flour, or whole wheat flour.
    • Leavening agents: Use both baking powder and baking soda. Check the dates on your packages to be sure they are fresh.
    • Eggs: Eggs are a binder and create structure, stability, and moisture in baking. Be sure they are clean and not cracked.
    • Oil: Melted coconut oil, MCT oil, or a healthy neutral oil (not vegetable oil).
    • Honey: To sweet things up a bit. Use regular honey or monk fruit honey to reduce sugar (which is what I use).
    • Vanilla: Vanilla extract works well but you can use vanilla paste. If you love vanilla like I do, try it.
    • Buttermilk: Because buttermilk is fermented it is acidic, and it activates the baking soda for lighter pancakes. For substitutions see below.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and extras and nutritional information.

    Chef's tips on buckwheat flour: I used Bob's Red Mill Buckwheat Flour to develop the recipe. It's a dark buckwheat flour (dark in color) because it's ground with the seed hulls. It also works well in quick breads. You'll also find the light colored, finely ground "light" buckwheat flour which some people prefer for baking. For a lighter baked good you can also use part darker buckwheat flour with part regular flour. Don't be surprised when you open the bag that it looks like dirt. It's not!

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Use all buckwheat flour, but the pancakes will be a little darker.
    • To increase the protein, add a little protein powder to the dry ingredients, but you may need to add just a little more buttermilk for the right consistency.
    • No buttermilk? Substitute 2 ½ cups whole milk adding 2 ½ tablespoons white vinegar or apple cider vinegar.
    • Low on buttermilk? Last batch I only had 2 cups of buttermilk so I added a ½ cup of low fat milk and it worked perfectly. But you must have the buttermilk as it activates the leavening agents (baking soda and baking powder).
    • For fluffier pancakes use an old trick; separate the egg whites (and use an extra one) from the egg yolks and whip the egg whites stiff, then fold them into the batter. For me, just my standard recipe is fine!

    For an easy, make ahead breakfast, try these overnight oats with chia seeds. And for another terrific pancake recipe, try these blueberry lemon pancakes.

    If you need gluten-free, they will probably work with an all purpose GF flour blend that includes xanthan gum like.

    How to Make Buckwheat Pancakes

    Use either a non-stick skillet or griddle, or a well seasoned cast iron skillet to make buckwheat flour pancakes.

    Dry ingredients for pancakes in a glass mixing bowl.
    Step 1: Mix dry ingredients in a large bowl.
    Eggs and oil whisked together in a glass mixing bowl.
    Step 2: Mix eggs until smooth with oil, honey, vanilla.
    Pancake batter being mixed with a whisk.
    Step 3: Whisk in the buttermilk to complete the wet ingredients.
    Buckwheat pancake batter mixed in a glass bowl with a silver whisk.
    Step 4: Add the wet ingredients to the dry and blend the pancake batter.
    A pancake cooking in a non-stick pan, ready to flip with bubbles.
    Step 5: Heat the pan, brush with a tiny bit of extra oil. Using ¼ cup measure, drop batter into the pan and cook until small bubbles appear, 1 ¼ - 1 ½ minutes. 
    A golden buckwheat pancake finished in the pan.
    Step 6: Flip pancakes and cook for a minute on the other side until golden brown. Serve or remove to a plate and keep warm for serving.

    Serving Suggestions

    Enjoy buckwheat pancakes with these delicious toppings:

    • Try a drizzle of maple syrup or monk fruit maple syrup (sugar-free)
    • Honey
    • Melted butter or a pat of butter
    • Your favorite jam
    • Fruit syrup like this homemade fresh strawberry coulis.
    • And don't forget fresh berries or fresh fruit such as banana slices.

    For side dishes, add crisp bacon and a seasonal fresh fruit salad made with whatever looks best at the store.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is the best way to store buckwheat pancakes?

    When I make buckwheat pancakes ahead of time or have leftover pancakes, I store them two ways: layer them between small squares of parchment paper, stack them and wrap them in plastic film or an airtight container. Another way is lay them in a single layer on layers of parchment and wrap the whole tray.

    What is the best way to reheat buckwheat pancakes?

    Using the microwave works great for re-heating buckwheat pancakes. Unwrap them and arrange them on a plate. If you are re-heating a lot at once, heat them in a 350°F oven until hot.

    What are the health benefits of buckwheat?

    Buckwheat is a highly nutritious cereal-like grain (like quinoa) that is naturally gluten-free. The health benefits vary depending on if you are eating it as a whole grain, called buckwheat groats, or ground, as in buckwheat flour. In general, buckwheat has a high mineral and antioxidant content. It's also a good source of protein and fiber. It can be a healthier alternative to all purpose white flour.

    More Breakfast Recipes

    Here are breakfast recipe ideas to help everyone get the day off to a great start. And if you'd rather have smoothies, check out my smoothie recipe page for tasty ideas.

    • A single bowl of healthy overnight oats with blueberries and pomegranates seeds.
      High Protein Overnight Oats (with Chia Seeds)
    • Close up of crispy golden waffles with blueberries, raspberries, strawberries.
      Gluten Free Waffles (Crisp & Golden)
    • A single yogurt breakfast parfait with layers of fruit, granola, and yogurt.
      How to Make Greek Yogurt Parfaits
    • A close up of an open jar of homemade granola with a silver scoop.
      Healthy Granola Recipe

    ⭐️Did you Make This?

    If you make these buckwheat pancakes, please comment and let me know. I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Stacked buckwheat pancakes on a white plate with syrup and blueberries.

    Buckwheat Pancakes

    Sally Cameron
    Golden and delicious, buckwheat pancakes are an easy weekend breakfast and perfect for holiday breakfasts and brunches. And buckwheat is gluten-free! Top with syrup, berries, or powdered sugar.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, Brunch
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 18-5-inch pancakes
    Calories 433 kcal

    Equipment

    • Non-stick pan or griddle
    • Pancake turner or thin spatula

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 cup buckwheat flour 4.7 ounces
    • ¾ cup gluten-free flour blend or white wheat flour 3.7 ounces
    • 1 ½ teaspoons baking powder
    • ¾ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • 2 large eggs
    • 2 ½ cups buttermilk
    • 3 tablespoons oil see notes below for best oils
    • 2 tablespoons honey or monk fruit honey or sugar
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

    Optional toppings

    • Warm maple syrup or sugar-free (monk fruit) maple syrup
    • Easy strawberry sauce recipe link below
    • Fresh berries of choice
    • Warm melted butter
    • melted coconut oil

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add dry ingredients to a large bowl, including flours, baking powder, baking soda, and salt, and whisk together.
    • In a medium bowl or 4-cup liquid measure, whisk eggs until smooth, then add milk, oil, honey, and vanilla, Whisk until smooth.
    • Add the milk and egg mixture a little at a time whisking until smooth. Batter is ready to use.
    • Heat a large non-stick pan or griddle over medium heat. Brush or wipe with a little extra oil. When pan is hot, cook pancakes using ¼ cup of batter per pancake. Cook pancakes until golden on the first side, 1 ½ minutes until bubbles appear. Turn pancakes and cook another 1 ½ minutes.
      Don't over cook the pancakes. The goal is a golden brown not a dark brown. turn your heat down a little if needed.
      As pancakes are done, serve as you go or remove them to a parchment lined baking tray and keep warm in a low over (200°F) or a warming drawer.
    • To serve, drizzle with warm melted butter or coconut oil, or warm maple syrup. Another great option is th.

    Notes

    • You can use all buckwheat flour for these pancakes or do as I've noted with part gluten-free or wheat flour. 
    • To reduce sugar/carbs, use a sugar-free honey made with monk fruit. It's how I make my pancakes. 
    • For oil, use either melted coconut oil, MCT oil, or a healthy neutral oil such as Zero Acre Farms. 
    • Recipe for the easy strawberry sauce. Make it with other berries too. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 433kcalCarbohydrates: 54gProtein: 14gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 110mgSodium: 852mgPotassium: 417mgFiber: 5gSugar: 18gVitamin A: 383IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 303mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Blueberry Spinach Smoothie Recipe

    01/26/2016 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    blueberry green smoothie

    If you haven't yet tried a blueberry spinach smoothie because it sounds too weird, this one might change your mind. It's a fantastic way to start your day with blueberries, spinach, and nut butter for healthy fat. Grab your blender and make one!

    Blueberry green smoothie|AFoodCentricLife.com

    Versatile Smoothies

    There are many great things about smoothies. They are fast and easy to make, endlessly customizable, super healthy (with the right ingredients) and transportable to take with you on busy mornings. In fact, I've had one most every morning for more than 15 years. You could say I am hooked.

    Oh, and this one? As I took the photo well after breakfast, I capped the jar and put it in the fridge. The next morning, I poured the jar into a blender and re-blended it and it was perfect. I am sure a really good shake would have sufficed, so they can even be made ahead if time is tight.

    Superfood Blueberry Green Smoothie

    I've used all superfoods to create one super way to start the day. The blue comes from blueberries and a blue-green micro algae called spirulina. More green power comes from big handfuls of baby spinach leaves.

    To complete the smoothie, add protein (options at end), healthy fat from nut butter (almond, coconut, or cashew), and extra flavor from raw cacao powder and chocolate flavored liquid stevia drops.

    Beautiful Blueberries

    Nutrient-dense blueberries are packed with nutrition. Toss them into plain Greek yogurt, add to steel cut oats, or add them to smoothies. Blueberries are high in fiber, vitamins C and K and are thought to contain the highest levels of antioxidants of all commonly consumed fruits and vegetables.

    Blueberries are thought to help reduce blood pressure, prevent heart disease and they are great brain food to boot. Talk about food as medicine, these little berries offer huge health benefits. But be sure to buy organic. Conventional blueberries have high levels of pesticides.

    Blueberrie on a tray | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Superfood Spirulina

    Spirulina is considered one of the world's first superfoods. Its one of the most nutrient-rich, nutritionally complete foods on earth and offers a long list of health benefits. The fine, dark emerald green powder mixes easily into smoothies. That rich green color comes from chlorophyll, a natural detoxifier, helping our bodies get rid of toxins and other impurities. Spirulina also boost our immune system.

    Just 1 teaspoon of spirulina provides 2 grams of complete protein (all essential amino acids) along with non-essential amino acids, and an amazing array of vitamins and minerals. I highly recommend you read more about the benefits here.

    Spirulina | AFoodCentricLife.com

    After researching brands, I buy Nutrex Hawaii. It's the only one of its kind to be cultured in a BioSecure Zone that is free of pesticides, herbicides, and GMOs on the big island of Hawaii. For pennies a day, you can add this amazing superfood to your diet. One note - if you are sensitive or allergic to iodine, skip the spirulina.

    Baby Spinach

    Adding baby spinach leaves to your morning smoothie is like an insurance policy to getting enough green veggies into your daily diet. The tender leaves blend smoothly into an emerald puree and it sounds crazy, but you don't taste the spinach.

    Another nutrient powerhouse, spinach is rich in vitamins (K and A), minerals (Manganese and folate) and powerful little plant compounds called phytonutrients, shown to have anti-inflammatory and anti-cancer benefits. In particular, the high levels of vitamin K are great for our bone health.

    The Rest of the Ingredients

    Milks

    Start with your milk of choice. Homemade almond milk and coconut milk are great bases. Homemade is so much better than from a store and no unwanted additives. See links for recipes.

    Protein

    Try a clean, unsweetened, plant-based, whey blend, or grass fed whey protein powder. Other protein options include Greek yogurt and many seeds such as hemp seeds.

    Sweetness and Flavor

    I add a few drops of chocolate flavored liquid stevia and a little raw cacao powder for a chocolatey flavor.

    Superfood Blueberry Green Smoothie | AFoodCentricLife.com

    📖 Recipe

    Superfood Blueberry Green Smoothie | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Blueberry Spinach Smoothie

    Sally Cameron
    This blueberry green smoothie is a nutritious way to start the day. Blueberries, baby spinach, and blue-green spirulina add a superfood punch of nutrition. Use your milk of choice and protein. Nut butters add flavor, creaminess and healthy fat. Whirl in a blender and enjoy.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1 serving
    Calories 404 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 10 ounces almond milk
    • 3 handfuls baby spinach leaves 3 ounces
    • ⅓ cup organic blueberries fresh or frozen
    • 1 teaspoon spirulina optional
    • 1 tablespoon cashew butter almond or coconut butter
    • 1 serving protein powder of choice 1-2 scoops, see notes in post
    • 1 tablespoon hemp seeds
    • 1 ½ teaspoons raw unsweetened cacao powder
    • a few drops of chocolate liquid stevia optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Place all ingredients in a blender in order given.
    • Blend gradually, getting to high, until smooth.

    Notes

    Chocolate stevia drops are made by Sweet Leaf, available and many stores, health oriented markets and online. There are lots of great flavors!

    Nutrition

    Calories: 404kcalCarbohydrates: 22gProtein: 40gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 50mgSodium: 519mgPotassium: 761mgFiber: 5gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 8597IUVitamin C: 30mgCalcium: 548mgIron: 8mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Homemade Hummus Without Tahini

    07/16/2017 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

    Golden Mediterranean hummus in a bowl sprinkled with olive oil, za'atar, and garbanzo beans.

    Craving hummus but out of tahini? Make homemade hummus without tahini instead. It works beautifully, and if you avoid sesame for allergy reasons, I have a great substitute for you. This creamy Mediterranean-style hummus comes together in minutes in a food processor, with turmeric and za'atar for beautiful color and extra flavor. It's a fresh way to change up your usual hummus routine and satisfy that afternoon snack craving.

    Golden Hummus | AFoodCentricLife.com

    While there are plenty of hummus brands at the store, homemade hummus is easy to make with just a few pantry ingredients and a food processor. It's popular for good reason: hummus is nutritious, protein-packed, plant-based, and incredibly versatile for snacks and meals. For extra-creamy hummus, try my easy trick-simmering the chickpeas with a little baking soda to help loosen the skins before pureeing.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Homemade Hummus Recipe No Tahini Highlights

    • Simple ingredients - Made with basic pantry staples and no tahini.
    • Stays fresh - Keeps well in the fridge for up to a week.
    • Healthy and versatile - Perfect as a nutritious snack or part of a mezze platter for a get-together appetizer spread.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Garlic - Use fresh garlic cloves or garlic paste from a tube.
    • Chickpeas - Also called garbanzo beans, canned chickpeas make this recipe quick and easy. And save the aquafaba (bean liquid).
    • Baking soda - To simmer the chickpeas and remove the skins for extra-creamy hummus.
    • Sunbutter - Sunflower seed butter is a great tahini substitute and makes the hummus creamy and rich.
    • Olive oil - Use extra virgin olive oil, or try a lemon olive oil for even more citrus flavor.
    • Lemon - Adds fresh, tangy flavor and helps the hummus blend smoothly.
    • Spices - Ground cumin and coriander add warmth, while za'atar is optional but delicious.
    • Fresh herbs - Chopped parsley or cilantro make a fresh, colorful garnish.

    Chef's Tip: What Is Za'atar? - Za'atar is a Mediterranean spice blend made with sumac, toasted sesame seeds, salt, cumin, and dried herbs such as thyme, oregano, and marjoram. It's wonderful sprinkled over chicken, fish, vegetables, and tomatoes, or mixed with olive oil for a simple dressing or spread. You may also see it spelled zahtar or zaatar.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • For golden hummus - Add a little turmeric for warm color and earthy flavor. The lead photo is golden hummus with turmeric.
    • More tahini substitutes - Try cashew butter, or almond butter for a similar creamy texture (but the flavor will be a bit different).

    Chef's Tip - Why the Baking Soda Works: Simmering canned chickpeas with a little baking soda for 15 to 20 minutes before blending changes the pH and helps break down the pectin in the chickpeas, softening them further and loosening the skins to discard. This trick gives you a smoother, creamier hummus with less graininess. After simmering, rinse under cold water and gently swish to release some of the skins before blending.

    How to Make Homemade Hummus No Tahini

    Step 1 - For extra creamy tahini start by simmering the chickpeas 15-20 minutes in enough water to cover adding ½ teaspoon of baking soda. Rinse the simmered beans to remove any soapy taste from the baking soda and shake the strainer to remove most of the skins.

    Step 2 - With the food processor running, drop the garlic cloves in through the feed tube to chop fine, or use a microplane zester to turn it into a paste.

    Step 3 - Stop processor and add all of the rest of the ingredients. Puree until creamy, taste, and adjust seasoning to your preference. If you need to thin it, add a tablespoon at a time of the saved aquafaba (the liquid from the can).

    golden hummus | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve homemade hummus with pita wedges, pita chips, or an array of fresh raw veggies. Serve immediately or hold in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

    More Terrific Dip and Snack Recipes

    • Creamy salmon dip on an appetizer tray with crackers and cucumber chips.
      The Best Smoked Salmon Dip Recipe
    • A bowl of whipped ricotta cheese dip with endive leaf in for scooping.
      Whipped Ricotta Cheese (Dip or Spread)
    • Close up of creamy basil and avocado dip in white bowl.
      Avocado Dip with Yogurt and Fresh Basil
    • A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.
      Roasted Red Bell Pepper Hummus Recipe

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please comment, and let me know, I enjoy hearing from you. And your comments really help other readers. Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    golden hummus | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Homemade Hummus Without Tahini

    Sally Cameron
    A creamy puree of garbanzo beans (chickpeas) with lemon olive oil, tahini and spices, the beautiful golden color comes from turmeric. Enjoy it as an appetizer or snack with raw vegetables. Makes about 3 cups of hummus, without tahini. If you want to use tahini, you can.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 10 minutes mins
    Course Snack
    Cuisine Mediterranean
    Servings 6 to 8
    Calories 114 kcal

    Equipment

    • Food Processor

    Ingredients
      

    • 1-2 garlic cloves peeled
    • 30 ounces chickpeas (aka garbanzo beans) 2 15-ounce cans, drained
    • ⅓ - ½ cup reserved aquafaba or water
    • ¼ cup sunbutter
    • 4 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil divided use
    • 1 lemon juiced
    • 1 teaspoon cumin
    • 1 teaspoon turmeric optional
    • 1 teaspoon coriander
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black or white pepper

    Optional Garnishes

    • 2 teaspoons za'atar
    • 2 teaspoons chopped parsley or cilantro

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Simmer the chickpeas

    • Drain the chickpeas reserving the canned juices (called aquafaba). Add them to a pot and cover with water, Add the baking soda. Simmer for 15-20 minutes. Drain in a sieve or colander, rinse, and shake off the skins. If a few remain, don't be concerned.

    Make the hummus

    • With the food processor running, drop the garlic cloves in through the feed tube to chop fine.Stop processor and add all of the rest of the ingredients. Start with 5-6 tablespoons of water and add more depending on how creamy you want the hummus. Serve immediately or hold in the refrigerator for 4-5 days in an airtight container.

    Notes

    Customize the recipe with extra lemon juice or spices to suit your taste preference. 
    For beans, I prefer Eden Foods no sodium added organic garbanzo beans. Check the label for sodium levels on other beans and adjust salt as needed. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 114kcalCarbohydrates: 4gProtein: 2gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gSodium: 78mgPotassium: 68mgFiber: 1gSugar: 0.4gVitamin A: 21IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 23mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Best Ricotta Cheese Filling Recipe

    11/04/2022 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Ricotta cheese spinach filling in a bowl on the counter.

    Creamy ricotta, spinach, Parmesan, and herbs mix up for a terrific ricotta cheese filling recipe usable in many ways. Stuffed shells? Lasagna? Omelets? Pasta casserole? Stuffed spaghetti squash? Savory crepes? It's so good, and I've listed 10 ideas for using this cheesy goodness. Grab some ricotta and let's get going.

    Ricotta cheese spinach filling.

    This was inspired by my popular stuffed shells recipe, but this filling recipe is made with spinach (versus kale). The amazing thing is you can use it in so many ways! Read on to find out how.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Really easy recipe.
    • It can be used in many ways, see below for 10 ideas.
    • Easy ingredients.

    Recipe Ingredients

    I tested this with both fresh and frozen spinach and found the frozen, chopped easier to use with better results because the fresh had a lot of stems. Frozen is also easy to keep around. I made the first batch in the food processor and it got too fluid. Ricotta cheese filling is best made by hand.

    Ricotta filling ingredients
    • Spinach: get the frozen chopped spinach, bagged kind that is IQF (individually quick frozen). Don't get the little square blocks.
    • Ricotta: whole milk ricotta cheese is the rich and creamy best choice, but low fat will work. I buy the organic brands and think it's a better product, if it's available.
    • Onion: for the flavorful aromatic quality and moisture.
    • Garlic: for flavor! Fresh is best.
    • Oil: extra virgin olive oil.
    • Parmesan cheese: get the good stuff, Parmigiano-Reggiano. Find store-grated in the cheese department or get a small block and grate it yourself.
    • Herbs: fresh basil leaves (or fresh parsley), and dried Italian seasoning blend.
    • Eggs: as a binder.
    • Seasoning: Salt, ground black pepper and red pepper (optional).

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • If eggs are a problem, here are two options to replace eggs: flax egg or arrowroot starch.
    • To make a flax egg, add 1 tablespoon of ground flaxseed to 3 tablespoons of water and stir. Allow it to stand for a few minutes until is looks sort of like a beaten egg. Mix into the ricotta.
    • Another option is mixing 2 tablespoons of arrowroot starch or cornstarch with 3 tablespoons of water and stirring until smooth. For more ideas on egg substitutes read this post.

    Recipe Instructions

    You can make ricotta filling a day ahead of a making a bigger recipe like stuffed shells or homemade lasagna.

    Chopped spinach on cutting board.
    Step 1: Cook frozen spinach according to package directions. Drain through a fine mesh strainer and press out as much moisture as possible with the back of a large spoon. Next, place spinach on layers of paper towels and press out any additional moisture until spinach is almost dry.

    After the spinach is dry, chop it to refine the texture, then add to medium mixing bowl.

    Cooking onions in cast iron pan.
    Step 2: Cook onion in olive oil, add garlic and dried Italian seasoning and cook another minute.
    Mixing filling in glass bowl.
    Step 3: Add ricotta to the spinach, stir together, add the rest of the ingredients: cooked onion, eggs, Parmesan, basil, salt, ground black pepper, and red pepper. It is ready to use or refrigerate.
    Finished ricotta filling in glass bowl.

    Chef's Tip: If your filling is not as thick as you were expecting, place all of it into a fine mesh strainer over a large bowl and allow any extra liquid to drain. You can cover and refrigerate it for a few hours or overnight. Also allow it to strain through cheese cloth until it is to your desired consistency.

    Spaghetti squash with ricotta filling.

    Serving Suggestions

    10 Ways to Use Ricotta Cheese Filling

    • Stuff jumbo pasta shells or manicotti, cover with 30-minute pasta tomato sauce and a little more Parmesan or Romano cheese then bake. Another sauce you can use is this meat sauce, my bison bolognese recipe for a rich and hearty winter dish.
    • Fill an omelet (it's delicious!).
    • Make a baked pasta casserole, tossing the ricotta filling with cooked penne or fusilli and cooked ground beef or turkey, topping with some grated mozzarella cheese and baking.
    • Use it as a ricotta filling for lasagna topped with marinara sauce.
    • Fill savory crepes (for gluten-free, try buckwheat or cassava flour crepes).
    • Make lasagna rolls. Cook lasagna noodles, trim a little of the length, put a few tablespoons on one end and roll up. Place in a casserole, top with sauce and cheese and bake.
    • Mix with spaghetti squash threads and stuff back into the squash for baking, covered with aluminum foil (vegetarian and meat options). Make it vegetarian, or add finely chopped sweet Italian sausage or browned ground meat of choice.
    • Ricotta toast. Make garlic toast in the oven with gluten-free bread or baguette slices, top with a few spoonfuls of the ricotta filling, and enjoy along side a big green salad or cut into bite-sized pieces for appetizers. For breakfast, top with poached or fried egg.
    • Make a white pizza spreading the filling over homemade pizza crust, topping with sliced tomatoes, and baking.
    • Make lemon ricotta pasta by adding fresh lemon zest to the filling and tossing it with your favorite hot cooked pasta noodle.

    Finished ricotta cheese filling keeps up to 4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. This is not something I recommend freezing as the texture changes.

    Chef's Tip: If you use this ricotta filling for manicotti or jumbo shells, you can pipe it in with a pastry bag fitted with a large open tip (not a star tip).

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you thicken ricotta filling?

    There are several ways to thicken ricotta filling. One is to place the filling in a fine strainer over a bowl and allow excess liquid to drain off. Another way is to line the strainer with cheesecloth. Yet another way is to add a thickener such as cornstarch or arrowroot starch. Start with 2-3 teaspoons and allow it to stand for 15-20 minutes.

    How do you make store bought ricotta taste better?

    Ricotta is a mild tasting fresh cheese, so it readily takes on whatever flavors you want to add to it. Add fresh herbs, lemon juice and zest, olive oil, sauteed onions and garlic to make it savory, or honey for a sweetened ricotta spread. Try chopped sun dried tomatoes and olives. There are so many ways to make store bought ricotta more flavorful.

    Do I have to add egg to ricotta filling?

    No, you can use an egg substitute or for some recipes that may not need to binding capability of egg, skip it. Substitutes that help as a binder include making a flax egg, a little white chia seed, arrowroot starch mixed with water ( 1:1), or a commercial egg replacer product. Some egg substitutes have definitive flavor that may not work in all recipes, such as mashed banana or applesauce.

    More Italian Recipe Ideas

    Try a few of these recipes when you are in the mood for Italian-inspired recipes and flavors.

    • shrimp fra diavolo
      Spicy Shrimp and Pasta (Shrimp Fra Diavolo)
    • Ribollita in a gray pot.
      Italian Ribollita Soup (Ribollita Toscana)
    • A round pan of golden chicken thighs in red sauce with rosemary on the side.
      One Pan Italian Chicken Thighs
    • A plate of crispy golden chicken parmesan with pasta sauce and cheese.
      Easy Chicken Parmesan Cutlets

    ⭐️Did you Make This?

    If you make this recipe, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating. They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Ricotta cheese spinach filling in a bowl on the counter.

    Best Ricotta Cheese Filling Recipe with Spinach

    Sally Cameron
    Creamy ricotta, spinach, Parmesan, and herbs mix up for a terrific ricotta cheese filling recipe usable in many ways. See ideas in the notes below.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Filling, Main Course, pasta
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Servings 6 to 8 (Yield 4 cups)
    Calories 249 kcal

    Equipment

    • Fry pan or saute pan
    • Fine sieve or strainer

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 pound frozen chopped spinach
    • 1 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
    • ½ medium onion chopped
    • 2-3 garlic cloves finely chopped
    • ¾ teaspoon dried Italian seasoning
    • 15 ounce tub of ricotta cheese, full fat sub low fat
    • ¼ cup chopped fresh basil leaves
    • ¾ cup grated Parmesan Parmigiano-reggiano
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 pinch red pepper flakes optional
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Cook the spinach

    • Cook the spinach according to the directions on the bag. Put a small amount of water in a pot, bring to a boil, add the frozen spinach, add a lid to the pot, and turn to low. Cook 5-7 minutes until totally thawed.
    • Pour the cooked spinach into a fine mesh strainer and press the liquid out with the back of a large spoon over the sink. To get the spinach very dry, place it onto double layers of paper towels, top with more paper towels, and press with your hands. Repeat to get most of the water out. Chop to refine the spinach then place in a medium bowl.

    Make the filling

    • Heat a saute pan, fry pan or cast iron skillet over medium heat. When it's hot, add the olive, then add the chopped onion. Cook, stirring until soft, 2-3 minutes. Add the garlic and Italian seasoning, cook 1 minute longer.
    • Add the ricotta to the bowl with the spinach and stir together. Add the onion mixture, Parmesan, basil and eggs, mix until smooth. Add the salt, ground black pepper, and red pepper if using. The filling is ready to use. Filling will keep refrigerated and used within 4 days.

    Notes

    • Stuff pasta shells or manicotti and cover with 30-minute pasta sauce, then bake.
    • Fill an omelet (it's delicious!).
    • Make a baked pasta casserole, tossing with cooked penne and cooked ground beef or turkey, topping with more cheese and baking.
    • Use it as a ricotta filling for lasagna.
    • Fill savory crepes (for gluten-free, try buckwheat or cassava flour crepes).
    • Make lasagna rolls.
    • Mix with spaghetti squash threads and stuff back into the squash for baking (vegetarian and meat options).

    Nutrition

    Serving: 0.75cupCalories: 249kcalCarbohydrates: 8gProtein: 17gFat: 17gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 109mgSodium: 456mgPotassium: 407mgFiber: 3gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 9441IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 374mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)

    09/22/2023 by Sally Cameron 8 Comments

    Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.

    Looking for a quick, healthy breakfast that tastes like pumpkin pie? This pumpkin smoothie is thick, creamy, and full of pumpkin spice flavor. Made with canned pumpkin purée and simple, wholesome ingredients, it blends up in minutes and can easily be boosted with protein for a filling start to your day.

    A beautiful orange colored creamy pumpkin smoothie in a tall glass with a steel straw.

    Fall means pumpkin everything, and this pumpkin smoothie is one of my favorites. And it's a healthy pumpkin smoothie - creamy, spiced, and just sweet enough. Made with canned pumpkin and simple ingredients, it blends up in minutes for a delicious fall breakfast or snack post-workout.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Pumpkin Smoothie

    • Pumpkin pie flavor - Warm spices make it taste like dessert in a glass, but it's good for you.
    • Quick & nutritious - Blend it up in minutes.
    • Healthy & flexible - Dairy-free, gluten-free, and easy to customize with your favorite milk or add-ins.
    • Protein-ready - Boost it with protein powder or Greek yogurt for a filling pumpkin shake.

    If you enjoy pumpkin, try making homemade pumpkin seed milk, an excellent source of plant-based protein, healthy fat, and minerals like potassium and magnesium.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for a pumpkin smoothie on a marble counter.
    1. Milk - I use homemade almond milk, but any favorite brand works. For nut allergies, try oat milk, rice milk, or regular dairy milk. If your smoothie is too thick, add a splash of water.
    2. Pumpkin - Use canned pumpkin purée (100% pumpkin), not pumpkin pie mix. It's easy to keep on hand and blends smoothly.
    3. Flaxseed - Grind whole golden flaxseeds right before blending for the freshest flavor, or use pre-ground. They add healthy fat, protein, and fiber.
    4. Sweetener - Options include pumpkin stevia drops, pure maple syrup, sugar-free maple syrup with monk fruit (my go-to), or honey.
    5. Vanilla - A good quality vanilla extract or paste enhances the pumpkin spice flavor.
    6. Spices - Cinnamon, nutmeg, allspice, ginger, or clove - or simply use pumpkin pie spice for a classic flavor profile.
    7. Protein powder (optional) - Add 1-2 scoops of your favorite to make this a protein pumpkin smoothie. See my post on how to choose a protein powder for tips.

    For fun, make your own pumpkin pie spice blend starting with cinnamon and adding ground ginger, ground clove, and nutmeg.

    Chef's Tool Tip: Handheld grinders. Small handheld grinders are a handy kitchen tool. Use them for coffee beans, whole spices, nuts and seeds. I use one to grind my flaxseed each day and for whole black peppercorns.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Vary the milks, spices, and sweeteners and customize your healthy pumpkin pie smoothie.
    • Add a little canned coconut milk for added creaminess and healthy fat.
    • For another protein powder option, try this vegan pure pumpkin protein powder. It's really good.
    • Other protein substitutions include plain yogurt or plain Greek yogurt, vanilla yogurt or vanilla Greek yogurt. Greek yogurt has twice the protein (then skip the vanilla extract).
    • For more creaminess, add a little frozen banana.
    A small glass bowl of whole golden flaxseed before grinding.

    How to Make Pumpkin Smoothie

    Golden ground flaxseed in a small hand-held grinder container.
    Step 1: Assemble all ingredients, grind flaxseed first if using whole seeds. Whole flax seed will not breakdown in the blender.
    Creamy orange pumpkin smoothie in a blender container.
    Step 2: Add all ingredients to high-speed blender and blend until smooth.

    Add a few ice cubes to smooth out your pumpkin smoothie if desired. If smoothies ever get to thick, add a little filtered water to thin down. Thicker smoothies fill you up longer, digest slower; thinner smoothies digest faster and you are not full as long.

    Chef's Tip: Pumpkin Power
    Pumpkin isn't just for pie - it's a nutrition powerhouse. The beta-carotene in its bright orange flesh converts to vitamin A, supporting healthy eyes, bones, teeth, and immune function. It's also rich in antioxidants and fiber (4 grams in just ½ cup). A pumpkin smoothie gives you all those benefits in a glass!

    Golden orange pumpkin smoothie in a glass with cinnamon sprinkled on top.

    Serving Suggestions

    Pour into a tall glass and enjoy right away. A pumpkin smoothie makes a quick fall breakfast, a refreshing post-workout refuel, or even a mini version for kids as a healthy after-school snack.

    Have leftover pumpkin purée? Transfer it to a glass airtight container and refrigerate for up to a week - perfect for making another round of smoothies.

    Pumpkin pie smoothie on the counter with a mini pumpkin and jar of pumpkin puree.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use pumpkin pie filling instead of puree?


    It's best to use pure pumpkin purée. Pumpkin pie filling has added sugar and spices, which makes it much sweeter and changes the texture. Pure pumpkin purée gives you control over sweetness and flavor. Check labels - the only ingredient should be pumpkin.

    What spices should I add to a pumpkin smoothie?

    Classic fall spices like cinnamon, nutmeg, ginger, and clove are perfect. You can also use pumpkin pie spice (a blend of all of these) for convenience.

    Can I make pumpkin smoothies ahead of time?

    Yes, but they're best fresh. Store in an airtight jar in the fridge for up to 24 hours. If it thickens, stir in a little water or re-blend with ice before drinking.

    What sweeteners work best in a pumpkin smoothie?

    Maple syrup, honey, or dates add natural sweetness. For low-sugar or keto options, try monk fruit syrup, liquid stevia (plain or pumpkin spice), or sugar-free maple syrup. Each one slightly changes the flavor, but maple pairs especially well with pumpkin.

    Is a pumpkin smoothie healthy?

    Yes. Pumpkin is low in calories, high in fiber, and rich in beta-carotene (vitamin A). When blended with milk or yogurt and optional protein powder, it makes a healthy, filling smoothie.

    More Pumpkin Recipes

    • Pumpkin snack cake with chocolate chips.
      Pumpkin Chocolate Chip Cake (Snack Cake)
    • black bean pumpkin soup
      Creamy Black Bean Pumpkin Soup
    • Peaking into a jar of freshly roasted pepitas with olive oil and salt.
      What Are Pepitas and How to Roast Them
    • Pumpkin tart
      Pumpkin Tart (Gluten-Free Almond Flour Crust)

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Healthy Pumpkin Smoothie Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    Smooth and creamy with warm spices, a little vanilla, and of course, pumpkin. This smoothie tastes like liquid pumpkin pie. Puree it all in a blender and you have a nutritious smoothie for a healthy fall breakfast.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1
    Calories 241 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 10 ounces almond milk 1 ¼ cups
    • ⅓ cup canned pumpkin puree
    • 1-2 tablespoons flaxseed, ground
    • 1 tablespoon maple syrup or monk fruit maple syrup or liquid pumpkin stevia drops
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon or blend of warm spices cinnamon, nutmeg, allspice, clove, ginger
    • 1-2 scoops protein powder of choice 20-25 grams

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Place all ingredients in blender and puree until smooth and creamy. If it gets too thick add a little water.

    Notes

    • Dessert for breakfast? Why not. The pumpkin spice stevia drops are made by SweetLeaf, or use regular maple syrup. This keto maple syrup is terrific and what I now use to reduce sugar. It tastes terrific so why not reduce the sugar.
    • Instead of individual spices you can use pumpkin spice blend. If it gets too thick, add water and blend.
    • The protein levels in this smoothie will vary depending on what you use and how much. 
    • If you want it even creamier and richer with some healthy fat, add 2 tablespoons of canned coconut milk. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 241kcalCarbohydrates: 15gProtein: 29gFat: 9gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 50mgSodium: 420mgPotassium: 330mgFiber: 6gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 12796IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 498mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Pumpkin Mousse (Easy No-Bake Dessert)

    10/20/2023 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    A glass of creamy pumpkin mousse dusted with cinnamon with a gold spoon.

    Skip the crust, keep the flavor. This easy pumpkin mousse is light, fluffy, and full of warm pumpkin spice - like pumpkin pie in a glass. With no baking required, it's the perfect make-ahead dessert for Thanksgiving or any fall gathering.

    A glass of creamy pumpkin mousse with a spoon and cinnamon.

    I've made this creamy pumpkin mousse many times for family, friends, and even catering clients - it's always a hit. The best part? You can make it a day ahead, so dessert is done and off your holiday checklist early. Using canned pumpkin purée keeps it simple without sacrificing flavor, and the texture is divine.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Pumpkin Mousse

    • Perfect for fall & Thanksgiving - all the pumpkin pie flavor without the crust.
    • Light & airy texture - creamy, fluffy, and refreshing after a big meal.
    • No-bake pumpkin mouse - quick to prepare, no oven needed, easy to chill ahead.
    • Lighter than pie - fewer carbs, simple ingredients, same cozy flavor.
    • Make it ahead - Make it a day ahead to save time.

    Love pumpkin? Toasted pumpkin seeds are easy to make in minutes and a great add to salads and soups for garnish. They are addictive!

    Ingredients You'll Need

    The light, fluffy pumpkin mousse makes a refreshing alternative to pumpkin pie. And unlike many recipes, there's no cream cheese or boxed pudding mix here - just simple, from-scratch ingredients for pure flavor.

    Ingredients for pumpkin mousse in glass bowls.
    • Gelatin: Get the unflavored type.
    • Eggs: You only need the egg yolks. Save the egg whites for other recipes.
    • Sweetener: Sugar or monk fruit for low carb and special diets.
    • Pumpkin: Read the label and buy plain pumpkin puree, not pumpkin pie filling.
    • Spices: Cinnamon, ginger, nutmeg, and ground clove.
    • Cream: Heavy cream or heavy whipping cream: they are the same. Say no to that tub of fake food whipped topping! Homemade whipped cream is the best.
    • Vanilla: Get good vanilla extract or vanilla paste.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's Tip: Dairy-Free Pumpkin Mousse
    When I first created this recipe, good non-dairy whipping options didn't exist. Now there are several! Coconut cream and plant-based heavy cream alternatives can both work, as long as they whip up stiff like dairy cream. The texture might be a little different, but you'll still get that light, fluffy mousse and wonderful flavor.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Spices - Swap individual spices for a pre-made pumpkin pie spice blend.
    • Gelatin - Use silver gelatin leaves (170 bloom strength) in place of powdered gelatin.
    • Sweeteners - Replace sugar with monk fruit, stevia drops, or sugar-free maple syrup for a low-carb pumpkin mousse. Maple syrup or honey add natural sweetness.
    • Fun garnishes - Sprinkle crushed gingersnaps or graham crackers on top, or layer them in the bottom of your serving glasses before adding the mousse.

    If you prefer a crust, try this gluten-free pumpkin tart. It has a press-in cookie-type crust versus a roll out pastry crust. It's wonderful and easy to make.

    Chef's Tip: Setting Up a Double Boiler
    Fill a saucepan with a few inches of water and bring it to a gentle simmer. Place a heatproof glass or stainless-steel bowl on top, making sure it fits snugly but doesn't touch the water. This gentle, indirect heat is perfect for cooking egg yolks (or melting chocolate) without scrambling or scorching.

    How to Make Pumpkin Mousse

    Softening gelatin with water in a stainless steel bowl.
    Step 1: Soften the powdered gelatin in cold water (called blooming) to make it usable. See recipe card for using leaf gelatin.
    Adding egg yolks and sugar to a bowl with gelatin.
    Step 2: Add egg yolks and sugar.
    Stainless steel bowl with yellow egg yolks and a whisk.
    Step 3: Whisk yolks and sugar until smooth (it's sticky and heavy).
    Cooking egg yolks with sugar to 165°F on stovetop.
    Step 4: Cook by whisking on the stovetop over a double boiler (note below) until it reaches 165°F. About 5 minutes.
    Cooling cooked egg yolks with a hand mixer in motion.
    Step 5: Cool the cooked mixture with an electric mixer; hand mixer or standing mixer, about 3 minutes.
    Beating canned pumpkin into the cooked egg yolks and sugar.
    Step 6: Beat in the pumpkin, spices and vanilla until smooth. Refrigerate until cold, about 1 hour.
    Whipping heavy cream in the bowl of a mixer.
    Step 7: Whip the cream on high speed until stiff peaks form.
    Beating together whipped cream and pumpkin mixture.
    Step 8: Add whipped heavy cream and chilled pumpkin mixture together. The pumpkin mousse is ready.

    Chef's Tip - Sweeten and Stiffen Your Whipped Cream:
    If your whipping cream isn't holding peaks as firmly as you'd like, try this trick before folding in the pumpkin base. Add a tablespoon or two of sifted powdered sugar to stiffen, sweeten and stabilize the whipping cream. It works great. For a lower sugar option use powdered allulose. This also makes the mousse sturdy enough to pipe for a prettier presentation.

    Creamy orange pumpkin mousse in a disposable piping bag with star tip.

    If you like pumpkin, try this creamy polenta with pumpkin. It might sound like a crazy combination but it is terrific. Top with poached eggs for breakfast or browned sausage for dinner. Leftovers re-heat beautifully.

    How to Pipe Pumpkin Mousse

    1. Fit an 18" piping bag with a large plain or star tip.
    2. Stand the bag in a tall container (like a blender container or vase) for support.
    3. Fold the top of the bag down a few inches to make a collar. Spoon the pumpkin mousse into the bag.
    4. Twist the top closed and secure with a rubber band. Refrigerate until ready to serve.
    5. When serving, snip off the tip of the bag to expose the piping tip. Hold the bag with your dominant hand (I twist with my right), apply gentle pressure, and pipe the mousse into glasses or bowls.

    Chef's Tip: Piping makes serving cleaner, faster, and so much prettier than spooning mousse into glasses. I squeeze with my right hand and guide the bag with my left (I'm right-handed).

    Looking into a dessert glass of pumpkin mousse.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve pumpkin mousse in a variety of ways.

    • In glasses - Pipe or spoon the mousse into stemmed glasses for a more elegant look, or use simple tumblers for a casual presentation.
    • In pastry shells - Fill cream puffs or mini pastry shells with pumpkin mousse for a fun bite-size dessert.
    • Make-ahead ease - Use a piping bag to portion the mousse ahead of time. Cover and chill until serving for a stress-free dessert.

    Optional Garnishes

    • Whipped cream - A classic finishing touch.
    • Warm spices - Sprinkle with cinnamon or nutmeg for extra pumpkin pie flavor.
    • Cookie crunch - Crushed amaretti, gingersnaps, or graham crackers add texture.
    • Sweet drizzle - A ribbon of maple syrup (regular or sugar-free) makes it decadent.
    • White chocolate - Finely grated or zested white chocolate adds a pretty, elegant finish (like in the photos).
    • Parfait-style - If you want to get fancier, make it into a pumpkin mousse trifle by layering into glasses with the crushed cookies.

    If you like a parfait, here is a yogurt and berry breakfast parfait good year round.

    Chef's Tip: Piping Mousse (and More)
    Disposable piping bags make storing and serving soft fillings a breeze. I recommend an 18" bag fitted with a large star tip (#823-#869). These are bigger than the ones you usually find in stores, but easy to order online or from a restaurant/pastry supply. I use them for mousse, the best deviled eggs, and even fancy mashed potatoes. Once you try it, you'll never go back to spooning.

    A tray of 6 pumpkin mousse desserts ready to serve.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is pumpkin mousse the same as pumpkin pie?

    Not quite. Pumpkin mousse has the same cozy flavor but a lighter, airy texture and no crust. Pumpkin pie is baked and more dense, while mousse is a no-bake dessert that's refreshing after a big meal.

    Can I make pumpkin mousse ahead of time?

    Yes! In fact, it's better when chilled. Make it a day ahead and store in an airtight container or a disposable piping bag fitted with a large tip. Refrigerate until serving, then pipe or spoon into glasses.

    What spices are best in pumpkin mousse?

    Classic fall spices like cinnamon, nutmeg, ginger, and clove work beautifully. You can also add cardamom or star anise for depth, or simply use pumpkin pie spice blend for convenience.

    More Delicious Pumpkin Recipes

    Looking for more pumpkin recipes? Try some of these delicious ideas.

    • Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.
      Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)
    • black bean pumpkin soup
      Creamy Black Bean Pumpkin Soup
    • Pumpkin snack cake with chocolate chips.
      Pumpkin Chocolate Chip Cake (Snack Cake)
    • Pumpkin tart
      Pumpkin Tart (Gluten-Free Almond Flour Crust)

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A glass of creamy pumpkin mousse dusted with cinnamon with a gold spoon.

    Pumpkin Mousse Dessert Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    Creamy, rich and light-textured, make this pumpkin mousse a day ahead and have dessert ready to go. Serve in small dishes or glasses. Spoon it or pipe it for a pretty effect. Make this with powdered monk fruit blend for a sugar-free, low-carb dessert. See notes below recipe.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Chilling 1 hour hr
    Total Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6
    Calories 334 kcal

    Equipment

    • Electric hand mixer
    • 18" disposable piping bag optional
    • Large star or plain tip for piping bag optional for piping
    • Whisk

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ teaspoons unflavored gelatin or 2 silver leaf gelatin 170 bloom leaves
    • 1 ½ tablespoons cold water
    • 3 large egg yolks
    • ¾ cup granulated sugar or powdered monk fruit, or half and half.
    • 1 15 ounce can pumpkin puree not pumpkin pie filling
    • ¾ teaspoon ground cinnamon
    • ¼ teaspoon ground ginger
    • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
    • ⅛ teaspoon ground clove
    • 1 ½-2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 1 ½ cups heavy whipping cream very cold, well chilled

    Optional Garnishes

    • a little extra whipped cream
    • a sprinkle of cinnamon or nutmeg
    • crushed amaretti or ginger cookies
    • a cinnamon stick
    • shaved or zested white chocolate

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Cook Pumpkin Base

    • For powdered gelatin, sprinkle over 1 ½ tablespoons cold water in a medium bowl to soften for 1 minute. For leaf gelatin, cut leaves into small pieces and soak in 2 tablespoons cold for 5 minutes.
    • Into the bowl, whisk in egg yolks and sugar until smooth. Set the bowl over a saucepan of simmering water (water bath). Cook egg mixture, whisking constantly, until a digital kitchen thermometer reads 165°F, about 5 minutes. Tilt bowl to facilitate easier measuring of the temperature.

    Cool Pumpkin Base

    • Remove the bowl from pan and with a hand electric mixer (or standing mixer), beat egg mixture until cool and thickened, about 3 minutes. Mixture will be sticky. Beat in pumpkin, spices, and vanilla. Beat in the canned pumpkin until smooth. Cover pumpkin base and chill in the refrigerator until thickened and cool, about 1 hour.
      Note: you can do this step the day ahead. The base will firm up, so whisk it by hand to loosen it up, then add to whipped cream.

    Whip Cream, Finish Mousse

    • In a large stainless steel bowl with clean beaters, beat cold cream until it holds stiff peaks. To finish mousse, gently fold into pumpkin mixture by hand or quickly beat it in with the mixer.

    To Serve

    • To serve mousse right away, spoon or pipe into stemmed glasses , glass ramekins, or small jars.
      Make the pumpkin mousse several hours ahead—or up to one day in advance. Spoon into serving glasses, cover each with plastic film, and chill until set and firm, about 3 hours. The mousse will thicken as it chills. Before serving, remove the plastic and garnish as desired.

    Optional Piping Directions

    • Transfer mousse to a large disposable pastry bag fitted with a large star tip (see below) and pipe into stemmed glasses. Alternatively spoon into glasses or small bowls.

    Notes

    For the spices, you can use pumpkin spice blends if preferred.
    What's a large star piping tip? It's in the 823 to about 865 sizes, look at this one for reference.
    Monk Fruit Tips:
    Using granular monk fruit keeps this low-carb and almost zero sugar. If you use natural granulated sugar, each serving has 27 grams of sugar (27 carbs). If you go half and half, it's about 13 grams of sugar/carbs per serving.
    If you use all monk fruit blend it is only 2 ½ carbs per serving and tases the same. Use the powdered monk fruit blend to make it more "pipe-able" as the powdered version gives it body. The granular monk fruit comes out a bit softer. 
    Chef’s Tip — Sturdier Whipped Cream:
    Lightly sweeten the cream before folding it in. A spoon or two of powdered allulose (or powdered sugar) both sweetens and helps it hold peaks—great if you want a mousse firm enough to pipe.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 334kcalCarbohydrates: 27gProtein: 4gFat: 24gSaturated Fat: 15gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gCholesterol: 159mgSodium: 23mgPotassium: 71mgFiber: 0.2gSugar: 27gVitamin A: 1024IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 54mgIron: 0.4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Watermelon Basil Salad with Feta Cheese

    08/18/2023 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    Watermelon salad ready to serve with cucumber, feta, basil, shallots.

    Refreshing watermelon basil salad with feta cheese is the perfect summer salad. With the sweetness of the watermelon, tangy salty feta cheese, crisp cucumber, and fragrant basil the flavor combination is summer magic. Make it in minutes and serve chilled on a hot day tossed with a honey-lime vinaigrette at serving. This is the recipe that turned me from a watermelon liker to a watermelon lover. Give it a try.

    Colorful watermelon salad with feta, shallots, basil, and cucumber.

    With extra cut watermelon in the fridge, plus cucumber and basil in my garden, and cheese in the fridge, this watermelon salad recipe came together in minutes. If the combo sounds strange, it really works with sweet, tart, salty, tangy flavors. It's got it all. I think you'll enjoy this version of a watermelon feta basil salad recipe.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • A perfect summer side dish.
    • The best part, no cooking!
    • Uses peak summer seasonal produce.
    • Super easy recipe, made in minutes.

    For another easy, refreshing summer salad with simple ingredients, make this cucumber and mint salad.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for a refreshing watermelon salad.
    • Watermelon: Get a mini ripe watermelon or store-cut watermelon. Seedless watermelon works best. If you get a bigger watermelon and have extra, make this Mexican watermelon juice. Delicious!
    • Cucumber: I prefer the small Persian cucumbers for their crisp texture and sweet taste but an English cucumber works too.
    • Aromatics: Either shallot or crisp red onion, and add some green onion if you like.
    • Cheese: Use either Greek feta cheese or goat cheese, crumbles or cubes.
    • Fresh Herbs: Fresh basil is my choice for this salad, for flavor and the beautiful green ribbons, but mint is terrific as is cilantro.
    • Lime juice: Gives the tart lime vinaigrette a little sweetness for balance.
    • Oil: Choose extra virgin olive oil, or for fun, use a lime olive oil or basil olive oil.
    • Honey: Just a little sweet to balance the tart lime juice, or try this no-sugar honey.

    For measurements please see the recipe card. For help on how to cut watermelon, read this post and see the step-by-step photos. You'll also find information on how to choose a good watermelon.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Add diced avocado for it's buttery flavor and texture.
    • For a different vinaigrette dressing, use balsamic vinegar instead of the lime juice, or lemon juice.
    • Drizzle with a balsamic reduction (aka balsamic glaze) and just squeeze on some lime.
    • Another terrific addition is brined black kalamata olives, either whole or sliced.
    • Add raw pine nuts for more crunch and a buttery tase.

    To make a homemade balsamic glaze, see this recipe for balsamic reduction.

    Recipe Instructions

    If you have a container of pre-cut watermelon pieces, spread them out on a cutting board and cut the pieces into smaller pieces if the chunks are large. Something bite-sized is better. If you have a whole watermelon, start here.

    Whisking golden colored vinaigrette in a glass measuring cup.
    Step 1: Whisk vinaigrette together in a small bowl; taste and adjustment with more salt or honey.
    Cutting watermelon slices into cubes.
    Step 2: Cut watermelon into bite-sized cubes with a sharp knife.
    Cucumbers on a black cutting board cut in different ways.
    Step 3: Chop cucumber into desired shape and size.
    How to cut feta cheese into cubes for salad.
    Step 4: Cut feta into small cubes.
    Bright green basil leaves on a black cutting board.
    Step 5: Roll basil leaves into a cylinder and slice crosswise into ribbons.
    Red watermelon cubes in a glass bowl.
    Step 6: Add watermelon cubes to a bowl.
    Watermelon salad ready to serve with cucumber, feta, basil, shallots.
    Step 7: Add melon, cucumber, and shallot to a bowl. Scatter the feta cheese over the top and mix gently. Add basil leaves and serving dressing on the side.

    Recipe Tips

    Here are a few tips for making this watermelon basil salad.

    • If making ahead to save time, do your prep work and keep the ingredients separated, covered, and refrigerated. Assemble when ready to serve. For example, prep in the morning and toss to serve for dinner.
    • When prepping ahead, drain the watermelon before combining if needed. It might get juicy as it stands.
    • Serve dressing on the side, so any extra un-dressed salad is still good a day or two longer.

    Serving Suggestions

    Watermelon basil salad is a great summer side dish for just about anything such as grilled meats and grilled chicken, rotisserie chicken, burgers and summer bbq, and grilled vegetables. Fresh basil leaves or fresh mint leaves make lovely garnish.

    Try the salad without the dressing and add if you wish. It's so good by itself, we don't usually use the dressing.

    Chef's Tip on red onions: If you're using red onions in the recipe, a good trick to tame their pungency is to thinly slice them them soak them in cold water for 10-15 minutes, then drain, dry and use in your salad. Works great. If you have a strong shallot, do the same.

    Recipe FAQs

    What cheese goes well with watermelon?

    A mild, salty Greek feta is a classic paring with sweet watermelon. The sweet and salty flavors really compliment each other. A mild goat cheese works equally as well. Add the cheese either cubed or crumbled to chunks of watermelon, add herbs, lime juice, maybe a little onion and you have a delightful watermelon salad.

    How do you cut a watermelon salad?

    For the freshest watermelon salad, start with a whole watermelon. Mini watermelons are easier to handle. Start by cutting a small piece off of one end, then stand the watermelon flat on the end for stability. Slice in half top to bottom with a big chef's knife or watermelon knife. From there, cut slices, trim off the rind, and cut a grid pattern in bite-sized pieces.

    Can you eat watermelon and cheese?

    Absolutely! Watermelon and cheese are a terrific combination because of the sweet and salty flavors, plus crisp and creamy textures (depending on the cheese). Feta cheese is popular and goat cheese can be used as well. Use this combination to make a watermelon feta salad, or serve cheese alongside slices of watermelon on a platter, scattered with fresh chopped herbs such a basil or mint.

    More Refreshing Summer Recipes

    Beat the heat and still love what you eat!

    • Closeup of grilled corn on the cob with herb butter.
      Grilled Corn on the Cob with Garlic Herb Butter
    • Bowl of bright tropical colored pineapple mango salsa.
      Fresh Pineapple Mango Salsa Recipe
    • watermelon goat cheese appetizers
      Summer Watermelon Goat Cheese Appetizer
    • Fruit kabobs with watermelon, cantaloupe, and honeydew melons.
      Fruit Kabobs Made with Melon

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Watermelon salad ready to serve with cucumber, feta, basil, shallots.

    Easy Watermelon Basil Salad with Feta Cheese

    Sally Cameron
    A refreshing summer salad with the sweetness of watermelon, tangy salty feta cheese, crisp cucumber, and fragrant basil. The flavor combination is summer magic, and easy to make.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Salad, Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 to 6
    Calories 361 kcal

    Equipment

    • Cutting board
    • Chef's knife

    Ingredients
      

    Vinaigrette

    • ¼ cup extra virign olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons fresh squeezed lime juice
    • 1 teaspoon mild honey or no-sugar honey optional
    • ⅛ teaspoon sea salt

    Watermelon salad

    • 4-5 cups watermelon cubes half a mini watermelon
    • 2-3 small Persian cucumbers or half an English cucumber
    • 4 ounces feta or goat cheese cut into cubes or crumbled
    • 1 large shallot thinly sliced crosswise into rings or ¼ of a red onion, sliced thin
    • 5-6 large fresh basil leaves

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Make vinaigrette (makes extra)

    • Whisk all ingredients together in a small bowl or glass measuring cup until smooth. You can also add ingredients to a jar, cap tightly, and shake well. Taste the vinaigrette and adjust seasoning with more salt or honey.

    Watermelon salad

    • Cube watermelon into bite-sized pieces, about ¾". Depending on the type and size of cucumbers, if using small Persian cucumber, slice in half lengthwise then cut crosswise into half circles. If they are really small, just cut crosswise into small circles.
      For an English or larger cucumber, quarter the cucumber lengthwise, trim out seedy center, then chop into large or small pieces.
      Roll basil leaves together into a cylinder then chop thinly crosswise into ribbons.
      For the cheese, either cube or crumble the feta, or crumble the goat cheese. Serve vinaigrette on the side, or if preferred, toss with 2 tablespoons to start, then serve rest on the side.

    Notes

    Fun substitutions and variations:
    • Swap fresh herbs, mint is terrific, or try cilantro, or blend them.
    • For a different vinaigrette dressing, use balsamic vinegar instead of the lime juice.
    • Drizzle with a balsamic reduction (aka balsamic glaze) and just squeeze on some lime.
    • Another terrific addition is brined black kalamata olives, either whole or sliced.
    • Add raw pine nuts for more crunch and a buttery tase.
    • For a no-sugar option on honey, try this no-sugar honey, it's terrific.
    •  

    Nutrition

    Calories: 361kcalCarbohydrates: 48gProtein: 10gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gCholesterol: 15mgSodium: 333mgPotassium: 672mgFiber: 2gSugar: 38gVitamin A: 3246IUVitamin C: 49mgCalcium: 45mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Sautéed Mixed Vegetables Recipe

    08/19/2012 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    Summer vegetable medley

    This easy sautéed mixed vegetables recipe became a family favorite when clients asked for it three times in one week. It's a delicious side dish and a healthy recipe. It makes the most of abundant summer zucchini, corn and sweet peppers, plus I've added ideas to vary the vegetable mix by season. Fresh herbs give it even more flavor. Add this to your easy recipes file.

    Colorful summer vegetables medley of corn, pepper, zucchini.

    The combination of zucchini, sweet corn and sweet bell peppers really hit the spot for my clients. They could not get enough of it. No matter how much I cooked, they ate it all. If you have a hard time getting your family to eat vegetables, try mixed vegetables. It's a great way to make vegetables more interesting, plus it offers lots of colors, textures, and flavors.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    You need the following. See measurements on the recipe card.

    • Fresh corn 
    • Zucchini (baby zucchini or small regular)
    • Red bell pepper
    • Orange bell pepper
    • Extra-virgin olive oil
    • Shallot minced, chopped fine (or use onion)
    • Garlic cloves, chopped fine
    • Fresh herbs
    • Salt
    • Black pepper (or red pepper)

    Ingredient Tips and Swaps

    I use fresh veggies, but if you can't get all fresh, use frozen to fill in the gaps.

    • Corn: if fresh is not available, buy organic frozen kernels
    • Zucchini: use the baby ones or small to medium zucchini
    • Shallot: use sweet onions or red onion
    • Optional fresh herbs: try parsley, oregano, tarragon or cilantro (coriander leaves)
    • Instead of shallot, swap in sweet onions
    • For bell peppers, use a yellow bell pepper or even green
    • No fresh garlic? Use a little garlic powder

    Varying Seasonal Vegetables

    I created this recipe in summer, but you can vary the recipe using different vegetables to work year round. The goal is to get healthy dinners on the table. Next time, try adding:

    • Cooked green peas
    • Small chopped broccoli florets
    • Cooked carrots chopped into small cubes
    • Cooked lima beans
    • Cooked french beans or green beans, chopped small (across)
    • Small bits of cooked squash or sweet potatoes
    Fresh zucchini on a cutting board with shallots.

    How to Cut up Zucchini

    For the zucchini, I like to use the baby version when available but regular small zucchini works fine. If using baby zucchini, trim off the stem and cut whole ones on the diagonal.

    Slice regular size zucchini lengthwise into quarters, then trim out the seedy centers and cut on the diagonal into about ½″ wide (1 ½ cm) pieces.

    Slicing bell peppers.
    Slice off the top, the slice down on side.

    How To Cut Up a Bell Pepper

    Cutting up vegetables like bell peppers is a challenge. Here's to handle them. Cut off the top and bottom. Stand the pepper up and cut a slice through the side to open it up. Remove the large seed core.

    Chopping bell peppers into strips.
    Open up the pepper, lay flat, and slice out the ribs. Cut into strips.

    Lay the pepper flat and holding your knife parallel to  the cutting board, trim out the ribs and seeds that are left. From here, cut the pepper into long thin slices. Lay them together, then cut across creating a perfect dice.

    Chopping peppers into small pieces.
    Chop the strips in small cubes or squares.

    How to Cut Corn From the Cob

    For the corn, remove the husk and silk, then drop into boiling salted water for three minutes. Remove the corn and drain on a kitchen towel. With a sharp knife, cut the cob in half to make it more manageable. Stand the cob on end, then cut the kernels from the cob into strips and set aside.

    Slicing corn off of the cob.
    Cut the cob in half, stand on end and slice off kernels.

    Instructions

    Once the prep work is done (which you can do ahead of time), this cooks up quickly for a healthy side dish. All of the vegetables get a quick sauté over medium heat with a little olive oil, some chopped shallot and garlic. Lastly, mix vegetables.

    Fresh herbs make a nice finish but are optional. A nonstick skillet or large cast iron fry pan works fine. I like the vegetables cooked quickly so they are crisp tender, but cook them to your preference.

    Finished vegetables in individual crocks.

    How to Serve

    This makes a great side dish for whole roast chicken, roast bone-in chicken breasts, grilled chicken or burgers. Just about anything.

    And if your family will eat anything as long as it has Parmesan cheese on it, toss the mixed vegetables at the end with finely grated Parmesan or shower it over the top of the veggies.

    Those cute little mini pots are called cocottes, from Le Creuset, available on Amazon in many colors. So fun to serve side dishes and individual portions in.

    Leftovers

    Leftovers are good the next day. Refrigerate in an airtight container. Scramble with eggs or fold into an omelet, or just warm them up again.

    More Vegetable Recipes

    If your family likes green beans, here are 12 ways to dress them up to keep things interesting. Ever tried roasting broccoli? Serve it here with lemon and Parmesan. If you have lots of zucchini, try grilling it.

    📖 Recipe

    mixed vegetables in little pots | afoodcentriclife.com

    Colorful Summer Vegetable Medley

    Sally Cameron
    This easy vegetable side dish takes the saying "eat your colors" to a new level, with zucchini, corn and sweet red peppers. Add chopped fresh herbs if desired. Serve with roast chicken, steak, pork or tossed with pasta or quinoa for a vegetarian/vegan option.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish, vegetables
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6
    Calories 67 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large saute or fry pan

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 large ears of fresh corn, husked and silk removed or 1 cup thawed frozen kernels
    • 1 pound zucchini baby zucchini or regular
    • 1 red bell pepper
    • 1 orange bell pepper
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 large shallot or small onion chopped fine
    • 2 garlic cloves chopped fine
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped herbs parsley, oregano or tarragon, optional
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Vegetable prep work

    • Bring a large pot of water to a boil. When the water boils, drop corn cobs in and boil for 3 minutes. Remove corn and drain on a kitchen towel. When corn is cool enough to handle, cut the kernels from the cobs in long strips and set aside.
      Alternatively thaw frozen corn kernels and cooked according to package directions.
    • While you are cooking the corn, prep your zucchini and peppers. For the zucchini, trim off the ends, then cut into approximately ½″ ( 1 ½ cm) slices on the diagonal. If using baby zucchini, cut them crosswise into pieces.
      If using regular sized zucchini, cut into long quarters, slice out the seedy centers, then cut into pieces.
      For the bell peppers, cut off the tops and bottoms, cut out the seeds and membranes, slice into long thins strips, then chop into small cubes. Follow the photos in the post for help.

    Cooking

    • Heat olive oil in a large sauté pan over medium heat. When oil is hot, add the shallot and cook until soft, about 1 minute. Add the zucchini and cook for a few minutes, then add the garlic and bell peppers, stirring to combine. Continue to cook the vegetables until they are softened and browning. How long will depend on how crisp you like your vegetables. They cook pretty quickly.
      Towards the end, add the corn and heat through for a minute. Add any chopped fresh herbs if desired, salt and pepper, and serve hot.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 67kcalCarbohydrates: 10gProtein: 2gFat: 3gSaturated Fat: 0.5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gSodium: 161mgPotassium: 337mgFiber: 2gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 1424IUVitamin C: 65mgCalcium: 20mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Gluten-Free Hoisin Sauce

    06/10/2023 by Sally Cameron 11 Comments

    A glass jar with rich brown hoisin sauce and a whisk for mixing.

    Finally, a gluten-free hoisin sauce you can make at home in minutes with no cooking required. Gluten-free hoisin sauce is the perfect balance of sweet, salty, savory and sour, a marvelous sauce widely used in Asian cuisine. Use hoisin as a dipping sauce, a glaze or sauce. You've got to try it! Think of it like Asian barbeque sauce. Homemade beats the bottles.

    A jar of rich brown hoisin sauce in a jar with a silver whisk.

    My question was is hoisin sauce gluten-free? Surprised at what store-bought hoisin sauces labels revealed, I created my own gluten-free hoisin sauce recipe. It's the best! All of the flavor and thick texture I wanted without any lower quality ingredients like caramel color, added colors, modified corn starch, or gluten. Good bye bottles!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Easy to make, no cooking required with mostly pantry ingredients.
    • Versatile complex sauce: use it on ribs, chicken, shrimp, scallops, burgers, and as stir-fry sauce.
    • Gluten-free use tamari, which is simply gluten-free soy sauce.

    For another Asian-inspired sauce recipe, try this homemade gluten-free teriyaki sauce. Try gluten-free hoisin as a dipping sauce with these colorful vegetable spring rolls.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for hoisin sauce in glass bowls, ready to be blended.

    I've skipped an ingredient used in many traditional hoisin sauce recipes: fermented soybean paste. No miso paste or black bean paste. Why? I tested batches with it added and found they made a too salty sauce. While traditional, I liked it better without.

    Gluten-free hoisin has amazing rich flavor and lower sodium without bean paste, sweetness from honey rather than plum puree (and a lot of extra sugar), and rich color from soy sauce and molasses versus caramel color.

    • Tamari: wheat-free soy sauce. Choose the 50% reduced for lowest sodium. This is the brand of tamari I buy. Not concerned about gluten? Use regular soy sauce (low sodium).
    • Nut butter: gives this sauce it's its rich, creamy, thick texture and adds flavor. Tahini (sesame seed butter) is my top choice as it is creamy and has a more neutral flavor than other nut butters. Swaps below.
    • Molasses: a thick, dark brown syrup made during the sugar-making process, adds warm sweetness and rich, deep color to homemade hoisin. Get the unsulphured style. Molasses is why brown sugar is brown. Don't use blackstrap molasses; it's too bitter.
    • Sesame Oil: sesame oil adds rich flavor, and be sure to use toasted sesame oil for it's stronger flavor and deeper color.
    • Honey: adds sweetness, use a mild liquid style honey.
    • Tamarind: tamarind is a fruit-like legume with a wonderful sweet-sour taste. It's optional but worth finding. I use Glory Bee organic tamarind puree. It's pure and thick with no additives or seeds (like tamarind in block form). Find it at Whole Foods, ethnic markets and online. Tamarind is a staple in Indian, Mexican, African, Thai and Latin-American cuisines. It's sometimes labeled as tamarind paste.
    • Vinegar: use apple cider vinegar. It adds mild acidity and tang.
    • Chinese Five Spice: five spice is a marvelous, exotic spice blend. Often used are szechuan pepper or black pepper, cinnamon, clove, fennel, star anise or other warm spices. Blends vary. If you are a cinnamon fan, I bet you'll love Five Spice.
    • Garlic: using garlic powder is fine for gluten-free hoisin sauce (versus fresh garlic).

    Please see recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's Note: Hoisin sauce is from Cantonese cuisine, but it's use in Vietnamese, Japanese cuisines and other Asian-inspired dishes. If you've tried bottled Kikkoman hoisin sauce or Lee Kum Kee hoisin sauce, try this recipe for a homemade version.

    Substitutions and Variations

    Here are a few substitutions for my hoisin sauce recipe.

    • Swap nut butters: try creamy almond butter, cashew butter, or creamy peanut butter for the tahini. The flavors are a little different for each. I've made hoisin sauce with them all. Tahini is the most neutral tasting.
    • Swap unseasoned rice vinegar for the apple cider vinegar.
    • To reduce sugar or for vegans, sub this keto honey syrup for honey. It's terrific.
    • Another option is date syrup but I have not tested it.
    • Maple syrup is a substitute, but the flavor will be a little different.

    Chef's Tip: five spice is a marvelous, exotic spice blend. Try it wherever you'd use cinnamon, and it's great with chocolate! Try five spice in my chocolate energy smoothie or this recipe for chocolate pudding (chocolate pots de creme).

    Recipe Instructions

    How to make hoisin sauce? It couldn't be any easier. Measure and blend.

    Ingredients for sauce in a Pyrex glass measuring cup with a whisk for mixing.

    Step 1: Add all to a jar and shake or whisk until smooth. A quick blend on low with a blender works too. No cooking required to thicken, as the tahini makes it thick and creamy. That's it!

    Top down photo of deep brown hoisin in a jar after mixing.

    Chef's Tip: What else can you do with tamarind puree? Use it in jams, chutney's, condiments (like my gluten-free hoisin sauce), glazes, barbecue sauce, dressings, drinks and stir-fry dishes. It's adds bright sweet-tart flavor, sort of like lemons and sweet dates (if that makes sense). It's an ingredient in worcestershire sauce, if you like that flavor. Really, it's delicious!

    Serving Suggestions

    Grilled chicken kabobs glazed with hoisin sauce on a baking sheet.

    ChIcken kabobs: Brush grilled chicken kabobs (above) with gluten-free hoisin sauce for beautiful color and fantastic flavor. Serve extra on the side as a dipping sauce.

    Baby back ribs: Gluten-free hoisin sauce is terrific on this oven baby back ribs recipe.

    Seared sea scallops with hoisin: Glaze seared jumbo sea scallops with hoisin or other seafood dishes like this easy sesame salmon.

    Gluten-free hoisin gets very thick when refrigerated (because of the nut butter). To thin for more of a glaze, add a little water until you get the consistency you desire. It will also thin if you gently heat it over low heat in a small pan. I don't recommend microwaving.

    Oven baby back ribs glazed with rich brown hoisin sauce in a cutting board.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is hoisin sauce gluten-free?

    Hoisin sauce is only gluten-free if you are using tamari, which is wheat-free soy sauce. Tamari tastes the same as soy sauce, just gluten-free. Read labels to be sure.

    Can teriyaki be substituted for hoisin?

    Teriyaki sauce can be a good hoisin sauce alternative in some recipes. They have a similar consistency, but different flavors. Both are delicious. Salty, savory soy sauce (or tamari) is the common lead ingredient for both sauces, and both contain sugar or other sweetener.

    Can you get gluten-free hoisin sauce?

    Yes, but not always. If you find it you can buy bottled gluten-free hoisin sauce but homemade is far better and simple to make. Plus you control the ingredients such as sodium level and sugar levels, both of which are super high in commercial brands.

    What is oyster sauce vs. hoisin sauce?




    In the Asian family of popular sauces, the flavor of oyster sauce is somewhere between fish sauce and soy sauce, as it is made with oysters, as well as sugar, MSG, caramel color, and wheat. Both are thick sauces with a syrupy texture and deep brown color, and both are widely used in Asian cooking. It might be a little fishy tasting for some palates, more of an acquired taste. Hoisin sauce does not have fish sauce (although you can add it if desired).

    More Delicious Sauce Recipes

    And be sure to check out the sauces and dressing category for more easy tasty ideas!

    • Golden Italian salad dressing in a jar with a silver whisk.
      Easy Homemade Italian Dressing
    • Bright red strawberry coulis (strawberry sauce), in a jar with a gold spoon.
      Fast and Fresh Strawberry Coulis
    • Homemade Mayonnaise| A FoodCentricLife.com
      Homemade Mayonnaise
    • Citrus mango sauce
      Creamy Mango Sauce

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A glass jar with rich brown hoisin sauce and a whisk for mixing.

    Homemade Hoisin Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Sweet, sour and savory all at once. Think of hoisin like ketchup or Asian barbecue sauce with a twist and it's gluten-free. Use it on chicken, scallops, shrimp, ribs, stir-fries, vegetables, burgers and cold Asian-style noodle salads. Holds for 30 days refrigerated.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course condiment
    Cuisine Asian
    Servings 8 Yield 1 cup
    Calories 129 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • ¼ cup low sodium gluten-free Tamari or low sodium soy sauce
    • ¼ cup tahini (sesame seed butter) swaps below
    • 3 tablespoons honey
    • 2 tablespoons molasses
    • 2 tablespoons sesame oil
    • 2 tablespoon jarred tamarind puree
    • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar or unseasoned rice vinegar
    • ¼-1/2 teaspoon Five Spice Powder aka Chinese five spice
    • ¼ teaspoon garlic powder

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Combine all ingredients into a large measuring cup or bowl. Whisk until smooth. You could even toss all of the ingredients into a blender and whirl to blend. Taste, and if you want it sweeter add a little more honey. Store covered and refrigerated in a jar for 30 days.

    Notes

    Substitutions for tahini (sesame seed butter) include creamy cashew butter, creamy almond butter, or creamy peanut butter. Tahini blends in the best with its mild flavor.
    For less sugar (and vegans), use this keto honey made with monk fruit. 
    For tamari look for the 50% reduced style for lower sodium. 
    Gluten-free hoisin is very thick when cold after refrigeration, so depending on use you may need to thin. Use a little water. You can also warm it up on low heat in a small pan. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 129kcalCarbohydrates: 15gProtein: 2gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gSodium: 293mgPotassium: 168mgFiber: 1gSugar: 12gVitamin A: 7IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 28mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Fudgy Gluten-Free Chocolate Brownies

    06/03/2023 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Gluten-free brownies with melted chocolate in a square pan after baking.

    These rich and fudgy gluten-free chocolate brownies are so easy to make you'll never go back to a boxed mix. Skip the cocoa powder and use melted chocolate, the secret to this brownie recipe. No one would ever know they are gluten-free. Dairy-free brownies option too. Let's fix that chocolate craving!

    Sliced dark chocolate brownies in a square silver baking pan with one piece gone.

    Here's a decadent treat that hits all of your chocolate loving buttons. Gluten-free chocolate brownies; not too fudgy, but just right. Many brownie recipes use dutch-processed cocoa powder or natural cocoa powder for making brownies, but melted chocolate was a brownie game-changer for me in this recipe. It was love at first bite.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Intense chocolate flavor, fudgy texture.
    • Simple ingredients.
    • The best gluten-free brownies and you'd never guess.
    • Serve them simple or fancy.

    For another baked cake-like treat with chocolate chips, try this easy pumpkin brownies with chocolate chips. It's good year round.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for gluten-free brownies on the counter in glass bowls.
    • Chocolate: This brownie recipe uses melted chocolate instead of cocoa powder. Buy dark chocolate, either bar chocolate, block chocolate, or these organic chocolate pieces called gems. It's lovely, clean chocolate for snacking and baking, great to have on hand.
    • Vanilla extract: Be sure to use good quality real vanilla extract. Here's my favorite vanilla.
    • Fat: Oil or butter? Both work. Use unsalted butter, and let it sit out at room temperature before baking. For a dairy-free option use melted coconut oil (but see below). Gluten-free brownies are rich and decadent both ways. In fact the coconut oil version might be even fudgier (if that is a word!).
    • Sweetener: Choose either light brown sugar or golden monk fruit blend for less sugar.
    • Eggs: Eggs provide structure, act as a binder and leavener in baking, plus provide richness and moisture in brownie batter. Use large eggs.
    • Flour: Use a gluten-free blend with xanthan gum for structure.
    • Arrowroot starch: An easily digested starch that binds ingredients in gluten-free baking together and keeps baked good a little lighter.
    • Baking powder: Works as a natural leavener for baking gluten-free brownies.

    Please see the recipe card for exact measurements.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • If you're coconut allergic, use avocado oil or a neutral oil like this. Another option is plant or vegan butter.
    • Sugar types: I tested gluten-free chocolate brownies with light brown sugar and coconut sugar. Another great option to reduce sugar is golden monk fruit blend.
    • For egg-free brownies, try substituting with flax eggs. For more ideas, read this article on egg substitutions. I have not tested gluten-free brownies using egg substitutes.
    • Enjoy coconut? Add shredded unsweetened coconut to the batter.
    • Want it even more chocolaty gluten-free brownies? Add dark chocolate chips.
    • Love nuts in your brownies? Fold in chopped walnuts or chopped pecans into the batter.

    Looking for another chocolate treat for your family? Chocolate bark bites are fun to make and bite-sized too.

    Chef's Tip: What's a double boiler? It's a bowl over a pot of simmering water. The bottom of the bowl should not touch the water. A double boiler creates gentle, indirect heat for melting sensitive things like chocolate. Read more here about using a double boiler. For microwave directions, see below.

    Recipe Instructions

    Before starting, be sure the butter and eggs are at room temperature. It makes a difference with baking.

    Set up: Grease or spray an 8x8 light colored metal square pan and line with a piece of baking parchment that goes over the side by a few inches. This will help you get the brownies out of the pan more easily. Pre-heat the oven to 325°F.

    Dry ingredients in a glass bowl for baking brownies.
    Step 1: Whisk together dry ingredients.
    Melting chocolate in a double boiler on the stovetop.
    Step 2: Melt chocolate in a double boiler over low heat on the stovetop. Microwave melting instructions below.

    Creaming butter and brown sugar in a glass bowl with a hand mixer.
    Step 3: With an electric mixer in a medium bowl, beat the soft unsalted butter and brown sugar together until fluffy and smooth (called creaming), then add eggs, then the dry mixture.
    Mixing chocolate brownie batter with an electric hand mixer in a glass bowl.
    Step 4: Add the melted, cooled chocolate to the batter and beat until smooth. Add vanilla. When batter is smooth, it's ready to pour.
    Brownie batter ready to pour into a light metal square baking pan for baking.
    Step 5: Scrape brownie batter into the prepared pan lined with parchment using a flexible spatula and sprayed with non-stick and bake for approximately 30 minutes.
    Baked brownies in the pan cooling for slicing.

    Step 6: Remove brownies from the oven, cool a few minutes in the pan, the with the help of the parchment wings, lift the gluten-free brownies out of the pan to a cooling rack. Allow them to cool before slicing. Resist cutting them right out of the oven!

    Chef's Note: To melt chocolate in the microwave, place the chocolate pieces or chopped chocolate in a clean, dry, glass bowl and microwave on 70% power for 1 minute. Stir with a flexible spatula or spoon, then continue melting chocolate in 15 second intervals, stirring between times, until chocolate is melted, smooth and glossy. Cool chocolate for 5 minutes, then stir in the vanilla and the melted butter or coconut oil until smooth. 

    Brownie Baking Tips

    Choose the Right Pan

    Metal pans: Bake the brownies in a light colored square baking pan. Light colored pans reflect the heat. Dark metal pans absorb and distribute heat more quickly than light colored pans, so the edges and bottom of the brownies will be more done than in a light metal pan.

    If you use a darker metal pan, watch your timing as darker pans bake more quickly. The results might be a little different.

    Slice gluten-free brownies on a cooling rack and one on a small plate for serving.

    Use Baking Parchment

    Use a piece of baking parchment paper cut to line the pan, allowing the edges to drape over the sides. This makes the brownies easier to get out of the pan after baking and cooling. It also protects the batter from the direct heat of the metal pan. I prefer parchment to aluminum foil.

    A stack of gluten-free brownies on a small plate, the top one has a bite out.

    Serving Suggestions

    Just a simple brownie all by itself is perfect for a casual dessert or snack. To dress gluten-free brownies for a served dessert:

    • Add a scoop of vanilla ice cream
    • For fancy brownies, pour a little easy strawberry coulis over the top
    • Drizzle melted chocolate on top and sprinkle on goodies like chopped nuts, coconut, or sprinkles.
    • Add frosting!
    Add a small scoop of vanilla ice cream to the top of brownies for a serving suggestion.

    Recipe FAQs

    Do brownies have gluten in them?

    Standard brownie recipes using white all-purpose flour (wheat flour) contain gluten as wheat contains gluten. Using gluten-free flours, it's easy to make gluten-free brownies that are fantastic. No one would ever know they are gluten-free; they are just delicious. You don't need gluten for great brownies.

    Can you freeze gluten free chocolate brownies?

    Yes, you can freeze gluten-free brownies. Properly wrapped and airtight they will be good for a couple of months.

    How long do gluten free brownies last in the fridge?

    Gluten-free brownies last about 5 days in the refrigerator, but I doubt they will last that long before being eaten. I store mine on the counter top for a few days in an airtight container and they stay moist and wonderful.

    Why don't my brownies have a crackly top?

    It depends on whether you are baking with white flour or gluten-free flour, how much you beat the batter, and the fat to flour ratio. With regular flour, the more beating, the more crackly top. With GF flours it's different. There's no gluten to beat. You still get delicious, moist, rich brownies, but they don't get crackly on top.

    More Fantastic Chocolate Recipes

    Try these chocolate chip meringue forgotten cookies that you leave in the oven overnight.

    • two chocolate smoothies in glasses on an antique tray.
      Chocolate Banana Smoothie
    • A silver tray of peanut butter protein balls tolled in coconut, ready to eat.
      Peanut Butter Oatmeal Protein Balls (no-bake)
    • Chocolate Tart With Hazelnut Crust
      Decadent Chocolate Ganache Tart
    • bittersweet chocolate pudding
      Chocolate Pots de Creme (Dairy-Free)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make these gluten-free chocolate brownies, please comment, and let me know, I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Gluten-free brownies with melted chocolate in a square pan after baking.

    Rich and Fudgy Gluten Free Chocolate Brownies

    Sally Cameron
    Gluten-free brownies are easy to make, skip the boxed mixes. This recipe uses melted chocolate instead of cocoa powder. Dairy-free option and variations at the end.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 9
    Calories 328 kcal

    Equipment

    • 8x8 light colored metal baked pan
    • baking parchment paper
    • Electric hand mixer

    Ingredients
      

    • 8 ounces dark chocolate chopped or use the gems
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • ¾ cup light brown sugar packed, no lumps
    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, room temperature or coconut oil, melted
    • 3 large eggs
    • 3 tablespoons gluten-free flour blend (with xanthan gum) or try teff flour
    • 2 tablespoons arrowroot starch
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Set up

    • Grease a square light metal baking pan (8x8-inch) with a spritz of non-stick spray or a little extra coconut oil. Cut a piece of parchment to line the pan draping it over two opposite sides of the pan by a few inches. The parchment overlap makes it easy to remove the brownies after baking. Pre-heat the oven to 325°F.

    Melt the chocolate (two options)

    • If using bar or block chocolate, chop the chocolate into small chunks with a serrated bread knife or heavy chef's knife.
      Double boiler method: Fill a medium pan with a few inches of water and bring to a simmer over medium heat. Place chopped chocolate in a stainless steel or glass bowl large enough to sit on top of the pan and fit a little inside without touching the simmering water. Turn heat down to low, add chocolate, and allow to slowly melt, stirring occasionally with a silicone spatula.
      Microwave method: See note at end of recipe.
      Cool melted chocolate for a few minutes and stir in the vanilla extract, then proceed with the recipe.

    Mix dry ingredients

    • Add the flour, arrowroot starch, baking powder and salt to a small bowl and whisk together.

    Make the batter

    • Place the brown sugar, soft butter or oil, and eggs in a large bowl and beat 2-3 minutes until smooth. Start at low speed and build up as needed. Add the dry ingredients into the bowl and beat well until smooth and incorporated. Next, beat in the melted chocolate with vanilla, increasing the speed as the batter stiffens. The batter will be thick.
      Note: As there is no gluten, do not worry about over-beating. It's actually good.

    Bake

    • Scrape the batter into the prepared baking pan and smooth evenly with a spatula. Bake for approximately 30 minutes, until the brownie surface is a little firm to the touch, but not hard. Cool brownies in the pan for 10 minutes. Grasp the parchment paper edges and lift out the brownies, transferring them to a wire cooling rack. Slice into 9 pieces when cool.

    Serving

    • Serve alone, or topped with ice cream with shaved chocolate, chopped nuts, shredded coconut, or even a strawberry coulis.

    Notes

    Buying chocolate
    For the dark chocolate, use bar chocolate, block chocolate, or the chocolate gems. Break the bars up with your hands, chop the blocks with a serrated knife, the gems are ready to go. 
    Microwave melting chocolate
    Place the chocolate pieces or chopped chocolate in a clean, dry, glass bowl and microwave on 70% power for 1 minute. Stir with a flexible spatula or spoon, then continue melting chocolate in 15 second intervals, stirring between times, until chocolate is melted, smooth and glossy. Cool chocolate for 5 minutes, then stir in the vanilla. 
    Gluten-free brownie variations:
    • Add ⅓ cup shredded unsweetened coconut to the batter.
    • Fold chopped walnuts or chopped pecans into the batter. Add ½-3/4 cup. 
    Recipe for easy fresh strawberry coulis right here. 
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 328kcalCarbohydrates: 33gProtein: 4gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 11gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 83mgSodium: 147mgPotassium: 231mgFiber: 3gSugar: 24gVitamin A: 333IUCalcium: 74mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Ground Meat Taco Recipe

    05/04/2023 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    Taco meat in a cast iron pan with fixings for tacos around it.

    Looking for a quick and delicious ground meat taco recipe that's ready in about 15 minutes-without those sodium-heavy, preservative-filled seasoning packets? This easy recipe uses my homemade taco seasoning blend for fresh, bold flavor you can feel good about. It works with ground beef, turkey, chicken, or pork, and makes a versatile taco filling that's perfect for meal prep, freezes beautifully, and tastes amazing in tacos, burritos, or taco salads.

    Savory spiced taco meat in a black cast iron skillet ready for tacos.

    If you've been searching for the perfect ground meat taco recipe, this is it. It's a mainstay in our house for both lunch and dinner, and it works whether you're gluten-free, low-carb, or neither. Serve it up in soft tortillas, crisp taco shells, lettuce wraps, or over a bed of greens as a taco salad-the possibilities are endless.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ground Meat Taco Recipe Hghlights

    • Fast & easy - Ready in about 15 minutes, perfect for busy weeknights.
    • Family-pleasing - Customize with your favorite toppings for everyone at the table.
    • Versatile - Works for soft tacos, crisp tacos, lettuce wraps, or taco salads.
    • Meal prep-friendly - Make a double batch and freeze half for quick dinners.
    • Budget stretcher - Add a can of rinsed and drained black or pinto beans to stretch a pound of meat.
    • Low-carb option - Naturally low in carbs when served in lettuce wraps or over greens.

    For another taco recipe try these spicy shrimp tacos.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Simple ingredients for taco meat with ground beef.
    • Ground meat: choose either ground beef (80/20 ground beef or 15/85 ground beef). Another options is ground turkey (93%), ground bison, or ground dark chicken. The meat needs some fat for flavor, so a higher fat content is fine.
    • Onion: use either white, brown or yellow onion, for flavor and moisture.
    • Oil: olive oil, avocado oil, or a neutral oil like this, they all work. Don't use vegetable oil, it's really unhealthy for you. If you have it, toss it.
    • Garlic: use fresh cloves of garlic for the best flavor.
    • Taco meat seasoning: make a batch of my homemade taco meat seasoning recipe. The store-bought taco seasoning packets work, but they are super high in sodium and added preservatives. Homemade is way better and it's controllable. If you never done it, make your own homemade seasoning.
    • Tomato paste: tomato paste adds a rich, savory flavor to taco meat. Swaps below.

    Please see the recipe card for quantities and all ingredients.

    Ground meat is so versatile and economical. For another dish with ground meat, try these baked turkey meatballs or ground beef meatballs. Serving options and sauce ideas in the post.

    Homemade taco seasoning blend in a glass jar.

    Homemade Taco Meat Seasoning (optional)

    You can use a taco seasoning packet but homemade taco seasoning is much better and you control the ingredients. Homemade is gluten-free, no mystery ingredients, and no cornstarch or crazy high sodium. Plus it's good with shrimp, chicken and other dishes too, not just tacos. It's got bold flavor with just a little heat. You need:

    • Dried oregano
    • Ancho chili powder
    • Ground cumin
    • Ground coriander
    • Smoked or regular paprika
    • Granulated garlic (sub garlic powder)
    • Chipotle chili powder (optional for heat, or sub cayenne pepper)
    • Ground black pepper

    Please see recipe card for measurements.

    For another terrific homemade spice blend, try this all-purpose dry rub. I use it on ribs, chicken, rotisserie, salmon, and shrimp.

    Chef's Tip: When opening dried herbs and spices, be sure to date the jar. For the best flavor use within 6 months. For storage, place in a cool, dark place like a drawer or pantry, away from the heat of the stove and out of the light. Both degrade the flavors.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • If you're out of tomato paste, use ketchup or tomato sauce. You may need a bit more, use the taste test.
    • Add mild green chiles, either a small can of green chilies or fresh finely chopped chili such as a mild Anaheim or a green bell pepper.
    • Add hot chilies for heat with jalapeno chilie or serrano chile, or use your favorite hot sauce.

    How to Make Ground Taco Meat

    Sautéing chopped onions in a cast iron skillet.
    Step 1 Over medium heat, sauté onions in oil until soft and lightly golden in a large skillet, 1-2 minutes, then add garlic and cook another 30 seconds.
    After cooking onions, ad spice mix and tomato paste.
    Step 2 Stir in the taco meat seasoning plus a tablespoon of water and cook 1 minute.
    Add tomato paste to the pan and stir into the spices and onion.
    Step 3 Add the tomato paste and stir. If needed add another tablespoon of water.
    Adding the ground beef to the skillet for taco meat.
    Step 4 Add ground meat and cook, breaking it up with a wooden spoon, cooking until meat is no longer pink inside. If meat seems a little dry at the end, stir in a tablespoon of water.
    Finished juicy taco meat, rich brown from spices and tomato paste.

    Chef's Tip: Get your ground meat out of the refrigerator 45-60 minutes ahead of time if possible. It is safe to do so and the meat breaks up easier when cooking and cooks a little faster because it is softer and not so cold.

    Ways to Enjoy Ground Taco Meat

    What makes a good taco? It's personal preference. Serve taco meat in corn tortillas or cassava tortillas for soft tacos, or butter lettuce leaves for a low-carb or paleo approach.

    For using taco meat burrito-style, use large size tortillas. Taco meat is super for burrito bowls and taco bowls too. Its versatile!

    Taco Garnishes

    For taco garnishes try:

    • Grated cheese (jack, cheddar, or a Mexican cheese)
    • Chopped cilantro
    • Chopped tomato
    • Chopped green onions
    • Thinly sliced cabbage or lettuce
    • Diced or sliced avocado
    • Homemade salsa verde
    • Sliced radishes
    • A dollop of sour cream
    • Pico de gallo
    • Pineapple-mango salsa

    And don't forget a wedge of fresh lime juice to squeeze over the top.

    Make taco meat ahead on a Sunday to use during the week. Leftover meat holds up to 4 days refrigerated and freezes great. Great for Taco Tuesday!

    10 Minute Turkey Taco Filling | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Recipe FAQs

    Do I need to drain ground beef before adding taco seasoning?

    It's better to not drain any rendered fat after cooking the ground beef, because fat carries flavor. It adds flavor and juiciness. A good fat level for ground beef for making tacos is 15% fat. There really isn't' any excess fat.

    How much meat is in 1 taco?

    Typically a taco provides approximately 2 ounces of cooked meat, along with optional garnishes such as grated cheese, finely sliced cabbage or lettuce, chopped tomatoes, and fresh cilantro.

    Do you season taco meat before or after browning?

    You can do it either way. Many recipes added the taco seasoning after cooking the meat. I add it before the meat, after cooking the onions in oil, to allow the spices to release their flavors and "bloom".

    More Mexican-Inspired Recipes

    For another great family recipe with ground meat try my bison bolognese meat sauce.

    • based Mexican ranchero sauce in a bowl with a wood spoon.
      Ranchero Sauce (Quick Mexican Tomato Sauce)
    • A baking dish full of shredded beef enchiladas with a deep red enchilada sauce cilantro, and pickled onions.
      Shredded Beef Enchiladas
    • Smoked salsa in a tall jar and a small serving glass cup with corn chips
      Easy Smoked Salsa (pellet grill recipe)
    • A gray platter of sals verde chicken breasts with tomatillo sauce, grated cheese and chopped cilantro.
      Easy Salsa Verde Chicken (green salsa chicken)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this ground meat taco recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Taco meat in a cast iron pan with fixings for tacos around it.

    Ground beef taco recipe

    Sally Cameron
    This fast and tasty taco meat makes a quick lunch or dinner. Extra freezes great. Serve in corn or cassava tortillas or in lettuce cups for low carb. The taco seasoning mix makes extra. Use 15% fat beef, dark ground turkey, or bison for best flavor.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, lunch, Main Course
    Cuisine Mexican
    Servings 4 (8 tacos)
    Calories 285 kcal

    Equipment

    • Cast iron skillet or fry pan

    Ingredients
      

    Taco Meat

    • ½ white or yellow onion chopped
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil or avocado oil
    • 2 large garlic cloves finely chopped or zested
    • 1 ½ tablespoons taco seasoning mix homemade or store-bought
    • 1 pound ground beef 15% lean dark turkey 93% or bison
    • 2 tablespoons tomato paste or ¼ cup ketchup
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt skip if you use a store packet
    • 2-3 tablespoons water as needed

    No-salt Homemade Taco Seasoning (or use store-bought)

    • 1 ½ teaspoons dried oregano
    • 1 ½ teaspoons ancho chili powder
    • 1 teaspoon cumin ground
    • 1 teaspoon coriander ground
    • 1 teaspoon smoked or regular paprika
    • ½ teaspoon granulated garlic sub garlic powder
    • ¼ teaspoon chipotle chile powder optional, or sub cayenne
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    For Tacos and Optional Garnishes

    • 8 corn tortillas or cassava, or lettuce leaves
    • 1 cup thinly sliced green cabbage
    • 2 tablespoons chopped cilantro
    • 4-8 ounces grated cheese
    • 1 avocado diced or sliced
    • 2 limes cut into wedges for squeezing over tacos

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Taco seasoning (makes extra, doubles easy)

    • Add all ingredients to a jar with a tight lid and shake well. Label and date the jar.

    Taco meat

    • Heat a large saute or frying pan over medium heat. Add oil, then add the onion, cooking onion until softened, 1-2 minutes. Add garlic and cook another 30 seconds. Add 1 ½ tablespoons of the seasoning mix and a tablespoon of water, stirring so it is coated in the oil and onion and cook 1 minute. Add the tomato paste and cook 1 minute. Add another tablespoon of water if needed to keep it juicy.
    • Add the meat to the pan. Cook meat, breaking it up with a wooden spoon and stirring until it is no longer pink, about 8-10 minutes. If it's dry add a tablespoon of water. Stir to heat through, then serve.
      To make tacos, heat tortillas and fill with approximately a ¼ of a cup per taco filling. Garnish as desired. Makes 8 tacos.

    Notes

    Adding fresh chopped green chili (mild or hot) or canned chopped chili is good too, more flavor and color. To stretch the serving, add a can of rinsed and rained black beans or pinto beans. 
    Nutritional calculation note: The calculation is for the taco meat alone as different tortillas and garnishes can be used. As the seasoning has no salt and makes extra, it is not included in the overall calculation as well.
    Recipe Yield: This makes 8 tacos, 2 per person, but if you've got big eaters you can make 1 ½ x or double the recipe. Leftovers won't go to waste! If you increase the quantity, use a 12" fry pan or skillet (or larger) for more surface area to help with cooking quickly. 
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 285kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 22gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 77mgSodium: 505mgPotassium: 422mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 210IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 23mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!
    Updated 5/27/2020

    How to Make Sabayon

    06/28/2018 by Sally Cameron 9 Comments

    champagne sabayon sauce

    Sabayon, the luscious French take on the classic Italian zabaglione, is a light and ethereal dessert sauce made with Champagne, wine, or sparkling wine. Perfect for drizzling over fresh berries or other fruits, it adds a touch of elegance to any dessert. Never made it before? It's surprisingly simple! Let me show you how to whip up this delightful, dairy-free sauce called sabayon. It's one of my favorite recipes, and once you try it, it might become yours too. Alcohol-free option too.

    A glass filled with fresh berries drizzled with sabayon dessert sauce and topped with mint.

    Sabayon is a simple, luscious dessert sauce made with egg yolks, sugar (just a little) and sparkling wine. Make it in minutes and serve it warm right off the stove, layered into glasses or jars with the berries. It's heavenly!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Most people don't know what is and you'll surprise them.
    • It's delicious and easy.
    • Use a dry champagne or sparkling wine.
    • No-alcohol option included.
    • Make it ahead tip.

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Eggs: All you need it the yolks.
    • Sugar: Superfine works great but regular sugar, or natural sugar work too. I've not yet tried this with monk fruit but will to reduce sugar.
    • Liquid: Dry sparkling wine or dry Champagne. See tip below.
    • Fruit: Use what is best at the store such as berries and when in season add cantaloupe, honeydew, pineapple, and other fruit.
    • Mint: Optional garnish but a nice touch.

    Chef's tip: For making sabayon I buy the mini size airline bottles (6 ounces) versus opening a big bottle. You don't need expensive stuff for sabayon. The mini size is perfect for four servings of sabayon, or open two minis for eight servings. Plus the mini bottles are inexpensive and store easily in the pantry for a quick dessert.

    A bowl of fluffy sabayon sauce with a whisk in process.

    Chef's tip: What to do with extra egg whites? Make these easy chocolate chip meringue cookies called Forgotten Cookies!

    How to Make Sabayon Sauce

    Set up a double boiler on your stove by filling a large pan (about 4 quarts) a quarter full of water, then bring it to a simmer over medium heat. To make the sabayon, use a medium stainless-steel bowl that fits on top and partially inside the pan but does not touch the simmering water.

    Off the heat, add the yolks and sugar to the bowl and whisk until they are thick, pale and smooth. You don't want grainy sabayon from un-dissolved sugar. Place the bowl atop the simmering water.

    Next, whisk in the wine a little at a time. It comes together like magic, but its a bit of an arm workout. You can whisk in circles, alternating fast and slow to give your arm a break, but don't stop whisking.

    When it's ready, you will feel it shift and thicken into a ribbon-like consistency that drips from the whisk and holds its shape briefly when drizzled back into the bowl.

    A glass pitcher with sabayon pouring into a dessert glass filled with colorful fresh berries.

    Tips for Success

    Making sabayon is an arm workout. You need a large stainless steel whisk. Here are tips that make it easier:

    1. When you whisk the sugar and egg yolks together the mixture will be heavy and sticky at first, but it lightens up and gets easier as you whisk.
    2. To stabilize the bowl on top of the pan, wedge a small soft potholder between the edge of the bowl and pan. This way you can whisk without trying to hold a hot bowl.
    3. After you whisk the sugar and yolks together off the stove, place the bowl on top of the pan and whisk until the sugar melts (you'll feel it's no longer gritty), then start adding your wine.

    Serving Suggestions

    I discovered that sabayon sauce holds up well made a little ahead of time, such as a few hours. Then you're not standing at the stove whisking away while your guests wait for dessert (but mine like to watch or help). The difference is the sauce will be chilled versus warm, but both are heavenly.

    Serve with the best looking fresh fruit of the season. To speed getting dessert to the table, choose your glasses and fill them with the fruit beforehand and keep them refrigerated and ready to go for the sabayon when done.

    If you love fresh fruit desserts, try this easy one-pan fresh cherry cake.

    No-Alcohol Sabayon Option

    I've made delicious sabayon without alcohol using ginger ale for a special event where wine was not allowed. It worked great.

    The problem is commercial ginger ale is nothing but carbonated water, high fructose corn syrup, caramel color, preservatives and hardly any ginger. If you don't cook with wine, try to find a natural ginger ale and give that a try.

    Another option is fruit juice but I've not tried it and and most fruit juices are very sweet so the overall sabayon might be too sweet.

    Recipe FAQs

    What type of wine should I use for sabayon?

    I prefer making sabayon with champagne or sparkling wine to keep it light. Some recipes call for Marsala, and you can substitute with Prosecco, or even a dessert wine like Moscato.

    Do I need a double boiler to make sabayon?

    Yes, but you can easily set up your own, you don't need special pans. Use a bowl (I use stainless steel) set over a simmering pot of water as a substitute. The bowl you choose should fir slightly inside the pan without touching the simmering water. And slip a small hot pad between the bowl and the pot so you can whisk away, hands free.

    Can sabayon be served cold?

    Sabayon can be served warm right out of the pan, more room temperature, or chilled and cold.

    Can sabayon be reheated?

    Generally no. Once sabayon is made it's best to enjoy right after making or after no more than a few hours refrigerated. I've made it and whisked in a little heavy whipped cream to stabilize it for making ahead by a few hours with success.

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make sabayon, please comment and let me know. If they were a hit, please give it a 5 star rating. They really help other readers and I love hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    sabayon with berries | afoodcentriclife.com

    Sabayon (Dessert Sauce)

    Sally Cameron
    Lightly sweet and foamy, sabayon is easy to make and requires just three ingredients. Serve over fresh berries or mixed fruit. For mixed fruit add small chunks of melon, pineapple, kiwi or halved grapes. Make the Sabayon at the last minute and serve warm or make it ahead and serve chilled. If serving chilled, re-whisk before serving. This recipe doubles easily for 8 but will take a little longer (and more of an arm workout).
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine French
    Servings 4
    Calories 212 kcal

    Equipment

    • French whisk
    • Medium stainless steel bowl

    Ingredients
      

    • 4 large egg yolks
    • 4 tablespoons superfine sugar or regular sugar or sugar substitute
    • ¾ cup dry sparkling wine or dry Champagne airline sized bottle, 6 ounces
    • 4 cups fresh berries or mixed fruit
    • mint sprigs optional garnish

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Start by readying where the sabayon will be served. Place berries or mixed fruit in wine glasses, brandy snifters or glass bowls.
    • Set up a double boiler using a 4 quart sauce pan and a medium size stainless steel bowl. The bowl should fit on top and partially into the pan. Fill sauce pan with about 3 inches of water. Be sure the the water does not touch the bottom of the bowl you are using. Bring to a simmer.
    • Off of the heat, whisk the egg yolks and sugar in the bowl until smooth, thick and pale. Place the bowl over the simmering water and wedge a small soft potholder between the pan edge and bowl for stabilization.
      Whisk and fell that the sugar is melted and smooth before you start adding the liquid.
      Whisking quickly, in a steady stream add the champagne. Continue whisking until the sauce becomes light and foamy and all of the wine is incorporated. It will thicken up and become and ethereal sauce. Keep whisking as needed until done.
    • Pour the sabayon over the readied fruit glasses and serve.

    Notes

    Sabayon holds up well made ahead. The difference is the sauce will be chilled versus slightly warm, but both are heavenly. After making the sabayon, refrigerate covered until ready to use, then re-whisk and use over fruit of choice. For more tips on making sabayon, please see the post.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 212kcalCarbohydrates: 33gProtein: 3gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 184mgSodium: 12mgPotassium: 134mgFiber: 4gSugar: 26gVitamin A: 316IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 38mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Fresh Green Beans Almondine Recipe

    04/08/2023 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    A bowl of bright green beans almondine with toasted buttered almonds.

    Turn simple green beans into an irresistible side dish with this fresh Green Beans Almondine recipe. It may sound fancy, but it's surprisingly easy to make! Tender green beans are topped with buttery, toasted almonds for the perfect mix of crunch and flavor. For the best texture, use haricots verts-the delicate French variety of green beans. Whether you make it ahead or whip it up in 30 minutes, this dish is a guaranteed crowd-pleaser.

    Green beans almondine in a shallow oval bowl scattered with toasted almonds.

    A classic French dish, green beans almondine is a lighter, more elegant alternative to rich holiday sides like green bean casserole. You may also see it spelled amandine or almandine, but no matter the name, it's a simple, flavorful way to serve green beans. This versatile side pairs beautifully with everything from ham and pork tenderloin to roast chicken and turkey, making it perfect for both everyday meals and special occasions

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • An easy side dish with simple ingredients.
    • Make the green beans and almonds ahead of time.
    • A nice swap for traditional green bean casserole.
    • Humble green beans taken to a new level. It's the best green bean recipe.

    For a delicious for green bean recipe for falls holidays, try Thanksgiving green beans recipe.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for green beans recipe in bowls on the counter.
    • Green beans: Buy the French ones called haricot vert. They are sometimes labeled as baby green beans, French green beans, or French beans. They are long, slender, and more flavorful and tender than standard green beans. Think string beans.
    • Almonds: Buy sliced, raw almonds.
    • Shallot: Shallots provide an earthy, aromatic flavor that's a little sweet.
    • Garlic: Adds great flavor and fragrance.
    • Butter: Use either unsalted butter, ghee or clarified butter, or plant butter for a vegan, no-dairy dish.
    • Olive oil: A little for sautéing the shallots and garlic, and adding healthy fat and flavor.
    • Coarse kosher salt: I don't usually put salt in this list, but you need a bunch for blanching the green beans. Here is what I use and keep boxes in my pantry.

    Please see recipe card for measurements.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Can't find haricot verts? Regular green beans work too for green beans almondine.
    • No sliced almonds? Use slivered almonds.
    • Don't like almonds? Use walnuts, pine nuts, or pecans. Or try these toasted pepitas (pumpkin seeds).
    • Want a sweeter option? Swap the almonds with these candied maple pecans and sprinkle over the top (chop them a bit).
    • Add chopped fresh herbs like Italian parsley or chives. .

    Recipe Instructions

    Set Up:

    • Get a large pot of very salted water boiling to blanch green beans.
    • Set up an ice bath. Fill a medium bowl half full of ice cubes and add cold water.
    • Ready a plate or rimmed baking sheet with a clean kitchen towel or paper towels to drain the beans.

    While the water is coming to a boil, make the toasted almonds.

    Toast Almonds

    These buttery toasted almonds really make the green beans almondine the best!

    Melting butter in a stainless steel fry pan.
    Starting to toast almonds in butter on the stove top.

    Step 1: Melt unsalted butter in a large frying pan over medium heat.

    Step 2: Add the almonds and toast for 3-4 minutes, stirring. Don't walk away as nuts burn quickly. If you need to turn your heat down, do so. You want toasted almonds, not burned ones.

    Golden brown butter toasted almonds in the pan, finished.
    Toasted almonds cooling on a sheet pan.

    Step 3: Finished browned butter toasted almonds ready to cool.

    Step 4: Pour the almonds out of the hot pan onto a sheet pan or onto parchment paper and scatter a little salt over the top. Get them out of the hot pan so they do not over brown. Cool the almonds and keep them in the refrigerator in an airtight container. They keep for a month. Beware, they are deliciously addictive!

    Blanching Green Beans

    Blanching green beans is a simple technique everyone should know.

    A small pot of boiling green beans on the stovetop.
    Green beans chilling in an ice bath to retain color and stop the cooking process.
    • Step 1: If needed, snap the tops off any stems. Haricot vert usually come trimmed. Place green beans in the boiling, salted water (1 tablespoon of salt per quart of water) and cook for 4 minutes. After cooking, use tongs and immediately plunge the blanched green beans into the ice water bath. This stops the cooking process and the green beans retain their bright green color.
    • Step 2: When green beans are cold (just a couple minutes), move them to drain on a kitchen towel.
    Sautéing shallot in olive oil in a fry pan.
    Adding green beans to the shallots to heat up for serving.
    • Step 3: Heat the olive oil in a frying pan or large skillet over medium heat and add the shallots. Saute until soft and tender, cooking time about 3 minutes. Add garlic and cook another 1 minute, stirring.
    • Step 4: Add the green beans and turn to coat with flavor and warm up, about 5 minutes. Remove green beans to a shallow bowl or platter for serving and sprinkle (or toss) with the almonds.

    Chef's Note: Blanching is a basic cooking method that par-cooks (or pre-cooks) vegetables to be finished at a later time. Blanching requires very salty boiling water; think of it like fast brining for vegetables. It locks in their flavor and sets color. You are not consuming all of the salt in the water, so don't worry. The water is drained off. Start with 1 tablespoon of kosher salt per quart of water. I use 5 tablespoons of coarse kosher sea salt for an almost-full 6 quart pot. It works!

    A bowl of bright green beans with toasted buttered almonds.

    Serving Suggestions

    Green beans almondine is traditionally served warm, but it is surprisingly good served chilled like a salad in warmer weather.

    At fall holidays, sprinkle with dried cranberries for a tart sweet and colorful finish. Crumbled crispy bacon is terrific too.

    For another green bean side dish, try this green bean salad with tomatoes and corn for summer.

    Use extra almonds to top other vegetables, toss into salads, top Greek yogurt or even add to steel cut oats for breakfast.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is the difference between Amandine and Almondine?

    There's no difference, it's referring to the same kind of recipe, a culinary term meaning the food is garnished with almonds, usually toasted almonds, like green beans almondine.

    What are the best green beans for green beans almondine?

    The best green beans are called haricot vert, a French variety of green bean. They are long, slender, and more tender than common American varieties of green beans. They are popular and easily found in most produce departments.

    What can I add to green beans to make them taste better?

    First, be sure to salt your water heavily when cooking them (1 tablespoon per quart of water), as that adds flavor. Second, season them with salt and pepper or your favorite seasonings. Drizzle with olive, melted butter, toasted sesame oil, or a flavored finishing oil, even Balsamic glaze. Add garnishes like toasted almonds, crisp crumbled bacon, grated Parmesan cheese, toasted garlic butter breadcrumbs, just to give you a few ideas.

    More Great Vegetable Side Dishes

    For another easy and pretty green bean recipe try this one with pomegranate seeds.

    • roasted broccoli
      Roasted Broccoli with Parmesan and Lemon
    • Zucchini Casserole with Parmesan Crumb Topping
      Zucchini Gratin with Parmesan Crust
    • A bowl of burnished roasted Brussels sprouts glazed with Balsamic.
      Brussels Sprouts with Balsamic Vinegar
    • roast asparagus
      Oven RoastedAsparagus

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make green beans almondine, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Green Beans Almondine | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Green Beans Almondine

    Sally Cameron
    Tender French baby green beans (Haricot Vert), come packaged with the ends snipped off, ready to cook. You can use regular green beans and cut the tops of yourself. Top with crunchy toasted almonds. Great for every day, a holiday or special dinner.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    get water to a boil 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 to 6
    Calories 241 kcal

    Equipment

    • 12" fry pan

    Ingredients
      

    Blanching water

    • 5 tablespoons coarse kosher salt Use approx. 1 tablespoon per quart of water

    Green Beans

    • 12 ounces haricot verts of baby green beans
    • 2 teaspoons olive oil
    • 1 medium shallot halved lengthwise, sliced thin crosswise
    • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped or zested

    Toasted Almonds

    • 1 ½ tablespoons unsalted butter ghee or plant butter
    • 1 cup sliced raw almonds 4 ounces
    • 2 pinches sea salt

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Getting started

    • Fill a large pot (5-7 quarts) with water adding kosher salt at approximately 1 tablespoon per quart of water. Bring the water to a full boil. While you're waiting on the water to boil, set up the ice bath and toast the almonds.

    Toasted almonds

    • Add butter to a medium skillet or fry pan. Melt the butter over medium-low heat. Add the almonds and cook, stirring occasionally, until golden brown and fragrant, about 5 minutes. Don't walk away from the stove as nuts burn quickly.
      When done, sprinkle with a little extra salt and set the almonds aside on a baking sheet to cool. Use now for serving or keep in an airtight container in the refrigerator.

    Finish the green beans

    • When the water is boiling and the ice batch is ready, drop the beans into the boiling water and cook for 4 minutes. When done, remove the beans from the pot with tongs and plunge them into the ice water. When cold (they chill fast), drain the beans in a colander and dry on a clean kitchen towel.

    Serving

    • When ready to serve, heat the olive oil in a large fry pan and saute the shallot until soft, 2-3 minutes. Add garlic, cook 1 minute more. Add the green beans and heat through, turning occasionally, about 5 minutes. Serve scattered or tossed with the toasted almonds.

    Notes

    If pre-cooking green beans for serving a few days later, place cooked, drained green beans into an airtight container for up to 4 days. Do almonds ahead too. Then it's fast to get them on the table for serving.
    The almonds keep for about a month refrigerated. Use them on salads and other vegetables or to top yogurt or steel cut oats. 
    Shortcut: you can skip the shallots and garlic and toss the green beans with good olive oil (maybe a flavored olive oil like lemon or basil) and add the toasted almonds to serve.
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 241kcalCarbohydrates: 13gProtein: 8gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 11gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 11mgSodium: 1169mgPotassium: 403mgFiber: 6gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 816IUVitamin C: 18mgCalcium: 118mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Roast Pork Tenderloin with Dijon Mustard Sauce

    03/31/2023 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    Pork tenderloin with creamy mustard sauce close up with a serving fork.

    This roast pork tenderloin with Dijon mustard sauce is everything you want in a dinner recipe-tender, juicy, flavorful, and done in just 30 minutes. The pork roasts beautifully in the oven, while a creamy Dijon sauce adds tangy, savory flavor that pairs perfectly with the mild sweetness of the pork. Whether you're cooking a quick weeknight meal or hosting friends, this easy pork tenderloin recipe is a guaranteed crowd-pleaser.

    Slices of roast pork tenderloin with a creamy mustard sauce on a white platter.

    Pork tenderloin is one of my favorite cuts of meat - quick cooking, tender, and so versatile. It shines with sauces, especially Dijon mustard, my favorite (I keep 2-3 jars in my pantry). Dijon adds bold flavor and naturally thickens into a luscious sauce, turning this easy roast pork tenderloin into a 30-minute dinner that's both both easy and elegant.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Roast Pork Tenderloin

    • Ready in 30 minutes - Quick-cooking, perfect for weeknights or special occasions.
    • Tender and juicy - Seared on the stovetop, finished in the oven to perfection.
    • Luscious mustard sauce - With white wine, fresh herbs, and a touch of cream.

    If you enjoy pork, try this beautiful, holiday-worthy pistachio crusted pork rib roast or this smoked pork tenderloin if you have a pellet grill or smoker.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for pork tenderloin with mustard sauce on a sheet tray.
    • Pork tenderloin - Sometimes labeled as pork fillet.
    • Oil - Olive oil, avocado oil, or a neutral oil all work well for searing.
    • Butter - Use unsalted butter for salt level control.
    • Heavy cream - Look for heavy cream or heavy whipping cream (the same). The higher fat content means a richer, silkier Dijon mustard sauce.
    • White wine - Essential for deglazing the pan and deepening flavor. Sauvignon Blanc or Chardonnay are ideal, but dry white vermouth is a handy alternative. Mini bottles are perfect for cooking so you don't have to open a full bottle.
    • Shallot - Mild, slightly sweet, and classic in French cooking. Shallots add both depth and texture to the creamy mustard sauce.
    • Dijon mustard - You'll need two kinds: creamy Dijon for body and flavor, and whole-grain Dijon for rustic texture and bite. I prefer the French brands.
    • Fresh herbs - Thyme pairs beautifully here, but rosemary also works. Use fresh when you can; dried thyme is a good fallback.

    Please find the measurements in the recipe card. if you like to brine pork, use my pork brine recipe ahead of cooking.

    Chef's Tip - Pork Tenderloin vs. Pork Loin (Roast)
    Don't confuse pork tenderloin with pork loin. They come from different parts of the animal. Pork tenderloin is always boneless, very lean, and about 1 pound in size, while pork loin roasts are much larger (2-5 pounds), may be bone-in or boneless, and often have a fat cap. Pork loins are less expensive and take longer to cook, while pork tenderloin is pricier but cooks quickly and stays tender without needing that fat layer.

    If you love tenderloin as a cut of meat, try this slow roasted beef tenderloin, also terrific for special occasions.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Wine substitutions - Skip the wine and swap in a good quality, low-sodium chicken broth or stock. You can also use apple cider vinegar diluted with water (half and half) or the same ratio with lemon juice. These options add acidity and brightness without alcohol. For more substitution ideas, see this guide to wine substitutes in cooking.
    • Mustard variations - Prefer a smoother, less textured Dijon cream sauce? Simply use all creamy Dijon mustard and skip the whole-grain. Use just under double the amount of creamy Dijon for balanced flavor.

    How to Roast Pork Tenderloin

    Start: Get the pork out of the refrigerator an hour ahead of time so it's closer to room temperature for better roasting. Pre-heat the oven to 375°F. Trim the pork tenderloin of silver skin (it looks like packaging tape) and excess fat with a sharp knife. Place a frying pan over medium to medium-high heat.

    Searing pork tenderloin in a stainless steel fry pan.
    1. Season pork with salt and pepper. Add a little oil to the pan, then add the pork. It should sizzle when it hits the pan. Sear on all sides until nicely brown.
    Seared pork tenderloin going into the oven to finish on a sheet tray with parchment.
    1. Place the pork on a rimmed baking sheet with parchment. Use a pastry brush to lightly add a little extra olive oil for moisture and shine. Place in the oven to roast, about 10 minutes, 140°F -145°F.
    The tasty bits left in the fry pan after searing pork will make great pan sauce.

    3. DO NOT WASH THE PAN, use it to make the sauce.

    Chopped shallots sautéing in butter starting a pan sauce.

    4. Over medium heat, add the butter to the still hot pan, then shallots. When the butter is melted, add shallots and thyme. Cook, stirring and scraping the bottom of the pan until soft, 1-2 minutes.

    Deglazing a pan after searing pork to make a pan sauce with mustard cream.
    1. Add wine to deglaze the pan, scraping up all of the tasty bits on the pan bottom. Cook most of the wine off.
    A tasty pan sauce being created in a stainless steel fry pan for pork tenderloin.
    1. Whisk together the cream and both mustards. Add to the pan, still stirring. The sauce will start to thicken quickly.
    Thickened mustard cream sauce finishing in the pan, ready to serve.

    7. Sauce is done when you can draw a line through it. When pork is done, remove to a cutting board, rest 5-10 minutes covered, then slice and serve with the sauce.

    Roast pork sliced for serving on an oval platter with Dijon mustard sauce.

    Chef's Tip on Cooking oil. What not to use? It's best avoid seed oils or vegetable oils. They are really not healthy because they are inflammatory, often refined with chemicals, plus most use GMO crops. I use olive oil for most of my cooking needs (yes olive oil is more safe and stable than many say). Coconut oil is good, where the flavor works. A terrific fat for higher heat cooking? Ghee, made from butter. It's a clarified pure fat (no water) and it is lactose and casein-free. And a favorite? This clean, healthy, neutral oil.

    How to Serve

    What do you eat with roast pork tenderloin? Just about anything! Here are my suggestions for serving:

    • Green beans: try simple green beans drizzled with Balsamic glaze, or green beans almondine.
    • Potatoes: try these easy Dutch potatoes with fresh herbs or whipped sweet potatoes.
    • One of our favorite veggies, this air fryer broccolini is a terrific, easy side dish that takes just minutes!
    • Asparagus: roast asparagus or even bright green creamy asparagus soup as a starter.
    • Roasted vegetables like these roasted carrots with thyme.

    Of course a good salad is always welcome.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you cook a pork tenderloin without drying it out?

    This sear and finish in the oven technique is a great way to insure moist pork tenderloin. To not dry it out, don't over cook it. It's done when an instant-read digital thermometer reads 140°F - 145°F. Remember the temperature will rise while it is resting for a few minutes, covered with foil. And because pork tenderloin is lean, it's good to serve with a sauce for added moisture.

    Should you pan sear pork tenderloin?

    Pan searing pork tenderloin gives it a nice browned and tasty exterior. Finish in the oven for just a few minutes at 375°F. For a convection oven, about 10 minutes. A few minutes longer in a standard conventional oven.

    How long does roast pork last in the refrigerator?

    Leftover roast pork tenderloin keeps in the refrigerator for 3-4 days. Eat it cold or warm it up. I've even chopped up extra pieces and used it in tacos. Leftover Dijon sauce is very thick and even good cold. If you want to warm it up a bit, place a glass container with the sauce in a small pan with water over low heat for a few minutes. Re-whisk if it separates.

    Is it necessary to sear pork tenderloin?

    Searing pork tenderloin adds flavor and color, so it's a great method for starting a roast pork tenderloin, then finishing it in the oven for moist and tender pork.

    More Recipes With Pork

    Pork is a versatile, healthy, and delicious meat that can be cooked in many ways! Form ribs to roasts, try some of the pork recipes.

    • A golden crusted pork rib roast on a gray platter with fresh green parsley.
      Pistachio Crusted Pork Rib Roast
    • BBQ glazed smoked pork tenderloin sliced on a gray platter for serving.
      Smoked Pork Tenderloin (pellet grill)
    • Close up of creamy pork chops with sauce.
      Sour Cream Pork Chops Recipe
    • Smoked baby back ribs being sliced on a sheet tray with BBQ sauce.
      3-2-1 Ribs (Smoked Baby Back Ribs Recipe)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Pork tenderloin with creamy mustard sauce close up with a serving fork.

    Roast Pork Tenderloin with Dijon Mustard Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Savory pork tenderloin with a delicious Dijon mustard cream sauce. A crowd pleaser in just 30 minutes. Serve with green beans, potatoes, and a salad for a weekend or holiday winner of a dinner.
    5 from 5 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    resting time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Entree, Main Course
    Cuisine American, French
    Servings 4
    Calories 467 kcal

    Equipment

    • 12" stainless steel or cast iron fry pan large enough to get the pork in to
    • Parchment paper
    • Rimmed baking sheet ¼ sheet or ½ sheet size.

    Ingredients
      

    Pork Tenderloin

    • 1 ¼-1 ½ pounds pork tenderloin
    • 1 ½ tablespoons olive oil or avocado oil divided use
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Dijon mustard Sauce

    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • ¼ cup finely chopped shallot 1 medium shallot
    • ⅓ cup dry white wine swap low sodium chicken broth
    • 4 ounces heavy cream or heavy whipping cream ½ cup
    • 1 tablespoon creamy Dijon mustard
    • 1 tablespoon whole grain Dijon mustard
    • 2 teaspoons fresh chopped thyme leaves swap ¾ teaspoon dried thyme

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Season the pork

    • Pre-heat the oven to 375°F. Line a sheet pan with a piece of baking parchment and ready near the stove.
      Trim the pork tenderloin of any silver skin if needed, and any extra fat. It's usually pretty lean. Rub the tenderloin with a little oil (2 teaspoons) and sprinkle with salt and pepper on all sides.

    Sear and roast the pork

    • Heat the pan over medium heat, when hot, add the rest of the oil and place the tenderloin into the pan. It should sizzle when it hits the pan.
      Allow the pork to sear on all sides, occasionally rolling it over with tongs or forks so all side become golden brown, about 10 minutes.
      Place the seared pork tenderloin on the baking sheet and brush lightly with a little extra olive oil. DO NOT WASH THE PAN.
      Roast pork for approximately 10 minutes or until the pork reads 140°F - 145°F with an instant read thermometer. While the pork is roasting, make the sauce.
    • Remove pork from the oven and allow to rest covered with foil until the sauce is ready. When the mustard sauce is ready, slice the pork tenderloin, either on the diagonal or straight across, place on a platter and serve with the sauce.

    Make the Dijon mustard sauce

    • With the pan still warm over medium low heat, melt the butter, then add the shallots. Stir and scrape the bottom of the pan to get the tasty bits off the bottom.
    • When the shallots are golden, add the wine and continue stirring. When the wine has cooked down, add the cream and the mustards whisked together until smooth, then add to the pan. Add the thyme. Stir until the sauce thickens, just a few minutes. Serve a little over the pork slices and the rest on the side for extras.

    Notes

    Right size pan: Be sure your pan can accommodate the length of the pork tenderloin. A frying pan with wider flared sides work well as the ends might have to start up the sides a bit. 
    Timing: Cooking time will depend on your oven and whether you use convection mode or not. I use convection roast mode and it takes 10 minutes for perfect pork tenderloin. Standard conventional baking mode will take a little longer. 
    Testing for doneness: It's good to test the meat near the end of roasting to be sure it is done, but remember that each time you open the oven you lose heat and extend roasting time by another 1-2 minutes. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 467kcalCarbohydrates: 5gProtein: 43gFat: 29gSaturated Fat: 13gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 11gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 176mgSodium: 488mgPotassium: 893mgFiber: 1gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 650IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 50mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Roasted Red Pepper Soup (sheet pan recipe)

    02/19/2021 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    roasted red pepper soup

    Easy soups make for easy meals and this sheet pan roasted red pepper soup is both. Add a green salad and you've got a meal. All of your ingredients go on sheet pans and into the oven. To finish the soup, puree all of the roasted veggies in a blender with broth and add a little dairy or non-dairy milk for creaminess if desired. An added benefit, there is little mess to clean up.

    roasted red pepper soup | afoodcentriclife.com

    This simple soup is full of flavor (and a great way to get your veggies in).

    It takes 5 large red bell peppers or about 3 pounds. Slice the peppers in quarters top to bottom, remove seeds and place cut side down on a parchment lined baking sheet pan.

    To a shallow baking dish add 1 sliced onion and a few large, whole, peeled garlic cloves drizzled with a tablespoon of olive oil. Roast in a hot oven until the pepper skins are blackened and the onions and garlic are soft and browned.

    roasted pepper in a blender | afoodcentriclife.com

    Finishing the Soup

    Roast your vegetables then add everything to a blender and puree with chicken broth or vegetable broth. For creaminess add either canned coconut milk or dairy milk (half and half or cream).

    For another easy, creamy vegetable soup, try this cream of asparagus soup (coconut milk or heavy cream)

    roated red pepper soup | afoodcentriclife.com

    Roasting and Spice Notes

    Sheet pans are a super handy kitchen tool. They come in full, half, quarter and even eighth size. When you sheet pans, buy rimmed heavy duty ones as they are less likely to warp in the oven. If you are concerned with aluminum in your diet from foil and sheet pans, cover them with parchment paper to protect your food and speed clean up. If you don't have a rimmed baking sheet use a large cookie sheet. Don't put the peppers in a casserole dish because they need the high heat exposure of a flat or almost flat baking sheet to roast the skins.

    For spices I prefer smoked paprika but regular is fine too. For more smoky spice add a little spicy ground chipotle powder when pureeing. Another way to add heat is with sharp paprika. For more Southwestern flavors add cumin, coriander or ancho chili powder.

    roasted red pepper soup | afoodcenticlife.com

    If you love bell peppers, try these Turkey Quinoa Stuffed Peppers! And for another marvelous creamy soup, be sure to make this easy cream of asparagus soup. Make it dairy-free or not.

    Low Histamine Notes

    For histamine friendly soup use homemade low histamine chicken broth. I make mine in an Instant Pot or electric pressure cooker. Find the recipe here. Another option is homemade vegetable broth. Also made in the pressure cooker, it beats anything off the store shelf. If coconut milk doesn't work for you, try another non-dairy milk or use more broth as needed. In the photos I garnished with toasted pumpkin seeds. If your sensitive skip them and use herbs. Cilantro or Italian parsley are nice.

    📖 Recipe

    roasted red pepper soup | afoodcentriclife.com

    Sheet Pan Roasted Red Pepper Soup

    Sally Cameron
    From a sheet pan to the blender, this soup is easy with little mess to clean up. For dairy-free use canned coconut milk, or regular dairy half and half or cream as perferred. For low histamine be sure to use a low histamine broth. The recipe is on this site. For a spicy soup see notes below.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 40 minutes mins
    Course lunch, Main Course, Soup
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 Yield about 7 cups
    Calories 161 kcal

    Equipment

    • Sheet pans
    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 5 large red bell peppers about 3 pounds
    • 1 medium brown or sweet onion peeled and sliced into chunks
    • 3 large whole garlic cloves peeled
    • 1 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 ½ teaspoons smoked paprika
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 2 cups chicken or vegetable broth
    • 1 cup coconut milk or dairy milk

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat the oven to 425°F. Line a half sheet pan with parchment. Snap any green stem off the top, then slice peppers in quarters from top to bottom and remove the seeds.
    • Lay the peppers cut side down on the half sheet pan. Place the onions and garlic to a shallow baking dish and drizzle with the olive oil and stir to coat. Place vegetables in the oven and roast until the peppers have blackened skin, about 30 minutes. Check the onions at 20-25 minutes or when you smell them. They should be browned and soft. Remove the pans from the oven.
    • Cover the peppers with foil or another sheet pan upside down to steam the peppers and make the skin easy to peel off. Allow them to stand 10 minutes. Remove the cover and peel as much of the skin off as posible with your fingers. Don't worry about getting everyone last bit. Place all of the veggetables in a blender with the paprika, broth, salt and pepper then puree smooth. Add the coconut or dairy milk and blend a bit more to combine. Adjust the thickness with more broth or milk and serve hot or cool completely. Soup will last in the refrigerator 4 days or freezes well.

    Notes

    For Low Histamine:
    If you are histamine intolerant, freeze finished soup in portions immediately. If you can't handle coconut milk, use a safe non-dairy "milk" to puree your soup or just use all low histamine chicken or vegetable broth. The soup won't be as thick and creamy but it still tastes delicious.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 161kcalCarbohydrates: 13gProtein: 4gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 8gSodium: 229mgPotassium: 484mgFiber: 3gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 4526IUVitamin C: 177mgCalcium: 28mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Homemade Coconut Milk (from Canned in 1 Minute)

    02/15/2023 by Sally Cameron 24 Comments

    Making coconut milk at home is quick, affordable, and healthier than most store-bought options. With just a can of coconut milk and water, you can whip up fresh homemade coconut milk in minutes-no additives, gums, or preservatives. The result is creamy, versatile, and perfect for everything from smoothies and coffee to soups and curries.

    A glass and bottle of coconut milk on a marble counter.

    If you're sensitive to dairy, coconut milk is a delicious plant-based alternative (as long as you don't have a coconut allergy). It's creamy, versatile, and easy to make at home with just a can of coconut milk from your pantry. In less than a minute, you'll have fresh coconut milk that's more economical-and often better tasting-than store-bought, without any additives.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Homemade Coconut Milk

    • Just 2 ingredients, 1 minute - No complicated steps or special equipment.
    • Pantry-friendly - Canned coconut milk stores easily until you need it.
    • No mess - Unlike nut milks or dried coconut versions, there's no soaking, straining, or cheesecloth required.
    • Versatile - Perfect for smoothies, coffee, curries, soups, or baking.
    • Budget-friendly - Making your own is far more economical than buying cartons.

    For other recipes using canned coconut milk, try this coconut shrimp curry, or this creamy cauliflower soup.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for homemade coconut milk.
    • Coconut milk - Use organic, unsweetened, full-fat canned coconut milk. It keeps well in the pantry and gives the creamiest, richest results.
    • Water - Use filtered water instead of tap for the cleanest flavor and healthiest homemade coconut milk. 

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    For another terrific easy plant-based milk you can make in a minute, make this hemp milk recipe.

    Chef's Tip: What is Coconut Milk and Why Make It?
    Coconut milk is made by blending the white flesh of mature brown coconuts with water. Canned coconut milk is usually much richer than the carton versions sold in stores. By diluting it at home, you can control the fat level and thickness-making it light like almond milk for everyday use or creamier for cooking. If you're concerned about saturated fat, read this article for more information on the fat content of coconut milk.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Vanilla Coconut Milk - Add a splash of vanilla extract or vanilla paste. Paste gives you those pretty flecks of vanilla bean.
    • Sweetened - Stir in monk fruit syrup for natural sweetness without sugar. Honey adds flavor but works, or try brown rice syrup or maple syrup. Powdered or granulated monk fruit also blend in easily.
    • Chocolate Coconut Milk - Whisk in unsweetened cocoa powder. Start with 1 tablespoon and adjust to taste for a chocolatey treat.

    How to Make Coconut Milk

    Put the water and the canned coconut milk into a large container and shake well or stir. It takes 1 minute!

    If the coconut milk is solidified, add it to a high-speed blender with a tight fitting lid, add water and blend for a few seconds until smooth. That's all there is to making fresh homemade coconut milk. 

    If you dilute according to my ratios you will have a quart (liter) or 4 cups of coconut milk. For creamy coconut milk, use less water. See the health benefits section for more ratios of water to coconut milk and variable fat grams.

    Breakfast setting with granola, berries, coffee and pitcher of milk.

    Coconut Milk from Coconut Milk Powder

    Coconut milk powder is another option if you want a shelf-stable choice. Most brands provide about 3-4 grams of fat per cup once mixed with water, and you can easily adjust the ratio for creamier or lighter milk. It's handy for smoothies-just add water and powder straight to the blender. The only issue is additives.

    Chef's note: Coconut milk powders usually contain tapioca maltodextrin as a thickener and stabilizer. It's gluten-free but processed and high on the glycemic index, so it may spike blood sugar. For that reason, I prefer using canned coconut milk when possible, but powder can be convenient in a pinch. For more information on tapioca maltodextrin.

    Almond Milk Versus Coconut Milk

    FeatureAlmond Milk (unsweetened)Homemade Coconut Milk (diluted from canned)
    Calories~30–40 per cup~50–100 per cup (depends on dilution)
    Fat2–3 g (mostly unsaturated)5–10 g (mostly saturated)
    Protein1–2 g0–1 g
    FlavorMild, nuttyCreamy, coconut-forward
    Best UsesSmoothies, cereal, coffeeCurries, soups, sauces, dairy-free baking

    Customizing Coconut Milk: One advantage of making your own coconut milk from canned is that you can adjust the fat level. For example:

    • Mix 1 (13.5 oz) can with 64 oz water → ~10 g fat per cup.
    • Mix 1 (13.5 oz) can with 128 oz water → ~5 g fat per cup (similar to store brands like Silk or So, but without additives).

    This way, you can make coconut milk as light as almond milk for daily use, or richer for cooking. Here's my almond milk recipe. It is unstrained, rich, and creamy compared to store brands.

    Chef's Tip: Watch for Additives in Coconut Milk
    Many store-bought coconut milks (canned and boxed) contain stabilizers and thickeners like carrageenan (from red algae) or guar gum (from guar beans) to improve texture. While safe for most, they can cause digestive upset for some. Making coconut milk at home means you skip the additives and control exactly what goes in. I use Native Forest "Simple" without gums.

    Homemade granola with berries and coconut milk pouring.

    How to Enjoy Homemade Coconut Milk

    • Smoothies - Swap it for nut milks or cow's milk for a creamy, dairy-free smoothie base.
    • Coffee or tea - Use as a creamer; make it thicker by diluting with less water.
    • Breakfast bowls - Pour over oatmeal, porridge, or homemade granola with berries.
    • Soups - Stir into pureed soups like this creamy fennel soup recipe.
    • Chia oats - Use in place of almond milk for chia pudding with coconut milk.

    Any dairy swap - Works almost anywhere you'd use milk-served warm or chilled.

    Storage

    Homemade coconut milk usually lasts about 3-4 days in the refrigerator in a sealed container. A couple of tips to stretch quality: Shake or stir before using - it can separate as it sits. Glass jar over plastic - helps it keep fresher. Sniff & taste test - if it smells sour or develops a tang, it's gone.

    Homemade coconut milk lasts about 4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container or glass jar. Shake before using if needed.

    If it smells sours or off, curdles, turns grayish or gets cloudy, toss it and make fresh. Do not store at room temperature.

    Strawberry banana smoothie in a glass.

    Coconut Milk FAQs

    Is it cheaper to make your own coconut milk?

    Yes-homemade coconut milk is usually a few cents cheaper per serving. More importantly, canned coconut milk is shelf-stable, so you'll always have it in the pantry without extra trips to the store. Coconut milk powder is another option if you want convenience.

    Is homemade coconut milk better than store bought?

    Homemade coconut milk gives you full control: no additives, no gums, and you can adjust the thickness by diluting more or less. Choose organic canned coconut milk without additives for the cleanest base-this is the brand I buy.

    Can you make coconut milk from coconut flakes?

    Yes, but it takes more work. You'll need to soak shredded or flaked coconut in hot water, puree it thoroughly, and strain it. You'll also need to decide what to do with the leftover pulp. Using canned coconut milk is faster and easier.

    Can you freeze coconut milk?

    Yes. Freeze in airtight containers or ice cube trays for up to 2 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge and whisk or blend to restore creaminess.

    More Recipes for Non-Dairy Milks

    For more smoothie recipes to use coconut milk in, get ideas on this page. Its delicious in this sheet pan roasted pepper soup too.

    • A glass dairy bottle of homemade almond milk with raw almonds on a wooden table.
      How to Make Homemade Almond Milk
    • pale green pumpkin seed milk
      Homemade Pumpkin Seed Milk (Dairy-free)
    • homemade cashew milk pouring into a glass on a wooden counter.
      Cashew Milk Recipe
    • White round platter with a glass of hemp seed milk, a pitcher, and hemp seeds.
      Hemp Mylk (hemp milk recipe)

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make your own coconut milk, please comment and let me know. I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Quick Homemade Coconut Milk

    Sally Cameron
    For quick and creamy coconut milk, dilute organic canned coconut milk with water. Simply mix, cover and refrigerate. You can dilute more or less for your needs. Yield: 1 quart/1 liter. For dilution options please see recipe notes at end.
    4.43 from 7 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 2 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 2 minutes mins
    Course Beverage
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 8-ounce servings
    Calories 220 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 13.5 ounce can organic coconut milk
    • 20 ounces filtered water 2 ½ cups

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Shake the canned coconut milk well (if needed) and pour canned milk into a tall container or large mixing cup, add filtered water and stir well. If needed, add to a blender and briefly blend on low to smooth it out. Taste for your preference and add more water if desired.

    Notes

    If you have a sensitive digestive system, read labels and choose a no-additive brand. It should just be coconut milk. 
    To reduce the fat, dilute the milk further or try using light coconut milk. 
    Variations:
    • Vanilla flavored: For vanilla coconut milk, add a little vanilla extract or vanilla paste. Using vanilla paste gives you flecks of vanilla bean.
    • Sweetened: To sweeten, try this all natural syrup made from monk fruit. It adds sweetness without any sugar and blends into liquid easily. Honey works but has a definite flavor. You can also try brown rice syrup or maple syrup. Powdered or granulated monk fruit work as well.
    • Chocolate: Use unsweetened coca powder. Start with 1 tablespoon and add more if desired.
    For lower fat levels consider these ratios:
    • Mix 1 13.5-ounce can of full fat coconut milk with 64 ounces of water for approximately 9 servings at 10 grams of fat per 8-ounce serving.
    • Mix 1 13.5-ounce can of full fat coconut milk with 128 ounces of water for approximately 17 servings at 5 grams of fat per 8-ounce serving. At this ratio of water to coconut milk it is closer to what you get from store brands such as So and Silk, but it is more fluid because there are no additives.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 220kcalCarbohydrates: 5gProtein: 2gFat: 23gSaturated Fat: 20gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.3gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gSodium: 21mgPotassium: 252mgFiber: 2gSugar: 3gVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 20mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Instant Pot Lentil Soup Recipe

    01/20/2023 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    Instant pot lentil soup

    Instant Pot Lentil Soup-thick, hearty, and ready in about 45 minutes. This cozy bowl borders on a stew: French green lentils, vegetables, and rich chicken broth cook perfectly in the pressure cooker for a satisfying, meal-prep-friendly soup. No Instant Pot? Stovetop directions included as well as slow-cooker instructions. Make a big batch now, freeze a few portions for later, and dinner's done.

    Lentil soup with vegetables in bowls with spoons and parsley.

    This Instant Pot lentil soup is a make-on-repeat keeper-comforting, protein-rich, and easy to finish with simple garnishes. It keeps 4-5 days in the fridge and freezes up to 3 months, so it's great for meal prep. Serve with garlic toast or crusty bread (or cornbread) and you've got dinner. Stovetop method included, so you can make this pressure cooker lentil soup either way.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You Should Make Lentil Soup

    • Choose your method - Instant Pot, stovetop, or slow cooker; same cozy result.
    • Hearty & healthy - High protein and fiber, naturally gluten-free.
    • Thick, stew-like texture - Lentils stay tender, not mushy.
    • Meal-prep friendly - Keeps 4-5 days in the fridge; freezes 3 months.

    For another lentil recipe, try my lentil and quinoa salad, great for year round.

    Ingredients & Notes

    Ingredients for lentil soup with labels on a counter top.
    • Cooking fat - Extra-virgin olive oil for flavor and a healthy fat.
    • Onion - Sweetness + depth; yellow, white, or sweet all work.
    • Carrot - Balances the lentils with natural sweetness.
    • Celery - Completes the aromatic base (classic mirepoix).
    • Fennel (optional but great) - Mild anise notes; adds another vegetable layer.
    • Garlic - Fresh is best, jarred or tube purée works as well.
    • Dried herbs - Dried Italian seasoning or a blend of thyme/oregano/rosemary; dried holds up well to pressure cooking.
    • Tomato paste - Savory depth and that umami savory taste.
    • Broth - I use chicken broth (Instant Pot chicken broth recipe here) but you can substitute turkey broth, beef broth, or vegetable broth.
    • Lentils - French green (Puy) hold their shape and give a meaty texture.
    • Bay leaf - Adds a subtle savory note; remove before serving.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    Fennel is delicious eaten raw too, try this lovely winter salad, Fennel Salad with Orange Vinaigrette.

    Chef's Tip - Why French Green (Puy) Lentils? - They hold their shape so the soup stays thick and hearty without turning mushy, and they bring a nutty, earthy, slightly peppery flavor. If your bag says Puy lentils, that's the same type grown in the Le Puy region of France. What about other lentils? You can use brown lentils in a pinch (softer texture), but skip red or yellow for this recipe as they break down and go creamy in texture.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Herbes de Provence - Use the classic French dried blend (often with a touch of lavender) for a Provençal twist; it pairs beautifully with French green lentils.
    • Fresh thyme - Use 1 tablespoon finely chopped thyme leaves in place of dried.
    • No fennel available - Substitute chopped leek or add a little extra celery + onion. For fennel flavor, add ½ teaspoon lightly crushed fennel seed (or a pinch of fennel pollen or anise seed).
    • Out of tomato paste - Skip it (but it adds depth of flavor), or use 3 tablespoon tomato purée or unsweetened ketchup.

    Chef's Tip: Cooking with Fennel. If you don't cook with fresh fennel, you should try it. It's one of my favorite vegetables. It has a lightly sweet licorice flavor which might sound funny, but it is delicious. I add it to many soups and stews along with the other standards of onion, carrot, and celery. It can be eaten raw, juiced, and braised as a side dish. Fresh fennel is a classic culinary ingredient in France, Italy, and other Mediterranean countries, and a terrific addition to lentil soup.

    How to Make Instant Pot Lentil Soup

    Chef's tip: For stovetop and slow-cooker methods, please see the recipe card.

    Vegetables sautéing in an Instant Pot before pressure cooking lentil soup.
    Step 1: Cook the vegetables with the saute function in olive oil.
    Vegetables, lentils, broth and herbs ready to cook for lentil soup.
    Step 2: Add the remaining ingredients, lock the lid on. Close the float valve, set for 15 minutes cook time and walk away.
    A pot of finished lentil soup ready to enjoy.
    Step 3: The Instant Pot beeps when the lentil soup is ready. Allow the Instant Pot to cool down for 15 minutes, then quick release the remaining pressure.

    Alternatively use the natural release method allowing the pressure cooker to come down on its own which takes approximately 30 minutes. I've made the soup with both pressure release methods.

    Chef's tip: Brighten the Flavor at the Finish. Lentils are earthy. A splash of red wine vinegar, lemon juice, or a few drops of balsamic at the end wakes everything up. Taste first, then add the acid in small amounts until the flavors pop. A drizzle of good olive oil right before serving adds silkiness.

    Serving Suggestions

    Lentil soup is satisfying on its own. For a bigger meal, add a simple side salad, warm cornbread with soft butter or whipped maple butter, or parmesan-garlic toast (use a good GF loaf if needed). For color and extra flavor, try:

    • Fresh chopped parsley - bright, garden-fresh finish.
    • Finely diced tomato - adds juicy color and freshness.
    • Grated Parmesan - savory richness and umami.
    • Crisp bacon crumbles - smoky, salty contrast.
    • Toasted pumpkin seeds (pepitas) - nutty crunch; great on soups and salads.
    • Good olive oil - A drizzle of good, fruity olive oil or herb-infused olive oil like rosemary or basil.

    Storage and Freezing

    Extra lentil soup keeps 4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. You can freeze lentil soup for up to 3 months. Portion into labeled, dated containers and cool completely before freezing. Souper Cubes work great for freezing in portions. For best texture, thaw overnight in the refrigerator.

    Reheating Lentil Soup
    Stovetop - put soup in a small pan over low heat, cover, and warm until hot, stirring occasionally.
    Microwave - use a microwave-safe bowl and heat on 70% power in short bursts, stirring between intervals until hot.

    Chef's note: Lentils continue to absorb liquid as they sit. If the soup seems thick after chilling or thawing, stir in a splash of hot water or broth to loosen, then adjust seasoning.

    A bowl of earthy, hearty  lentil soup with vegetables and fresh garnishes.

    Recipe FAQs

    What kind of lentils are best for soup?

    French green lentils are the best for soup. They hold their shape and have wonderful flavor. Green lentils and brown lentils are used for soups with different results. Red or yellow lentils are split lentils. They break down quickly and are best for purees and dishes like curries or Indian Dhal.

    Do you have to soak lentils before making soup?

    No, lentils do not need to be soaked like beans do. They cook more quickly. Be sure to rinse them before cooking (in a sieve or strainer) and sort out any broken ones. For soup, French green lentils hold their shape best and taste great.

    What can I serve with lentil soup?

    A tossed green salad makes a nice side dish for lentil soup with a tangy vinaigrette. A slice of artisan, crusty bread is also a nice textural accompaniment. When serving lentil soup, have fun with garnishes such as diced tomato, toasted pumpkin seeds, fresh chopped herbs that compliment the recipe, or a little sharp earthy cheese such as grated parmesan.

    More Soup Recipes

    For more hearty soup recipes try these: hearty favorite Ribollita Tuscan Vegetable Bean Soup, French Market Soup, Navy Bean with ham or Mexican Chicken Tomatillo.

    • Ribollita in a gray pot.
      Italian Ribollita Soup (Ribollita Toscana)
    • The deep colors of beef barley soup in a white bowl with herbs.
      Beef Barley Soup Recipe (Gluten-Free Option)
    • Navy bean soup with ham and vegetables.
      Instant Pot Navy Bean Soup Recipe (with ham)
    • chicken tomatillo soup
      Tomatillo Soup (with Chicken or Turkey)

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make this Lentil Soup, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Instant Pot Vegetable Lentil Soup | afoodcentriclife.com

    Lentil soup (Instant Pot or stove top)

    Sally Cameron
    Hearty and healthy, with Instant Pot and stove top instructions. It's loaded with vegetables and plant-based protein. Lentil soup freezes great if you have leftovers.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Pressure rise and release 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 55 minutes mins
    Course Soup
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 Yield 2 quarts
    Calories 272 kcal

    Equipment

    • 6 quart Instant Pot
    • OR 5 quart Dutch oven or large pot

    Ingredients
      

    Lentil Soup

    • 1 ½ tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 2 cups chopped onion 1 large
    • 1 ½ cups chopped carrot 3 large
    • 1 ½ cups chopped celery 3 large ribs
    • 1 cup chopped fennel 1 medium, bulb only
    • 3 large garlic cloves finely chopped
    • 1 ½ teaspoons dried herbs: Italian blend OR Herbs de Provence, or thyme
    • 1 bay leaf dried or fresh
    • 1 ½ tablespoons tomato paste
    • 5 cups low sodium chicken broth OR vegetable, turkey, or beef
    • 1 ½ cups French green lentils
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Optional Garnishes

    • ¼ cup chopped fresh parsley or cilantro
    • ¼ cup grated Parmesan cheese
    • ¼ cup toasted pumpkin seeds
    • drizzle of Balsamic or olive oil
    • sprinkle of red pepper flakes

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Instant Pot Method

    • Select "sauté" to pre-heat the Instant Pot. When the word "hot" appears on the display, add the olive oil, onion, carrot, celery, and fennel. Set the timer for 7 minutes and stir occasionally. Towards the end of the sauté cycle, stir in the garlic, dried herbs and tomato paste. 
    • Stir in the broth, lentils, salt and pepper, place the lid on and turn to lock. Turn the steam release handle on top of the lid closed. Select "pressure cook" and set the timer using the [+] button for 15 minutes. When the Instant Pot completes the warm up and cooking cycle it will beep. Use the natural release method for 15 minutes, then quick release remaining pressure by pressing "cancel" and turning the steam release handle on top of the lid to the "venting" position.  
    • If you are not in a hurry, leave the Instant Pot to come down all of the way naturally. Unlock, stir and serve. Leftovers keep well for up to four days and freeze well.

    Stove Top Method

    • Sauté all of the vegetables in oil until tender in a large pot like a Dutch oven, 5-7 minutes. Add the garlic, dried herbs and tomato paste, stir and cook 1-2 minutes to brown the tomato paste.
      Add the rest of the ingredients, bring just to a boil, turn heat to low, cover with a lid and simmer on low until the lentils are tender, about 30 minutes. Taste, and if the lentils are not tender enough simmer for a few additional minutes. Adjust seasoning with salt and pepper.

    Slow-cooker Method

    • If slow cooker has Sauté/Brown: sauté oil + onion, carrot, celery, fennel 5-7 min; add garlic, herbs, tomato paste 1 min. (If not, do this in a skillet.) Add broth, lentils, bay leaf, salt, pepper; stir.
      Cook LOW 6–7 hr or HIGH 3–4 hr, until lentils are tender but intact.
      Remove bay leaf. Adjust thickness (hot broth to loosen; uncover on HIGH 15–30 min to reduce, thicken). Season. Store 4 days or freeze 3 months.

    Notes

    Umami flavor boost option (choose 1) -  Parmesan rind, 1 teaspoon soy/tamari, or 1 teaspoon white miso (off heat). 
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 272kcalCarbohydrates: 41gProtein: 17gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 1gSodium: 244mgPotassium: 965mgFiber: 17gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 5777IUVitamin C: 15mgCalcium: 84mgIron: 5mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Baked Shrimp Scampi

    12/03/2017 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    baked lemon shrimp scampi

    Baked shrimp scampi is a dish I've made forever-it's easy, delicious, and has a fun twist! Tender shrimp bake in a lemon garlic butter sauce with white wine. Instead of traditional breadcrumbs, I've topped it with crunchy almonds and fresh parsley. A splash of Amaretto (optional) adds subtle depth, complementing the buttery richness. This recipe is quick enough for a weeknight yet elegant for a dinner party. In just 30 minutes, you'll have a foolproof, flavor-packed dish that makes its own luscious sauce

    Baked shrimp scampi in a white casserole dish with parsley and lemon.

    Lemony buttery baked shrimp scampi is one of my go-to shrimp recipes. After a short marinade at room temperature, bake for about 10 minutes and you've got a terrific shrimp dinner with built-in buttery sauce. Super easy!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • A easy recipe and fast to make.
    • Tastes like a dish a restaurant would serve.
    • Good for busy weeknights and entertaining too for rave reviews.
    • Marinate shrimp for 20 minutes and bake for 10.

    For another easy shrimp recipe, try Italian-style spicy Shrimp Fra Diavolo.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for shrimp scampi in bowls as prep work.
    • Shrimp: Look for wild shrimp versus farmed (see tips below), either thawed at the seafood counter or frozen to thaw ahead of time. Different sizes work, smaller ones bake faster. Go with 13-15, 16-20, or 21-25 size. This refers to the average number of shrimp per pound.
    • Butter: Use unsalted butter so you control the salt levels. If dairy sensitive, ghee works too, or use a plant butter.
    • Wine: Dry white wine, such as sauvignon blanc, pinot grigio, or chardonnay, use the little airline size bottles instead of opening a big bottle.
    • Almonds: Slivered almonds or sliced almonds.
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil, along with the butter for terrific rich flavor.
    • Amaretto liqueur: This is optional but it adds such nice flavor and complements the almonds. It makes it a little different and special than regular shrimp scampi.
    • Lemon: For the bright acidity and wonderful flavor, fresh lemon juice. Save the lemon zest for garnish or freeze for other recipes.
    • Garlic: Fresh cloves are best, but a tube of paste or puree works well too.
    • Fresh herbs: Use fresh parsley for garden flavor and color.

    Please see recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's Tip: When choosing the best shrimp for baked shrimp scampi, use either fresh or frozen shrimp. If shrimp are frozen, thaw overnight in a sealed plastic bag or a covered flat baking dish. To quick-thaw frozen shrimp in a hurry, seal frozen shrimp in a plastic bag and press out the air. Place the bag in cold water, changing the water every 30 minutes. Depending on the size, shrimp should thaw in an hour or less. Shrimp are highly perishable, so cook them within 24 hours of purchase or thawing.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Instead of the Amaretto make it a white wine sauce with all wine.
    • If you don't like almonds, leave them out.
    • If omitting the Amaretto, use ¼-1/2 teaspoon of almond extract to replace the almond flavor.
    • For shrimp scampi without wine, try unsalted vegetable broth or ver jus (unfermented pressed grape juice).
    • Want a little savory finish? Sprinkle with freshly grated parmesan cheese. Italian cooks would never do this but it's good!

    Chef's Tip: No need to buy a big bottle for a small amount of wine, spirits, or liqueurs to cook with. Buy the little airline size at the grocery or liquor store. 

    Recipe Instructions

    If you are serving baked shrimp scampi with pasta, get your pasta water started, adding a couple teaspoons salt.

    Step 1: Make the marinade

    Melt the butter then stir in lemon juice, white wine, olive oil, almonds, garlic and parsley to create a savory marinade for shrimp. Adding almond flavored Amaretto liqueur is a flavorful option if you like to cook with spirits.

    Raw shrimp on a Raw shrimp on a baking tray after cleaninbg.

    Step 2: Clean and devein the shrimp

    With your fingers, peel off the shell and legs leaving the last tail segment intact. With a sharp paring knife, gently slice along the curved back of the shrimp. Remove any veins (its the digestive tract) by rinsing under cool water. Set cleaned shrimp aside on paper towels to dry.

    Raw shrimp marinating in a white casserole dish before baking, with almonds and herbs.

    Step 3: Marinate the shrimp, then bake

    Arrange the shrimp in a single layer in a baking dish or casserole dish and pour the butter mixture over the top. Allow the shrimp to marinate for 20-30 minutes. Pre-heat the oven to 400°F while you are waiting. Cooking times depends on the size of the shrimp. Bake until shrimp turn pink, about 10 minutes.

    If you have really large jumbo shrimp you may need to turn them while baking so sides are evenly baked, another minute or two.

    Serving Suggestions

    Toss a green salad with easy homemade Italian dressing while shrimp are baking. Serve baked shrimp scampi over rice, angel hair pasta or spaghetti noodles (regular or gluten-free), zucchini noodles, cauliflower rice, or even spaghetti squash noodles.

    Try this cauliflower rice with parmesan and herbs. It's a great option with this easy shrimp scampi recipe. Spoon the sauce over each dish before serving.

    • Give the top a sprinkle of red pepper flakes for a kick or black pepper.
    • Serve with a lemon wedge for more lemon flavor.
    • Add a little more chopped parsley for the color.
    • Garlic bread or garlic toast is another nice addition.

    Need a little dessert for company? Something lemony is just the answer. Try this homemade lemon ice cream, or a lemon olive oil cake.

    Tips for Buying Shrimp

    If time is short, purchase cleaned and deveined shrimp. For more information on buying shrimp, check out this Sustainable Shrimp Guide from Seafood Watch.

    Choose wild shrimp with the shell on and clean them yourself for the best flavor and texture. Read this article about farmed shrimp and you will know why I only buy wild.

    Lemony shrimp scampi served over zucchini noodles in a bowl.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make baked shrimp scampi ahead of time?

    Shrimp scampi is not a dish you can make ahead of time, but it is so easy you don't have to. To save time, be sure your shrimp are cleaned and ready to go, and make the marinade. With your prep work done, the dish goes quickly as shrimp bakes fast, in about 10 minutes. No time to marinate the shrimp? Skip it and just bake. It's still terrific. Have it ready in about 10 minutes.

    Do I need to devein the shrimp?

    It is best to devein shrimp as it removes the digestive tract, which can be gritty (black) or gooey (orange). There are two ways to devein shrimp. One is to expose the back up by gently slicing along the curved back with a paring knife just enough to remove the vein and pull it out. The second way is insert a tooth pick at the second joint from the tail end a little way into the shrimp flesh and lift. This partially pulls out the vein, which you can completely pull out.

    How do I know when the shrimp are cooked

    Shrimp tell you when they are done by their color and texture change. They turn from translucent gray or blue to an opaque white and pink. When done, shrimp will be firm but not hard. Don't over cook them. They cook quickly so keep and eye on them. If they are very large shrimp, you may need to turn them over once while cooking so they are pink on both sides and evenly cooked.

    More Shrimp Recipes

    Shrimp is easy to cook in a variety of ways, no wonder it's the best-selling seafood in America. Try some of these additional shrimp recipes. If you are grilling shrimp, here are 25 terrific side dishes for serving with grilled shrimp.

    • grilled shrimp and avocado bowls
      Grilled Shrimp Salad with Raspberry Vinaigrette
    • spicy grilled shrimp tacos
      Baja Shrimp Tacos (Grill or Stovetop)
    • shrimp fra diavolo
      Spicy Shrimp and Pasta (Shrimp Fra Diavolo)
    • Thai shrimp soup called Tom Yum in bowls with shrimp, jalapenos, cilantro, and limes.
      Shrimp Tom Yum Soup

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please comment, and let me know, I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    baked lemon shrimp scampi

    Lemon Garlic Shrimp Scampi

    Sally Cameron
    This dish is easy enough for any cook and elegant enough for company. Serve over lemon-herbed rice, zucchini noodles, spaghetti squash or pasta. Meyer lemons work great if you can find them. If not, regular lemons are fine. 
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Marinate time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 40 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Servings 4
    Calories 400 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large flat baking dish or casserole

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ pounds large shrimp peeled and deveined
    • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter ghee or plant-based butter
    • ½ cup dry white wine
    • ⅓ cup slivered almonds or sliced almonds
    • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 2-3 tablespoons Amaretto liqueur optional
    • 1 large lemon juiced
    • 2 large garlic cloves chopped fine
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt to taste
    • ⅛ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1 tablespoons fresh chopped Italian parsley plus extra for garnish if desired

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Prep shrimp

    • Peel and devein shrimp if not already done. Peel off legs and shell sections up to the tail, leaving the tail section on. It makes for nice presentation and a little handle. On the outward curved side of the shrimp, cut a shallow slit with a sharp paring knife and gently rinse any debris with cold water. Dry shrimp on paper towels. 

    Make marinade

    • Melt butter in a large glass microwave-proof measuring cup, then stir in wine, almonds, olive oil, liqueur (if using), lemon juice, garlic, salt, pepper, and parsley. Arrange shrimp in a single, flat layer in a large glass or ceramic  baking dish. Pour butter mixture over the top of the shrimp. Marinate shrimp for 20-30 minutes at room temperature.

    Bake shrimp

    • Pre-heat oven to 400°F degrees. Place the shrimp in the oven and bake just until shrimp turn pink, about 10 minutes, depending on the shrimp size and your oven. 
      Note - If you're using big jumbo shrimp, you may need to turn them once half way through for even baking.
    • Remove shrimp from the oven. Serve over rice, pasta noodles, or zucchini noodles with the sauce spooned over the top. Sprinkle with more fresh chopped parsley if desired.

    Notes

    For white wine and Amaretto, buy the airline sized bottles instead of big bottles.

    Substitutions and Variations

      • Try a splash of cognac instead of the amaretto or simply use all white wine.
      • If you don't like almonds, leave them out and skip the amaretto.
      • If omitting the amaretto, use ¼-1/2 teaspoon of almond extract to replace the almond flavor.
      • For no scampi without wine, try unsalted vegetable broth or ver jus (unfermented pressed grape juice).
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 400kcalCarbohydrates: 10gProtein: 26gFat: 25gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 13gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 237mgSodium: 1114mgPotassium: 340mgFiber: 2gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 744IUVitamin C: 17mgCalcium: 134mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Pasta Sauce With Tomato Sauce

    12/19/2022 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Pot full of homemade marinara.

    With just a few pantry staples, you can make this easy pasta sauce with tomato sauce in about 30 minutes. Perfect over pasta, chicken, or as a base for countless meals, it's a simple way to a delicious dinner. Plus, it freezes beautifully-so you'll always have a batch ready for busy weeknights. Skip the jar and make your own-it's fresher, more flavorful, and budget-friendly.

    Finished homemade tomato marinara in a pot with basil leaves.

    A friend recently commented that the famous Italian restaurant jarred marinara sauce her kids liked was so expensive. I served her some of my homemade pasta sauce with tomato sauce and she loved it. Plus, it can be made for less than half of the cost of the stuff she's been buying. Store bought sauces are fine in a pinch, but skip the jars and make your own marinara sauce for great taste and savings.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Pasta Sauce With Tomato Sauce

    • Basic pantry items - Just tomato sauce, crushed tomatoes, and a few other basics.
    • Tasty and easy - Call it spaghetti sauce, pasta sauce, simple tomato sauce, or marinara. A staple in the kitchen. 
    • Freezes great - Make ahead and freeze it in batches for fast meals.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Here are the ingredients for my go-to homemade pasta sauce. See recipe card for all ingredients and quantities.

    Marinara sauce ingredients labeled.
    • Tomato sauce - Use plain canned or jarred tomato sauce. You can also use the boxes of Pomi passata puree or their tomato sauce.
    • Crushed tomatoes - Starting with a high-quality crushed tomatoes makes this pasta sauce quick. See my tomato notes below.
    • Oil - use extra virgin olive oil to saute the onion and garlic in for great flavor and healthy fat.
    • Onion - onion gives flavor depth and a base for the sauce. A foundational ingredient for soups, stews, sauces and many recipes.
    • Garlic - Fresh garlic is best and a head keeps in a cool pantry for some time. You can use the peeled refrigerated cloves but be sure they are fresh.
    • Herbs - Dried herbs makes this easy. Use plain dried basil or a dried Italian seasoning blend. A little fresh basil or oregano in addition to dried herbs for more flavor at the end is niece too, if you have them.
    • Spices (optional) - Ground anise seed or ground fennel seed make a terrific and unexpected flavor addition to this pasta sauce recipe. Optional but delicious.
    • Wine (optional) - A little dry red or dry white wine amplifies flavors.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, black pepper, and red pepper.

    Chef's Tip on tomatoes - Real San Marzano tomatoes are identified by the certified D.O.P. label on the can. They may cost a little more than regular tomatoes, but many cooks believe they're worth it for their balanced, naturally sweet flavor (and no additives, like calcium chloride). My favorite brands are Cento San Marzano (D.O.P.) and Bianco DiNapoli (California-grown). Mutti is also a solid choice, as is Pomi.

    Substitutions and Variations

    Here's ways to change up homemade pasta sauce:

    • Make it a smooth sauce - puree until smooth in a blender, food processor or with an immersion blender
    • Make it a meat sauce - add a couple of links of pre-cooked sausage ground fine in a food processor or chopped fine with a chef's knife, or use browned ground beef. Cooked ground bison works well too.
    • Alcohol-free - leave out the wine.
    • Only have whole tomatoes - Strain the liquid from the can and reserve in a bowl. Over the sink or a bowl (it's messy), split the tomatoes with your fingers and remove seeds, then briefly puree with liquid in a blender, food processor, or chop by hand. Don't puree smooth. Leave some texture. This works in place of crushed tomatoes. 

    How to Make Pasta Sauce with Tomato Sauce

    This homemade pasta sauce recipe is simple in both ingredients and instruction. Use a heavy pot like a Dutch oven as they conduct heat evenly and cook over lower temperatures efficiently.

    Cooking onions and garlic in a Dutch oven.
    Step 1: Chop onions and cook with garlic in olive oil until soft.
    Onion and herbs cooking in a Dutch oven.
    Step 2: Add dried herbs and stir into the moist onions and garlic so the herbs rehydrate and release their flavors.
    Tomato marinara simmering with red wine in a pot.
    Step 3: Stir in the crushed tomatoes, tomato sauce, and wine. Turn heat up a bit and bring the sauce to bubbling, then turn it down to a low simmer, covered, for about 20 minutes.

    Lastly, taste the sauce. It has too much acidity for you, add a little sugar or neutral flavored sweetener like monk fruit. It's ready to serve, refrigerate and used with 5 days, or cooled and frozen.

    Chef's tip on cooking with wine: I use the mini bottles of wine to cook with and save the full-sized bottles for dinner. They are great to keep in the pantry for adding a little to this marinara recipe or for deglazing a pan for a sauce, and they are inexpensive. The cooking rule is use one you would drink, not "cooking wines". Don't add it at the end. It needs to simmer with the sauce. 

    Marinara sauce in a jar with basil.

    Serving Suggestions

    • Over a big bowl of pasta topped with fresh herbs and parmesan cheese
    • For making Chicken Parmesan
    • Use it as a dipping sauce
    • As a pizza sauce
    • Make spicy stovetop shrimp, Italian style
    • Simmer Italian meatballs in it
    A white platter of chicken parmesan with red sauce and sprinkles of cheese.

    Storing and Freezing Pasta Sauce

    The yield for this recipe is about 5 cups of pasta sauce. Homemade sauce keeps in the refrigerator in an airtight container for 5 days or freezes for 2-3 months.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why do chefs use San Marzano tomatoes?

    Because they have lower acidity (so more sweetness), less seeds, thicker flesh, and terrific taste. They can cost more, so you decide if they are worth it. There are delicious tomatoes from other brands that are not San Marzano. See my Chef's tip in the post.

    How do you make tomato sauce taste better for pasta?

    Start with good-quality tomatoes, then add garlic, olive oil, herbs, and a pinch of salt. A splash of wine, a pat of butter, or a sprinkle of Parmesan at the end adds extra depth.

    What herbs go in pasta sauce?

    Classic choices include basil, oregano, parsley, and thyme. You can use one or a mix, depending on the flavor you like

    What can I add to tomato sauce for more flavor?

    Try sautéed garlic or onion, fresh or dried herbs, red pepper flakes, a splash of wine, or a little butter at the end. Even small additions can make a big difference.

    More Tomato Sauce Recipes

    Love pasta sauce? Us too. And here are a few more delicious ideas for tomato-based sauces.

    • roasted tomato marinara
      The Best Roasted Tomato Sauce
    • bison bolognese with pasta
      Bison Bolognese(Ground Bison Meat Sauce)
    • mushroom marinara pasta sauce
      Mushroom Tomato Sauce
    • Glass jar of pesto rosso, red pesto, ready to enjoy.
      Sun-Dried Tomato Pesto (Pesto Rosso)

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make pasta sauce with tomato sauce, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I love hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    Pot full of homemade marinara.

    Pasta Sauce with Tomato Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Homemade marinara is easy to make from a few staples in your pantry in about 30 minutes. It's better and healthier than most jarred brands and it freeze well. Yield is about 5 cups of marinara.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Sauce
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Servings 10 ½ cup portions
    Calories 75 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large pot or Dutch Oven 4-5 quarts

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 cup finely chopped onion
    • 3 large garlic cloves minced, finely chopped
    • 1 tablespoon dried basil or Italian herb blend
    • 1 ½ teaspoons ground anise seed or fennel seed
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • ¼ teaspoon red pepper more or less to your heat preferences
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • 28 ounces can crushed tomatoes
    • 15 ounces can tomato sauce
    • ¼ cup red wine optional, use the airline size bottles
    • 1 handful fresh chopped basil leaves optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Cook the onion, garlic, spices, herbs

    • Heat olive oil in a medium pot over medium low heat and add onion. Cook until onion is soft and translucent. Add garlic, dried herbs, ground anise seed, black pepper, red pepper, salt, and cook another 2 minutes to allow flavors to blend.

    Add tomatoes and simmer

    • Add crushed tomatoes and sauce, and wine if using. Cover and simmer sauce for 20 minutes until flavors are blended. For a smoother sauce, puree briefly in blender if desired.
      If using fresh chopped basil leaves, stir in at the end.

    Notes

    About anise seed and fennel seed:
    Fennel seed is milder and less sweet while anise seed has a little more potent and sweeter flavor of licorice. Use one or both. They are two different plants. Optional but delicious!
    They come in both ground and whole forms. Whole spices/herbs stay fresher longer than pre-ground. Pre-ground are more convenient to use. Whole need to be ground before using in cooking. Use an inexpensive coffee grinder that you save for just herbs and spice. 
    How to use:
    Use marinara for pasta, chicken, shrimp, fish, meatballs, and many dishes.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 75kcalCarbohydrates: 10gProtein: 2gFat: 3gSaturated Fat: 0.5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gSodium: 366mgPotassium: 411mgFiber: 3gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 373IUVitamin C: 12mgCalcium: 52mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy French Onion Soup Recipe

    12/19/2011 by Sally Cameron 9 Comments

    A white bowl of rich French onion soup with a cheesy crouton on top and sprinkle of fresh herbs.

    Learn how to make restaurant quality French onion soup at home with my easy French onion soup recipe. Onions slowly caramelize to become meltingly tender and sweet, infusing the broth with rich, savory flavors. Golden cheesy croutons crown the top. It's surprisingly easy to make with just a few simple ingredients. Customize it with different broths and cheeses to meet your needs. It's classic, comforting, indulgent simplicity.

    Bowls of rich brown French soup topped with cheesy golden croutons.

    With that first bite, you'll understand why French onion soup is so beloved. Making it at home takes a little patience to slowly caramelize and coax the onions to perfection but it's worth it. It's amazing how incredible rich broth, humble onions, and crispy cheesy croutons can taste.

    Why You'll Love Easy French Onion Soup

    • Simple, rich flavors.
    • Substitutions for vegetarian and vegan diners.
    • Options for onions and cheese.
    • Make it up to 3 days ahead or freeze.

    Love the flavor of French onion soup? Try my French onion soup chicken!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Onions: See notes below, use yellow, brown or sweet onions for the best flavor.
    • Fat: Both butter and olive oil work for this soup and the combination tastes delicious. Another option is plant-based butter for dairy-free.
    • Broth: Beef broth is the classic choice, but there are excellent substitutions (see below). Buy good broth or use homemade for the best flavor. Skip stuff like bullion cubes and pastes. Choose low or no sodium broth to control the sodium level. Check out the freezer section for broths, not just cans or boxes. The better the broth, the better the soup.
    • Garlic: The flavor of garlic and onions is classic, not just in this soup but in many recipes. Use fresh and chop it fine or use a microplane zester.
    • Herbs: You need thyme and bay leaf. Parsley is for garnish if desired.
    • Deglazing liquid: Use a dry white wine, dry sherry, or a dry red wine. If you don't cook with wine, use a little more broth or water.
    • Bread: Use your favorite bread for the cheesy croutons. A slightly stale French baguette is traditional or sliced French bread, GF or regular.
    • Cheese: The best cheese for French onion soup is classic Gruyere but I've listed options in the FAQ section, plus a little parmesan for the cheesy croutons.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • To substitute dried thyme for fresh, use ⅓ the amount of dried, adding it half way through cooking the onions so it has a chance to rehydrate.
    • If you're out of thyme, a good substitute is oregano.
    • What broths can I use? Instead of beef broth you can use chicken broth or turkey broth for delicious French onion soup. In the photos, I used my homemade turkey broth! It's deep, dark, and delicious.

    The Best Onions for French Onion Soup

    A gray dutch oven filled with thinly sliced white onions for soup.

    Let's talk onions! Onions are flavor powerhouses in the kitchen, sweet, savory and pungent all at the same time. What are the best onions for French onion soup? Although yellow onions are traditional you have options.

    • Yellow onions (aka brown onions) are your standard onions with golden-brownish papery skins and strong flavor that mellows with cooking.
    • Spanish onions are a milder relative to yellow onions.
    • White onions are similar to yellow onions but milder and a bit sweeter with a white papery skin.
    • Sweet onions have a higher sugar content and less sulfur, which is why you cry less when cutting them. They caramelize well and have yellow or light brown papery skin and higher water content (juicier). Varieties are seasonal, including Walla Walla, Maui, Oso Sweet, Mayan Sweet, Texas Sweets, and Vidalia.

    How to Make This Easy French Onion Soup

    Slicing onions for french onion chicken on a white cutting board.

    Cut onions in half stem to root and slice crosswise into ¼" half rounds. For a rich flavor, I use both olive oil and butter to cook the onions but you can use all butter (regular or plant-based) or all olive oil if you prefer.

    Cook the sliced onions (called caramelizing) over medium-low heat in a heavy pot like a Dutch Oven. When deeply browned and soft, deglaze with white wine (or use water or broth). Watch your heat, don't rush and burn the onions. The flavor won't be as good (and might be bitter). It takes about 45 minutes. The onions become so tender they almost melt in your mouth. I know it seems like a long time, but this coaxes the best flavors out of the onions. It's worth the wait. Patience is a virtue when caramelizing onions.

    When onions are done, add the broth, thyme sprigs, and bay leaf and simmer for 15 minutes to blend the flavors. Remove the herbs and it's ready to serve.

    While the onions are cooking, make the cheesy croutons.

    A large pot full of richly browned caramelized onions for onion soup.

    Broil cheese topped bread (croutons) until golden and bubbly. Make them with your bread of choice. I use gluten-free sourdough but you can use baguette slices or other artisan bread. Keep warm in the oven until serving. Sprinkle with fresh chopped parsley for garnish if desired.

    Chef's note: Traditionally French onion soup is served with a cheese covered top that has been broiled and melts over the edges of the bowl, but I prefer not to do this. First, you need to have the right bowls that are broiler safe. Second, cleaning off the cheese melted all over the bowl is messy. I love the croutons route. Delicious, no wasted cheese, and easier clean up, plus you can make extra cheesy croutons.

    Two white bowls of golden French onion soup with crusty cheesy croutons and fresh thyme.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve French onion soup piping hot topped with homemade cheesy croutons and an extra sprinkle of grated Parmesan cheese. You might want to make extra cheesy croutons because they are addictive, delicious soaked in the soup's rich broth.

    Use French onion soup as a starter before a bigger meal, or use it as part of a lighter meal with a green salad on the side. An entree salad with protein works well too.

    Storage

    Can I freeze this soup? Yes, freeze French onion without the bread and cheese croutons and make those fresh. Enjoy within 3 months.Remember to label and date!

    Recipe FAQs

    What makes French onion soup French?

    It was the French who took the humble onion (peasant food) and elevated it to star status creating this much-loved recipe. 

    What if I can't eat cow's milk cheese?

    Try a raw hard goat milk cheddar cheese.

    What if I can't find Gruyere cheese?

    Use Swiss cheese, Mozzarella, Emmenthaler, Fontina, or Gouda or a flavorful cheese that melts well.

    Can I make French onion soup ahead of time?

    French onion soup is easily made up to 3 days ahead of time. Make the soup base (broth and onions) and store it in an airtight container. When ready to serve, re-heat the soup over low heat with a lid. While soup is heating, make the cheesy croutons. Serve when hot.

    More Soup Recipes

    For more soup recipes, try one of these or check the soup category for more options.

    • roasted red pepper soup
      Roasted Red Pepper Soup (sheet pan recipe)
    • A bowl of chicken rice soup with herbs in a white bowl.
      Easy Instant Pot Chicken Rice Soup Recipe
    • The deep colors of beef barley soup in a white bowl with herbs.
      Beef Barley Soup Recipe (Gluten-Free Option)
    • Close up of Mexican chicken soup in a white bowl.
      Mexican Chicken Tortilla Soup Recipe

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this French Onion Soup, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers. If you had an issue with it, let me help you figure it out.

    📖 Recipe

    French onion soup with cheesy croutons

    Easy French Onion Soup Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    With slow cooking humble onions are transformed into a delicious classic French onion soup. Use yellow, white, brown or sweet onions. Top with cheesy croutons to serve.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr
    Course Soup
    Cuisine French
    Servings 4 Yield 7 cups
    Calories 487 kcal

    Equipment

    • 5 ½ quart Dutch oven or heavy pot

    Ingredients
      

    French Onion Soup

    • 3 pounds onions
    • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter or all olive oil
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil or all butter
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ½ cup dry white wine or dry sherry, red wine, water, or broth
    • 3 sprigs fresh thyme or ½ teaspoon dried thyme
    • 1 bay leaf
    • 5 cups low sodium broth beef, chicken, turkey or vegetable
    • 1 teaspoon Worcestershire optional

    Cheesy Croutons

    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • ½ teaspoon granulated or powdered garlic
    • 4-6 slices artisan bread or baguette regular or gluten-free
    • ½ cup grated Gruyere cheese and ounce or two
    • 2-3 tablespoons grated Parmesan cheese

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Slice and cook onions

    • Cut onions in half through the stem end, peel and slice into ¼"thick half rounds.
      In a large heavy pot (5 ½ quart Dutch oven), melt the butter and olive oil over medium-low heat. Add the onions and allow them to cook until soft and deeply golden brown (caramelized) about 45 minutes, stirring occasionally. Watch the onions and if browning too quickly turn your heat down. Don't rush this step.
    • When onions are a rich golden brown, de-glaze the pan with the wine, scraping up and tasty bits on the bottom of the pan.
      Cook until wine is reduced by half. Add the salt, thyme and bay leaf. Turn the heat up a bit and add the broth. Simmer on low until flavors are blended and soup is hot, about 15 minutes.
      While soup is finishing, make the croutons.

    Make cheesy croutons

    • Melt the olive oil, butter, and garlic together in the microwave using low power. When its all melted and smooth, use it to brush on the bread before broiling (optional step).
    • Trim the bread so pieces fit inside the bowl. Turn on the broiler and set the rack to the second level down from the top (not too close). Line a baking sheet with foil. Lightly brush the bread with the melted garlic butter blend. Arrange grated cheese on top of the bread and broil until golden and bubbly. Keep warm until serving time.

    Finish the soup and serve

    • When soup and croutons are ready, stir in the Worcestershire sauce and top with the cheesy croutons. Sprinkle with fresh parsley leaves as garnish if desired.

    Notes

    Chef's Tip - Tie your thyme sprigs together with kitchen twine to make it easier to remove from the pot. 
    For other cheese options to the Gruyere, try Swiss cheese, Mozzarella, Emmenthaler, Fontina, or Gouda or a flavorful cheese that melts well.
    If serving the soup at a later time, wait until just before serving to make the cheesy croutons.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 487kcalCarbohydrates: 52gProtein: 21gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 47mgSodium: 659mgPotassium: 817mgFiber: 7gSugar: 18gVitamin A: 499IUVitamin C: 27mgCalcium: 451mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Pomegranate Guacamole

    09/23/2014 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Pomegranate avocado quacamole

    For the love of avocados, here is a different guacamole you've got to try. Pomegranate guacamole with lime, cilantro and shallot. So incredibly good and good for you. Look at the colors! Sort of a fall guacamole, now that pomegranates are back in season. Enjoy it throughout the year as pomegranate seeds are now almost available year round. If you love guacamole, try this beautiful twist with pomegranate seeds.

    Avocado and Pomegranate Guacamole | AFoodCentricLife.com
    Pomegranate avocado guacamole in a wood bowl.

    One of my great weaknesses is guacamole and chips. There. I've confessed. At least it's good for you (except the chips). Last night before dinner we were really hungry and in need of a snack to tide us over. With a bowl of this in the fridge and tortilla chips, we polished off half the bowl. It's hard to stop eating. My husband said, "put it away"! The creamy texture and buttery flavor of avocados are amazing against the tart-sweet pomegranates seeds and the colors are beautiful.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    • 2 ripe avocados
    • ½ cup pomegranate seeds arils
    • 1-2 tablespoons fresh chopped cilantro leaves
    • 2 teaspoons finely chopped shallot or onion
    • 1-2 tablespoons fresh lime juice
    • Salt and pepper to taste

    Buying Avocados

    When buying avocados, I like them best when they just yield under gentle pressure when squeezed. Perfect avocados peel easily. I don't buy them too soft.

    Handling Avocados

    If you grew up eating avocados, you probably know how to handle them. If you struggle with them, here is how to open one. Place a sharp, heavy knife into the side of the avocado at mid-point (top to bottom) until you hit the seed, the rotate the blade around the avocado from top to bottom. Hold avocado in both hands and gently twist in opposite directions. The avocado should come cleanly apart.

    Place the half with the seed on the cutting board, seed facing up. Stick the edge of the knife blade securely into the seed and twist the knife. The seed should come right out. To get the seed off the knife safely, grab it with a paper towel. Peel and dice the avocado.

    Avocados | AFoodCentricLife.com

    How to Open a Pomegranate

    With deep red to pinkish leathery skin, the apple-shaped pomegranate may look difficult to open but it's really not. The under water method is easy. Cut a little off the top and bottom, score the vertical ridges on the outside with a paring knife, then break the pomegranate open in a large bowl of water.

    Next, loosen the sections and free the seeds from the white membrane with your fingers. Discard the membrane and then drain off the ruby translucent seeds. Beware of trying this in a white top of any kind. You might end up with a pink polka dotted top.

    Pomegranate Shortcut

    The easy way to use pomegranate seeds (also called arils) is to buy them ready to go in the refrigerated section of many produce departments. It's just so handy to grab a package, but sometimes they are not as fresh. I find they also spoil more quickly than when you do it yourself.

    pomegranates | AFoodcentricLife.com

    Instructions

    • Open, seed, and dice the avocados (two ways)
      • Either draw a grid in the avocado half with a small knife and scoop out the diced flesh, or skin the avocado and dice the flesh on a cutting board
    • Make your guacamole, either creamy or chunky (see note below)
      • Add lime juice, shallot or onion, plus salt and pepper
    • Open and seed the pomegranate or open the package
    • Add both to a bowl and enjoy. Sprinkle with cilantro for garnish or not

    Creamy or Chunky

    I left my avocados diced for this photo. If you prefer a creamier guacamole you can mash the diced avocado with a fork or do it the traditional way in a mortar and pestle (or the Mexican version called a molcajete) before you add the pomegranate seeds, lime, shallot and seasoning.

    To Serve

    Serve with your favorite chips, either corn or cassava for grain-free. For a low-carb option, slice a cucumber thin on an angle and make fresh cucumber "chips", or serve with assorted raw veggies.

    Next time you need a game day snack, try this fall avocado pomegranate guacamole.

    Related Recipes

    For another delicious recipe using pomegranate try this pomegranate spinach salad.

    For 20 ideas on what to do with pomegranate seeds,

    📖 Recipe

    pomegranate seeds | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Pomegranate Avocado Guacamole

    Sally Cameron
    Creamy, buttery textured, tart and sweet all at the same time. This guacamole is a delicious twist for fall when pomegranates are in season. Try it as an afternoon snack or while watching your favorite game.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6
    Calories 120 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 ripe avocados
    • ½ cup pomegranate seeds arils
    • 1-2 tablespoons fresh chopped cilantro leaves
    • 2 teaspoons finely chopped shallot or onion
    • 1-2 tablespoons fresh lime juice
    • Salt and pepper to taste

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Slice, remove seed, peel and dice the avocado. Place diced avocado in a medium bowl. Add the pomegranate seeds, cilantro, shallot or onion, lime juice, salt and pepper and gently stir together. For a creamier guacamole, add the diced pieces to a bowl or mortar and pestle. Mash avocado as much as you prefer, then add the rest of the ingredients.

    Notes

    Serving ideas: Serve with corn chips or cucumber slices sliced long on the diagonal to work like a chip for dipping. You can even dollop the guacamole into small lettuce cups.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 120kcalCarbohydrates: 9gProtein: 2gFat: 10gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gSodium: 5mgPotassium: 363mgFiber: 5gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 104IUVitamin C: 9mgCalcium: 10mgIron: 0.4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Gluten Free Thanksgiving Stuffing Recipe

    11/11/2022 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    Classic herbed bread stuffing in white casserole ready to serve.

    This gluten-free Thanksgiving stuffing tastes just like the classic-crispy on top, tender in the center, and full of savory holiday flavor. Skip the boxed mixes and make it from scratch with homemade dried bread cubes, aromatic vegetables, broth or milk, egg, and herbs. No one will ever guess it's gluten-free. If you need a reliable gluten-free stuffing recipe for your Thanksgiving table, I'll show you how step-by-step.

    Golden-topped baked Thanksgiving stuffing in a casserole dish.

    Cooking stuffing in its own pan-not inside the turkey-means faster turkey roasting, better food safety, and more control over texture, and it still has incredible flavor. My family's original Thanksgiving stuffing recipe used wheat bread, but it works beautifully with good gluten-free bread too. No one at the table will guess this is gluten-free Thanksgiving stuffing, they will just enjoy and ask for a second helping.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Gluten-Free Thanksgiving Stuffing

    • Classic flavor, gluten-free - All the cozy, herby Thanksgiving stuffing vibes you love, without the gluten-but no one at the table will know unless you tell them.
    • No boxes, no bags. Made completely from scratch with real ingredients, so you control the flavor, texture, and quality.
    • Perfectly cooked every time. Baked in its own pan (not in the turkey) for better food safety and better texture-crispy on top, tender in the middle.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Stuffing or dressing? The terms are interchangeable. I've gone into a lot of detail so anyone can make this, step-by-step. It's all from scratch.

    GF Thanksgiving stuffing ingredients on the counter.
    • Gluten-free bread - Since stuffing is all about the bread, good fresh bread is essential. The best I've found is from Canyon Bakehouse. What type of bread? I use their Mountain White bread or the Heritage Honey style. If you can't find it, choose the best gluten-free sandwich bread possible. Gluten-free sourdough is good too.
    • Leek - Related to onions, garlic, and shallots, leek gives another layer of depth of flavor and mild, sweet oniony taste. Use the white and light green parts only and discard the tough dark green tops.
    • Fennel - Provides a lightly sweet anise (licorice) flavor when cooked. It has a wonderful taste, trust me!
    • Celery - The base for so many recipes and an essential ingredient.
    • Onion - Use sweet, yellow or brown onions. All work. Another essential stuffing component for great flavor and moisture.
    • Garlic - For this recipe it's worth chopping fresh garlic cloves.
    • Fat - Use either unsalted butter, ghee, or olive oil. An oil and butter combo is nice. Do not use vegetable oil.
    • Liquid - Use dairy milk, chicken broth or bone broth, or turkey broth.
    • Egg - Gives moisture, adds richness, and helps stuffing hold together.
    • Herbs: Use fresh herbs or dried, or a combination. Buy fresh parsley (Italian parsley) for fresh garden flavor and herbal balance. Thyme is a must-have herb for stuffing, as well as sage. Use ⅓ the amount of dried for fresh. Some people prefer a blend called poultry seasoning. If you do that, I suggest using a little fresh too, especially parsley.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, including salt and ground black pepper. See photos below for how to prep leek and fennel if you are unfamiliar with them.

    Chef's Tip: While you're buying groceries for stuffing, pick up turkey pieces to make homemade turkey broth for using in soups and sides. You can use it in gluten-free Thanksgiving stuffing in place of milk, and for the best turkey gravy.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Add finely chopped or ground cooked sausage, about 8-12 ounces.
    • If you like cheese, add grated Parmesan cheese, either to the mix before baking or over the top for browning.
    • This recipe works for wheat bread as well.
    • For for a vegan option, use vegetable broth or almond milk.
    • For dairy-free or vegan, choose a vegan butter such as Miyoko's Creamery (very tasty).
    • For egg-free or vegan, skip the egg. It will still taste great.

    If you need gluten-free or dairy-free recipes ideas for Thanksgiving, check out this Thanksgiving recipe roundup.

    How to Make Gluten-Free Thanksgiving Stuffing

    Start by drying the bread. Why dry the bread? Drying the bread allows it to soak up all of the wonderful flavors while cooking. Making your own is far superior to a gluten-free stuffing mix from a box or bag, and so easy.

    Cutting bread cubes for stuffing on a cutting board.

    Step 1: Start by cutting then drying the bread cubes either on the counter overnight or in the oven. See details in the recipe card for each method.

    Chopped onion, celery, and fennel in a frying pan to saute for Thanksgiving stuffing.
    1. In a 12" frying pan over medium heat. add the butter until melted. Add the leek, fennel, celery and onion.
    Vegetables sauted soft for herbed turkey dressing.
    1. Cook, stirring occasionally, until soft and translucent but still moist, 12-13 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook 1 more minute.
    Mixing bowl with bread, herbs, and vegetables being mixed for Thanksgiving stuffing.
    1. Add vegetables to a large mixing bowl. Stir in the dried bread cubes, herbs, salt and pepper. Whisk together ½ cup of milk or broth and and egg.
    Herbed bread stuffing in a white square casserole for baking.
    1. Place stuffing in an oiled or buttered large baking dish (9″ x 9″). Cover with aluminum foil and bake until hot and golden, 30 minutes. Remove the foil and bake another 15-20 minutes for a golden brown top.
    Classic herbed bread stuffing in white casserole ready to serve.

    Drying Bread for Bread Stuffing: Two Methods

    First cut bread cubes. Lay slices of bread out on a cutting board and trim off the crusts and discard along with the heels. Trim the slices into ¾-inch bread cubes.

    Cut bread cubes drying on baking sheet for turkey dressing.

    Counter Top Method

    Spread the cubes out on a rimmed baking sheet in a single layer (they need air circulation) and allow them to stand uncovered 24 hours to dry.

    You can do this several days ahead. When dry, package the dry cubes in an airtight container or plastic zip bag until you are ready to continue the recipe.

    Oven Method

    Set the oven for 225° F oven and bake the cubes for 35-40 minutes. They will dry more as they cool. When cool, package in an airtight container and reserve to make the stuffing.

    Make Ahead Tips for Stuffing

    • Trim and dry bread cubes a few days ahead and store in an air-tight container
    • Clean and chop your leek and fennel a day ahead and refrigerate until needed
    • Pull your casserole dish out and put a sticky note in it that says stuffing.
    • If you're using vegetable broth, make homemade. It's way better than store-bought and super easy. Make it a week ahead and freeze it.
    • Make stuffing in the morning, cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate. Bring to room temp (about and hour) before baking, then keep hot until serving time.

    Chef's Tip: Another BIG make-ahead tip; if you've never dry-brined a turkey, it's super easy with delicious results! Read my step-by-step post here on How to Dry Brine a Turkey. Start Sunday or Monday of Thanksgiving week.

    Serving Suggestions

    What to serve next to that glorious bird? Try these Thanksgiving side dish recipes. If you are not roasting a turkey, they easily work along side other mains such as ham or roast beef.

    • Mashed sweet potatoes
    • Sour Cream Mashed Gold Potatoes
    • Baby Green Beans
    • No-Cook Cranberry Sauce
    • Lemon thyme Brussels sprouts (made stove top)
    • Here's my homemade gluten-free cornbread stuffing for a change.

    For more Thanksgiving side dishes, take a look at this category page for more ideas or this recipe roundup post about GF and DF Thanksgiving Sides.

    Leftovers

    Leftover Thanksgiving stuffing is terrific for breakfast Friday morning with eggs. Stuffing lasts in the refrigerator for 3-4 days. I've never tried freezing it because there is never any left!

    Reheating

    To heat leftover stuffing, bake covered in a 350°F oven until heated through and 165°F internally. How long depends on how cold it is out of the refrigerator. Start with 30 minutes. For faster heating, allow the dish to stand at room temperature for an hour before hand.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is traditional stuffing made of?

    Stuffing is traditionally made of basically bread, vegetables like onions and celery, and herbs.

    What makes stuffing taste better?

    A mix of vegetables, plenty of herbs, garlic, and of course good bread. Some people add dried fruit like cranberries or figs or fresh fruit like seasonal apples or pears. I leave them out of my recipe, but you can add them.

    What can you stuff a turkey with besides dressing?

    For more flavor I stuff the cavity of my turkey loosely with chopped onion, roughly chopped carrot and celery, crushed, whole garlic cloves and more herbs. See this post for more information. Cook your dressing on the side as this recipe guides.

    More Thanksgiving Recipes

    Here's more recipes to consider for your Thanksgiving Feast, whether you are hosting and doing it all or taking a dish to friends. And be sure to check out the Thanksgiving Recipes Index for more ideas.

    • A bowl of creamy mashed potatoes with melted butter and fresh chopped parsley with a silver serving spoon.
      How to Make Creamy Riced Mashed Potatoes
    • A slice of nantucket cranberry pie on a plate topped with whipped cream, whole cake behind.
      Nantucket Cranberry Pie
    • Rund bowl of golden green Brussels sprouts with pancetta, herbs, and shallots ready for serving.
      Brussels Sprouts With Pancetta (Stovetop)
    • Pumpkin tart
      Pumpkin Tart (Gluten-Free Almond Flour Crust)

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make gluten-free Thanksgiving stuffing, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a ⭐️ rating! They really help other readers. If you had an issue with it, let me help you figure it out.

    📖 Recipe

    Classic herbed bread stuffing in white casserole ready to serve.

    Classic Gluten Free Thanksgiving Stuffing

    Sally Cameron
    Bread stuffing, or dressing, may be a Thanksgiving tradition but it works equally as well along side roast chicken the rest of the year. Golden top and a moist interior. Find make ahead tips and dietary substitutions in the notes below.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 2 hours hrs
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8 (6-8)
    Calories 304 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large saute or fry pan (12")
    • Medium casserole baking dish 9x9 for single or 9x 13 for double recipe
    • Large mixing bowl

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ pound loaf gluten-free white bread I buy Canyon Bakehouse Heritage White
    • 1 small leek light green and white part only
    • 1 medium fennel bulb trimmed and chopped small
    • 3 large celery ribs chopped small
    • 1 medium onion chopped small
    • 2-3 large garlic cloves chopped fine
    • 3 tablespoons olive oil or unsalted butter or plant-based butter
    • ½-3/4 cup  milk (dairy or plant) or broth chicken, turkey, or vegetable
    • 1 large egg, beaten optional (skip for egg-free)
    • ½ cup finely chopped fresh parsley ½ bundle
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped thyme leaves or 1 teaspoon dried thyme
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped sage leaves or ¾ teaspoon dried
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Cut bread cubes

    • Discard the heels of the bread loaf. Trim the crusts and discard, then slice the pieces into ¾-inch strips. Cut the strips into ¾-inch cubes.

    Oven drying bread cubes (do ahead)

    • Pre-heat oven to 225°. Bake cubes on a rimmed baking sheet lined with parchment or foil for 45-50 minutes. Let cool on the counter and store in an airtight container or zip bag until ready to make the stuffing. Cubes will get crisper as they cool.

    Counter drying bread cubes (do ahead)

    • Arrange cubes on a rimmed baking sheet to dry, uncovered, for 24 hours. Do this two days ahead and package the cubes in zip plastic bags or an airtight container. Cubes can be stored at room temperature up to 4 days until ready to use.

    Prep the Vegetables

    • For the leek, trim dark green top and root end from the leek, saving the white and light green part. Discard top. Slice the reserved leek in half lengthwise and run under cold water to clean out any sand or dirt. Slice the leek crosswise into thin half circles or chop.
    • For the fennel, trim stalks off the top and a thin slice off of the bottom.  Save the fluffy fronds for garnish if desired. Cut the bulb in half top to bottom. Slice the halves into long thin strips, then crosswise into small dice. For the celery and onion, dice small. You can do these a day ahead, combine, and refrigerate until cooking time.

    Cook the Vegetables

    • When ready to finish the stuffing, heat the oven to 350 degrees. Heat a skillet or frying pan over medium heat. Add the butter or oil (or combination) in a large fry pan (12"), saute pan or large skillet until melted. Add the leek, fennel, celery and onion. Cook, stirring occasionally, until soft and translucent but still moist, 12-13 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook 1 more minute. Do this in two batches if your pan is small.
    • Pour the vegetables into a large mixing bowl. Stir in the dried bread cubes, herbs, salt and pepper. Whisk together ½ cup of milk or broth and and egg. The mixture should be moist and hold together when gently squeezed. If it seems dry, add a little more of the liquid. Season with additional salt and pepper then taste for seasoning.

    Assemble and Bake the Stuffing

    • Place stuffing into an oiled or buttered medium sized casserole or baking dish (9"x9") and cover with foil. Bake in a 350 degree oven on the center rack for approximately 30 minutes, then uncover and bake until the top is golden brown, 15-20 minutes longer. Serve and enjoy.
    • Leftovers will keep in the refrigerator well covered for up to 4 days.

    Notes

    Prep Ahead
    Dry the bread 1-2 days prior then make the stuffing Thanksgiving morning, but don't bake. Cover and refrigerate. Bring to room temp (about and hour) before baking (2 hours before serving time).
    Dietary Substitutions
    • For vegetarians use vegetable broth or almond milk.
    • For vegans, use almond milk or oat milk and olive oil or plant-butter. Skip the egg.
    • Works for both gluten free bread and wheat bread.
    • This recipe is low risk for those with histamine intolerance. 
    For a Crowd (more than 8 people)
    Double the recipe and use a 6 quart saute pan or do in two batches, then bake in a 9"x13" casserole. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 0.125Calories: 304kcalCarbohydrates: 48gProtein: 10gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 35mgSodium: 586mgPotassium: 316mgFiber: 4gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 750IUVitamin C: 12mgCalcium: 222mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Sweet and Spicy Roasted Cashews (with maple syrup)

    11/18/2022 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    Sweet and spicy maple cashews.

    These roasted cashews are an irresistible blend of sweet, salty, savory, and spicy, with a hint of fall from rich maple syrup. Essentially candied cashews baked to perfection, they're crunchy, flavorful, and downright addictive-don't say I didn't warn you! Perfect as cocktail nibbles or a thoughtful kitchen-made gift, these cashews are sure to be loved by anyone who tastes them.

    Maple roasted cashews on baking sheet with rosemary.

    Roasted cashews are an easy, delicious homemade treat. I've made them for years at the holidays as gifts for clients, friends and family, and for catered parties. Some of my friends tell me they hoard them and don't share with their families!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • The crisp maple coating and spices hit all of your tastebud buttons.
    • They are crunchy, sweet, and spicy.
    • Everyone goes crazy over them. Seriously.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Roasted cashews ingredients, labeled, on counter.
    • Raw cashews: Whole cashews, not broken pieces
    • Maple syrup: The real stuff, not fake, colored, made with corn syrup.
    • Rosemary: Fresh is all I've ever used here.
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is the best for this recipe.
    • Sugar: Brown sugar or coconut sugar.
    • Vanilla extract: The real deal, not fake, here is my favorite vanilla.
    • Paprika: You can swap regular vs. smoked, but smoked is really nice.
    • Ground chipotle powder: For the spicy heat, sub a pinch of cayenne.
    • Salt: I use pink sea salt, no iodine, lovely flavor.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Another recipe using maple syrup is my homemade healthy granola. Another family, friend and client favorite.

    Recipe Instructions

    In a mixing bowl, stir together maple syrup, fresh chopped rosemary, brown sugar, olive oil, and spices. Add the cashews to the maple syrup mixture and stir until well coated. Spread evenly and flat onto the foil lined baking sheet in a single layer, sprinkle with salt. 

    Maple spice mix for cashews.
    Step 1: Mix the wet ingredients and spices.
    Cashews mixed with maple syrup and spices.
    Step 2: Add the cashews and mix well to coat.
    Golden brown cashews finished roasting on baking sheet.
    Step 3: Bake at 350°F for 22-26 minutes or until golden brown. Timing is for standard bake setting. Convection roasts faster so watch your timing for your oven (start at 13 minutes) or turn the temperature down 25°F. The key is to watch the color as ovens vary!

    Chef's Tip: When you take roasted cashews out of the oven and they are hot and still a bit syrupy, stir and turn them over with a silicone spatula. This helps get a good coating of the maple on the cashews as they cool. Or stir and pop back into the oven for another 1-2 minutes unless they are already a golden brown.

    Serving Suggestions

    When cashews are cool, break them up with your hands and package them up in a nice jar, cellophane bag with ribbon or fancy gift tin. You'll definitely be invited back.

    • Eat out of hand as a snack.
    • Put a bowl out before dinner (nice with a glass of wine or cocktail).
    • Sprinkle a few into a salad (with greens, pear or apple slices and cheese).
    • Use as gifts in little bags or gift jars.
    Closeup of roasted maple cashews with rosemary.

    How to Make Larger Quantities for Gifts

    Because I roast these in big quantities for holiday gifts and parties, here are a few tips. Depending on your oven space, do them in batches.

    • If you bake these in large amounts it takes a lot of fresh rosemary. If you don't grow it find someone who does and trim their bushes.
    • Rosemary turns your nails green and leaves your hands covered in sappy residue. It's hard to wash off, even with hot soap and water. Wear disposable kitchen gloves. Use them when you strip the leaves from the stems.
    • For chopping a lot of rosemary use a sharp heavy chef's knife.
    • When roasting large batches for gifts, you can fit about 3 pounds (a 3x batch) on two half sized rimmed baking sheets. Do not crowd them. A double batch on even one half sheet is too much. If you crowd them you will get sticky gummy nuts not crisp ones when they cool.
    • And if you make that mistake and they are a gummy mess and not crisp (I've done it), spread them out onto an additional baking sheet and roast a few minutes longer. It works.
    • When cool, break the nuts up by hand and pack into bags or mason jars and tie with ribbon.

    Gift Bags

    A great resource for cello bags to wrap these for gifts is Amazon, or at a crafts or cooking store. A bag (approximately) 4"x2"x9" bags works well for a half pound or a bit more. Use silver twist ties for closing and tie with a ribbon. Be prepared for smiles.

    Another terrific recipe for gift-giving is these chocolate bark bites; chocolate bark in bite-sized form.

    Three jars of maple cashews with ribbon, great for gifts.

    Storing

    Maple roasted cashews can be stored on the counter top in an airtight container, no refrigeration needed. Store in airtight containers, glass jars, or cello bags for gifts. They last for about two weeks, but they really won't last that long because they are so good they will disappear.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use roasted cashews?

    No, they won't turn out the same. You will be roasting them to add flavor and give them a crispy, tasty coating. Use raw cashews only.

    Are roasted cashews good for you?

    When you roast them at home and control all of the ingredients, yes. Cashews can be healthy. When you buy pre-roasted cashews, probably using low quality oils, not so much.

    What is the best way to roast cashews?

    In the oven is easiest, at 350°F on rimmed baking sheet. For this recipe, line the pan with non-stick foil.

    More Delicious Recipes

    Looking for more recipes with fall flavors and maple syrup? Try a few of these.

    • A glass jar of freshly whipped maple butter with maple drizzle and wooden spreader.
      How to Make Maple Butter
    • A jar of golden glazed pecans on a white round marble plate.
      Maple Pecans (candied pecans)
    • Maple roasted acorn squash slices on a gray platter with pomegranates seeds scattered on top.
      Roasted Acorn Squash Slices

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make these roasted cashews, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Sweet and spicy maple cashews.

    Roasted Cashews

    Sally Cameron
    This sweet and spicy roasted cashews recipe is the perfect combination of sweet, salty, savory, spicy and crunchy with the fall flavors of maple syrup. But beware, they are addictive! 
    5 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Cooling time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr
    Course Appetizer, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Servings 5 servings
    Calories 604 kcal

    Equipment

    • Rimmed baking sheet quarter sheet size for single batch
    • Non-stick foil (not parchment, it will stick)

    Ingredients
      

    • 6 tablespoons pure dark maple syrup ¼ cup + 2 tablespoons
    • ¼ cup finely chopped fresh rosemary leaves  stripped, rinsed, dried on paper towels
    • 1 tablespoon golden brown sugar
    • 1 tablespoon  olive oil or coconut oil
    • ¾ teaspoon smoked paprika
    • ¾ teaspoon ground chipotle powder
    • 1 pound raw whole cashews
    • 1 teaspoon fine sea salt

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Mix the nuts

    • Heat the oven to 350 degrees. Cover a rimmed baking with a non-stick foil. In a medium bowl stir the maple syrup, rosemary, brown sugar, oil, and spices until smooth. Add cashews and mix to coat thoroughly with a large spoon or flexible spatula.

    Bake and cool

    • Pour the nuts onto the baking sheet and sprinkle evenly with the salt. Bake for 22-26 minutes in a conventional oven. The key is the color, they should be a rich golden brown.
      For convections ovens, they roast a lot faster because of the sugar. Start at 13-14 minutes and watch the color. Dob't let them burn. The timing will depend on your ovens.
    • Remove the nuts from the oven and stir, turning them over with a silicone spatula while they are hot to maximize the maple coating from the syrup that might have pooled on the bottom of the baking sheet. Bake for 2 minutes longer, then remove from the oven and cool. When nuts are cooled, break them apart with your hands and store in a tight container for about 2 weeks on the countertop. No need for refrigeration.

    Notes

    To make multiple batches for gifts, mix a triple batch and spread on 2 half-sheet sized rimmed baking sheets with foil. For more ideas on baking for gifts, please see the post. A triple batch will give you 6 little bags of cashews as gifts. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1.5ounceCalories: 604kcalCarbohydrates: 47gProtein: 17gFat: 43gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 7gMonounsaturated Fat: 24gSodium: 484mgPotassium: 678mgFiber: 3gSugar: 22gVitamin A: 276IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 68mgIron: 6mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Thanksgiving Recipe Roundup (gluten-free, dairy-free)

    11/02/2024 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    gluten free dairy free Thanksgiving recipes

    Thanksgiving dinner is a cherished tradition, but dietary restrictions can make it challenging. Here's a Thanksgiving recipe roundup of my favorite gluten-free and dairy-free recipes that deliver on flavor while accommodating everyone at the table. From starters to dessert, these dishes make it easy to celebrate without worry-no one will even know they're gluten-free or dairy-free. Enjoy a delicious, inclusive Thanksgiving meal that everyone will love!

    A roundup photo collage of Thanksgiving recipe ideas.

    Many of these recipes are both gluten-free and dairy-free, and many work for plant-based diets. All recipes have notes on how to modify as needed. If you have any questions, just comment or email and ask. I'm here to help.

    Thanksgiving Breakfast

    I'm adding a few easy breakfast options so while you are busy in the kitchen getting your Thanksgiving feast ready, everyone can feed themselves. Print this smoothie recipe and place by the blender, and make a batch of these gluten-free, dairy-free fantastic carrot cake muffins the day ahead. Another delicious breakfast offering is homemade pumpkin bread.

    A creamy orange pumpkin smoothie in a glass with a cinnamon stick.

    Pumpkin Smoothie (with canned pumpkin)

    This pumpkin smoothie tastes like liquid pumpkin pie. Smooth and creamy with warm spices, vanilla, and of course, canned pumpkin (GF/DF/V).

    Recipe Here
    A golden carrot cake muffin on a gray plate with a silver fork.

    Carrot Cake Muffins

    These light textured, delicious muffins are grain-free, gluten-free, dairy-free, and refined sugar-free, sweetened with maple syrup. They make a great breakfast addition or snack. (GF/DF).

    Recipe Here
    A glass bowl of overnight oats with chia seeds, blueberries, almonds, and pomegranate seeds.

    High Protein Overnight Oats (with Chia Seeds)

    A healthy breakfast is easy each morning when you make overnight oats the night ahead. Soaking rolled oats and chia seeds in your preferred milk makes them soft and creamy. Meal prep them in individual sized containers to grab-and-go. (GF/DF/V).

    Recipe Here

    Thanksgiving Appetizers and Nibbles

    For gluten-free appetizers (and 3 are dairy-free), try these maple candied pecans for a cocktail nibble or to add to salads and cheese boards. The spinach stuffed mushrooms are savory and rich tasting.

    The green goddess dip is great with a platter of raw veggies, and no one (I know at least) can resist classic creamy deviled eggs. The salmon dip is a personal favorite (GF) but not DF as it has dairy cream cheese.

    Creamy squash and apple soup in a gray bowl with pumpkin seeds and chives.

    Butternut Apple Soup

    Velvety smooth and beautifully colored, creamy butternut apple soup is simple to make and filled with fall flavor. The secret ingredient for the creaminess is coconut milk. Serve it as appetizer soup shots in shot glasses! (GF/DF/V).

    Recipe here

    Spinach Stuffed Mushrooms

    Stuffed mushrooms filled with spinach, cheese and sun-dried tomatoes make a great pre-dinner appetizer, or for parties and game-day too. Make them ahead a few hours ahead, then broil or bake to serve. (GF/DF with vegan parmesan).

    Recipe Here

    For your guests who eat dairy, add a selection of cheeses and gluten-free crackers or regular crackers. Goat cheese is a good choice because some people who eat dairy-free find they can eat goat cheese (versus cow's milk).

    An open glass gift jar of candied pecans tied with a jute bow.

    Candied Maple Pecans

    These addictive pecans are a great cocktail nibble while the feast is being readied. Use a good plant-based butter. (GF/DF)

    Recipe here
    A glass jar of green goddess dip with raw veggies for an appetizer spread.

    Green Goddess Dip

    Creamy and bursting with herbs, use Green Goddess recipe as an appetizer dip or sauce with raw veggies as a Thanksgiving appetizer. (GF/DF).

    Recipe here
    Creamy orange smoked salmon dip in a green bowl with crackers and cucumber slices.

    Creamy Smoked Salmon Dip

    If you enjoy smoked salmon, you will love this easy smoked salmon dip. Whips together in minutes Serve with raw veggies or GF crackers. Endive leaves make good dippers too. (GF).

    Recipe here
    Deviled eggs with a swirl filling created by piping the filling, topped with paprika.

    Best Deviled Eggs Recipe (Step by Step)

    Deviled eggs are a classic appetizer for any holiday. See my trick for using a piping bag for a nice presentation. (GF/DF).

    Recipe Here

    Thanksgiving Sides

    Fill your holiday table with delicious side dishes, from butternut squash soup and Brussel sprouts to whipped sweet potatoes with simple ingredients. Pick your family favorites and throw in a new one.

    For Brussels sprouts, go simply roasted or try this Brussels sprouts recipe with pancetta and dried cranberries or with fresh lemon zest and thyme (skip parmesan for DF).

    Skip green bean casserole with canned mushroom soup and fried onions with palm oil and wheat flour. A better option is green beans topped with browned buttery almonds, my green bean almandine recipe. For another side, the maple roasted acorn squash is garnished with ruby pomegranates for eye appeal.

    And for the all important dressing (or stuffing), I've listed my gluten-free cornbread stuffing and my family traditional herbed bread stuffing. If you'd like to lighten things up a bit, try the spinach salad with pomegranate seeds and a pomegranate vinaigrette.

    Bright orange slices of acorn squash sprinkled with pomegranate seeds on a gray platter at the table.

    Maple Roasted Acorn Squash with Pomegranate Seeds

    A sweet, savory and spiced glaze is brushed over acorn squash slices before roasting, then garnished with pomegranate and pumpkin seeds to serve. (GF/DF/V).

    Recipe here
    Deep red whole berry cranberry sauce in a glass bowl.

    Whole Berry Cranberry Sauce with Pomegranate

    A twist on classic Thanksgiving cranberry sauce with far less sugar and the addition of pomegranate seeds for more flavor and texture. Make it in minutes, days ahead of time. (GF/DF/V).

    Recipe here
    An antique silver serving bowl filled with pale golden creamed onions and silver spoon.

    Creamed Pearl Onions

    Creamed pearl onions are an earthy, sweet addition to a Thanksgiving turkey, but there is no rule you can't enjoy them year round. (GF/DF)

    Recipe here
    Square white casserole dish filled with traditional herbed bread stuffing.

    Traditional Thanksgiving Stuffing (step by step)

    Leeks, fennel, onion and celery make a wonderful, aromatic vegetable base for the dried bread cubes and herbs. See recipe for swaps and prep-ahead steps. (GF/DF).

    Recipe here
    Creamy white swirled cauliflower puree topped with melted butter and green parsley in a blue bowl.

    Creamy Cauliflower Puree with Fresh Herbs

    A satisfying low-carb swap for high-carb mashed potatoes. The leeks, garlic and herbs give it more flavor and texture. Make them up to 3 days ahead. For dairy-free, use a plant-based butter, for vegan, vegetable broth. (GF/DFV).

    Recipe here
    A platter of French green beans topped with shallot rings and pomegranate seeds with a silver fork.

    Super Easy Green Beans

    These baby green beans are easy and fast. Decide on your garnishes in advance. Ideas are noted in the post. Cook the beans a day ahead to save time. Warm and garnish at serving time. (GF/DF).

    Recipe here
    A single piece of gluten-free cornbread on a white plate with silver fork with pieces stacked behind.

    Gluten Free Cornbread

    With a golden color and tender crumb, this gluten-free cornbread has big corn flavor. Its nice with a bowl of soup or a cup of tea for a snack. It's also wonderful in cornbread dressing for Thanksgiving turkey. (GF/DF).

    Recipe here
    A bowl of burnished roasted Brussels sprouts glazed with Balsamic.

    Easy Brussels Sprouts with Balsamic

    These little cabbages of the vegetable world, Brussels sprouts, are best from fall through early spring. Roasting them is easy and brings out their natural nutty sweetness. Lining the baking sheet with parchment makes clean up easy and prevents over browning. It's available everywhere these days on the aisle where you find foil and storage supplies. (GF/DF/V).

    Recipe here
    Bright orange whipped sweet potatoes ready for serving in a gray bowl.

    Whipped Sweet Potatoes

    Sweet potatoes are a powerhouse vegetable packed with flavor and nutrition. Skip the marshmallows, brown sugar or maple syrup. They don't need it. Simply simmer until tender, then drain, mash and add a little butter or olive oil. Mashed sweet potatoes make a healthy side dish any time of the year. (GF/DF/V).

    Recipe here
    An oval baking dish of golden cornbread dressing with cranberries and veggies, and a silver serving spoon.

    Cornbread Stuffing with Cranberries

    Cornbread cranberry dressing. Everyone will eat well, and your gluten-free, dairy-free guests will be both happy. See swaps in recipe notes. (GF/DF/V).

    Recipe here
    Spinach salad with hardboiled eggs, pecans, bacon crumbles, pomegranate seeds, and red onion slices.

    Spinach Salad with Pomegranate

    Crisp greens, crunchy bacon and walnuts, egg, red onions, and pomegranate seeds. An almost classic spinach salad with a few delicious twists, including a pomegranate vinaigrette. Skip the cheese for DF (GF/DF).

    Recipe here

    Roast Turkey

    For the Thanksgiving main course, classic roast turkey. If you've never dry-brined a turkey (in a bag), now is the year to use this fantastic and easy method. Follow my directions and start early, Sunday if you can, Monday at the latest.

    Roast the turkey on Thanksgiving day. See my tips on buying a turkey, fresh versus frozen in the post, and how I roast my turkey.

    A raw turkey in the process of dry brining bag covered with herbs, salt, and citrus zest

    How to Dry Brine a Turkey

    Dry brining a turkey is an easy technique that gives you a crisp golden crust and moist delicious meat and it's easy! This brine recipe is for a 12 pound bird. See post for full directions. (GF, DF)

    How to dry brine a turkey tutorial
    A browned, whole smoked turkey breast in a silver platter with bay leaves, potatoes on side,

    Smoked Turkey Breast

    A delicious, elegant, alternative to a whole bird-perfect for Thanksgiving or Christmas (DF/GF).

    Delicious Desserts

    What would Thanksgiving be without dessert? When baking gluten-free for Thanksgiving, I prefer a pumpkin tart to a pumpkin pie. With my recipe for an easy press-in crust, there is no rolling out dough. 

    And if you want a chocolate option, this bittersweet chocolate tart is rich and decadent, made with coconut milk. And if you must have apple, try my friend Tiffany's apple-pear pie.

    A golden tart crust in a fluted tart pan, ready to be filled.

    Gluten Free Tart Crust (grain free)

    Using almond flour and coconut flour, this tart crust or pie crust is wheat-free and gluten-free. Fill with creamy spiced pumpkin, chocolate or a savory cheese and tomato filling. Make it ahead. (GF/DF).

    Recipe here
    A slice of pumpkin tart on a white plate with whipped cream on top and the whole tart behind.

    Pumpkin Tart Recipe with Gluten Free Crust (and grain free)

    Smooth and nicely spiced, this pumpkin tart has a gluten-free, wheat-free crust. It's perfect for Thanksgiving dessert and can be made a day ahead. This recipe is sugar-reduced using pumpkin spice flavored liquid stevia drops. You can use all maple syrup if preferred. Taste the filling and add more maple to your taste preference. (GF only).

    Recipe here
    A glass of creamy pumpkin mousse dusted with cinnamon with a gold spoon.

    The Best Creamy Pumpkin Mousse (low carb)

    Creamy, rich and light-textured, make this pumpkin mousse a day ahead and have dessert ready to go. Serve in small dishes or stemmed glasses. Make this with granular monk fruit blend for a sugar-free dessert or sugar if you prefer, or half and half blend. (GF only).

    Recipe here
    Decadent chocolate tart on a gray marble cake stand with a piece cut out on a plate.

    Chocolate Tart With Hazelnut Crust

    When dessert has to be chocolate, this recipe will knock your socks off. Decadent, rich, smooth, and chocolaty with a hint of orange. Make it up to several days ahead. It holds well wrapped and refrigerated.  Crust can be made a day ahead, wrapped and stored at room temperature until ready to fill and bake. (GF, DF).

    Recipe here
    A slice of tall apple pie topped with a scoop of vanilla ice cream with a for and the pie behind.

    Apple Pear Pie

    A golden, gluten-free apple pear pie from my friend Tiffany at WellFedBaker.com. She'll teach you exactly what to do if apple pie is a must on your dessert menu. (GF).

    Recipe here
    A slice of nantucket cranberry pie on a plate topped with whipped cream, whole cake behind.

    Nantucket Cranberry Pie

    Despite the name, there's no pastry crust in this easy cranberry pie that bakes like a rustic cake with a jammy cranberry layer, and toasted nuts for crunch. So easy!

    Get Organized for Thanksgiving

    For help on how to get ready for the big day without stressing out, here's my detailed planning guide. From setting your Thanksgiving table to prepping ingredients ahead, and of course when to start brining that glorious turkey. Enjoy it, and don't be afraid to ask for help.

    Need More Ideas?

    I hope that this recipe roundups will help you plan your Thanksgiving with ease. If you need more ideas for the holiday season, take a look at my holiday recipe collections for Thanksgiving and Christmas. Put together a Thanksgiving menu that everyone will enjoy. One more tip; don't tell them it's gluten-free and dairy-free until it's all over. No one will guess! If you have any questions, leave a comment and I'm happy to help.

    Creamy Cauliflower Puree with Fresh Herbs

    11/08/2017 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    cauliflower puree

    If living the low-carb life has you missing comfort food like mashed potatoes, creamy cauliflower puree is a delicious alternative. My recipe includes sautéed leeks and garlic for more flavor plus the boost of fresh chopped thyme leaves. Make creamy cauliflower puree ahead of time. It re-heats well for busy weeknight dinners or as a swap for mashed potatoes on your holiday table.

    creamy cauliflower puree | AFoodCentricLife.com
    Creamy cauliflower puree in a serving bowl on a table.

    Cauliflower: A Nutritional Star

    As a member of the cruciferous vegetable family (broccoli, kale, cabbage, collards and Brussels sprouts), cauliflower is one of the worlds healthiest foods. It is an excellent source of vitamins (especially C), minerals, and fiber. Cauliflower is high in powerful plant compounds called phytonutrients. It contains sulphur containing compounds called glucosinolates and isothiocyanates, powerful fighters against inflammation.

    creamy cauliflower puree | AFoodCentricLife.com
    Pan of raw cauliflower florets.

    Cauliflower Versus Potatoes: The Carb Controversy

    A medium glycemic food with a rating of 58, a 5 ounce serving of gold potatoes would be 26 grams of carbs. A five ounce serving of low-glycemic cauliflower has less than 7 grams of carbs and rates 15 on the glycemic index; a big difference if you're watching your carbs.

    creamy cauliflower puree | AFoodCentricLife.com
    Chunks of cauliflower ready for pureeing with herbs.

    How to Make Creamy Cauliflower Puree

    Instead of bagged florets, buy a whole head for freshness and trim it yourself. Unsure how to break up a whole head of cauliflower? It's easy, just watch my quick video here. A three pound head yields approximately two and a half pounds of florets and serves 6-8 people. If the heads are smaller, buy two and don't be concerned about leftovers. Creamy cauliflower puree re-heats nicely.

    Trim the florets into medium size chunks then steam in a 5-6 quart pan fitted with a steamer rack. Steam cauliflower until tender when pierced with the top of a sharp paring knife, 12-15 minutes. Puree soft cauliflower in a food processor with sautéed leeks and garlic, fresh thyme leaves, salt, pepper, butter (or ghee) and a few tablespoons of chicken broth to make it softer and creamier.

    creamy cauliflower puree | AFoodCentricLife.com
    Cauliflower puree in food processor bowl.

    Make It Ahead and Re-Heat

    You can make creamy cauliflower puree up to 3 days ahead, cool and refrigerate tightly covered. Reheat in either the microwave or on the stovetop. For stovetop heating, fill a medium pan with a few inches of water, bring to a boil, turn down to slow and place a stainless steel or glass bowl on top with the puree in it and cover. Stir occasionally until hot. To serve, drizzle a little extra melted butter or ghee over the top.

    More Cauliflower Ideas

    Since the world's gone cauliflower crazy, I thought I'd try it raw and frozen in a smoothie for more fiber and veggie content. It worked great! Here is the recipe for my strawberry banana smoothie with frozen cauliflower,  And to swap cauliflower rice for regular rice see this post, and one more...how to roast cauliflower.

    creamy cauliflower puree | AFoodCentricLife.com
    Bowl of creamy cauliflower puree.
    Nutrition Facts
    Creamy Cauliflower Puree
    Amount Per Serving
    Calories 88 Calories from Fat 81
    % Daily Value*
    Fat 9g14%
    Saturated Fat 5g31%
    Cholesterol 20mg7%
    Sodium 101mg4%
    Potassium 29mg1%
    Carbohydrates 2g1%
    Fiber 1g4%
    Sugar 1g1%
    Protein 1g2%
    Vitamin A 435IU9%
    Vitamin C 4mg5%
    Calcium 16mg2%
    Iron 1mg6%
    * Percent Daily Values are based on a 2000 calorie diet.

    📖 Recipe

    creamy cauliflower puree | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Creamy Cauliflower Puree

    Sally Cameron
    This creamy cauliflower puree is a satisfying low-carb swap for high-carb mashed potatoes. The leeks, garlic and herbs give it more flavor and texture. Make them up to 3 days ahead for enjoying during the busy week or for your holiday table. For dairy-free, use a plant-based butter, for vegan, vegetable broth.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6
    Calories 88 kcal

    Equipment

    • Food Processor

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 3-pound head cauliflower or 2 ½ pounds florets
    • ½ leek white and pale green part only
    • 2 teaspoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 3-4 garlic cloves chopped fine
    • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter, ghee, or plant-based butter
    • 2 teaspoons fresh chopped thyme leaves or parsley, optional
    • 2 tablespoons chicken or vegetable broth
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground pepper I use white pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Trim the head of cauliflower into florets. Cut all the way around the center core with a sharp paring knife. Break florets off by hand. If needed, cut them into smaller florets that will fit in your steamer.
    • Add a few inches of water to a large 5-6 quart pot. Place steamer rack inside the pot. Water should come to the bottom of the rack. Turn heat to high and cover pot with a tight fitting lid. When water is steaming, add the cauliflower, cover and turn to medium-low. Steam florets until very tender when pierced with the tip of a sharp paring knife, 12-15 minutes. 
    • While cauliflower is steaming, cook the leeks. Slice the leek in half and run under cold water to dislodge any sandy grit. Dry leek and chop crosswise into thin pieces. Heat oil in a medium fry pan over medium low heat adn cook leek until soft and tender, 2-3 minutes then add the garlic and cook another 30 seconds. 
    • Add cauliflower, leeks and garlic to the work bowl of a food processor and puree, adding the butter, thyme, salt and pepper. Add the broth at the end to adjust creaminess. Serve hot or cool, cover and refrigerate up to 3 days, then reheat to serve.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 88kcalCarbohydrates: 2gProtein: 1gFat: 9gSaturated Fat: 5gCholesterol: 20mgSodium: 101mgPotassium: 29mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 435IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 16mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Instant Pot Chicken Broth

    02/08/2021 by Sally Cameron 12 Comments

    Instant pot chicken broth

    Instant Pot chicken broth is the magic shortcut every home cook needs. Thanks to pressure cooking, you get the same rich, golden flavor as traditional bone broth - in just 3 hours instead of 20. It's more flavorful, and far healthier than anything in a box or can. Once you try this method, you may never go back to the stovetop version. Make batches and freeze it! That's what I do.

    Golden Instant Pot Chicken Broth in a glass container with the pressure cooker behind it.

    I started pressure cooking homemade chicken broth out of necessity, but now it's my go-to because the results are incredible. The Instant Pot extracts deep flavor and rich nutrients quickly, without the long simmer or tending traditional chicken broth requires. It's hands-off, fuss-free, and produces a clean, golden broth every time.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Instant Pot Chicken Broth Recipe Snapshot

    • Faster than traditional broth - Ready in a few hours instead of simmering for hours.
    • Rich flavor from pressure cooking - Deep, golden broth with concentrated taste.
    • Versatile use - Perfect for sipping or adding to recipes that call for chicken broth.
    • Lower histamine option - Shorter cooking time makes it gentler for sensitive eaters.
    • Better than store-bought - You control the ingredients, superior taste and nutrition.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for chicken broth on the counter in prep bowls.
    • Chicken - Use meaty, bone-in pieces such as whole legs and thighs. A whole chicken works too. Broth needs bones for body and flavor. Ask the butcher to cut it up, buy a pre-cut bird, or cut it yourself (a great skill to learn!). Whenever possible, choose organic.
    • Onion - White, yellow, brown, or sweet onions all work for building a savory base.
    • Carrot - Part of the classic French flavor base mirepoix (onion, carrot, celery). Adds natural sweetness and depth.
    • Celery - Balances flavors and adds subtle herbal notes.
    • Leek (optional) - Adds gentle, layered flavor if you have one on hand.
    • Garlic (optional) - Boosts flavor and supports the immune system.
    • Herbs - Fresh thyme, parsley, and a bay leaf (fresh or dried).
    • Filtered water - Always use clean, filtered water for the best-tasting broth.
    • Black peppercorns - Add for mild spice and depth, but skip if you're histamine-sensitive.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's Tip: NO SALT. You should never salt broth. Save the salt for the finished dish. It is more controllable that way and people have differing levels of salt sensitivity or the need for a lower sodium diet.

    Substitution and Variations

    • Garlic - Skip it entirely if you're allergic or sensitive.
    • Leek - Use the dark green tops for broth; save the light white part for sautés and other cooking.
    • Thyme - Fresh sprigs give the best flavor, but dried thyme works if that's all you have.
    • Extra richness - Add a few chicken feet for a more gelatinous, collagen-rich broth. (It may feel unusual, but it's a classic chef's trick worth trying).

    Chef's Note: is it stock or broth? Today the terms are used interchangeably, but technically stock is made from the bones of the chicken and broth is made from meaty pieces and vegetables. Bones make homemade chicken broth gelatinous (like jello) because bones release collagen as they cook.

    How to Make Chicken Broth in an Instant Pot

    There are two chicken options: Use chicken parts such as whole legs or thighs, or use a whole chicken. If you're cutting up a whole chicken start at step 1. You need a heavy chef's knife. Special heavy scissors called poultry shears are also very helpful, and not expensive to buy.

    If you have chicken pieces, start at step 2 "broth instructions". Another good addition for the pot is the leftover backs from making spatchcock chicken.

    If Using a Whole Chicken (How to Cut Up a Chicken)

    Place the chicken rounded side (top) up on a stable cutting board.

    Steps cutting up a whole chicken on a cutting board with a chefs knife.
    Step 1: Cut between the leg and body on the side of the chicken, then just above the leg joint, freeing the leg and thigh.
    Cutting up a raw whole chicken for broth, with broth vegetables on the side.
    Step 2: Cut the chicken in half through the breastbone starting on top. If it's hard with your knife try poultry shears. Next turn the body over and cut along both sides of the backbone to split the chicken in half.
    Pieces of a whole cut up chicken ready to use to make broth, with celery, carrots, onion, and herbs.
    Step 3: Cut apart the legs and thighs at the joint, cut the chicken breast into two pieces crosswise, and cut the body in half crosswise. Remove as much skin as possible.

    Broth Instructions

    Strip as much skin off of the chicken as possible. That makes room for more meat and bones.

    View into an Instant Pot for making chicken broth with chicken, vegetables, and herbs.

    Add all of the ingredients to the pot then add the water. Don't fill the inner pot beyond the PC max fill line marked on the inside. Lock on the lid and turn the vent to lock. Press the Soup/Broth button and set the timer for 2 hours. It should be set to high pressure.

    When the time is up, hit the cancel button and allow the pressure to release naturally for 20-30 minutes. After that, turn the vent button and let any remaining pressure release. Overall time with the pressure build and then the release is 3 hours in total.

    Straining and Chilling the Broth

    A pot of golden finished chicken broth cooling in a sink full of ice and water.

    Strain the broth of spent chicken, bones and vegetables through a sieve or fine colander. Clean out the pot and add the broth back in, then place it in a sink full of ice and water to quickly chill (ice bath). Stir occasionally to assist the release of heat. After an hour (or less) your broth should be cold.

    For refrigerator safety. let the chicken broth cool to 70°F before putting it in the refrigerator to further chill.

    Chef's note: When I make long-simmered bone broth, I use a little apple cider vinegar to help release the collagen from the bones. For a pressure cooker vinegar is not needed as the higher temperature in pressure cookers converts collagen to gelatin quickly for nice rich broth. Added a few chicken feet or backs insures the gelatinous texture.

    Refrigerate Broth Overnight

    A pot of chicken broth with chilled fat layer on top, ready for defatting.

    Cover the pot and place it in the refrigerator overnight. In the morning skim the solidified fat from the surface, portion, label and freeze.

    One additional tip, sometimes I strain the broth one more time through a fine sieve (or cheesecloth) to remove any vegetable bits, but this is optional. You can use a small, mini fine strainer and do it as you portion into your containers for freezing.

    How to Freeze Chicken Broth

    I freeze in 1-cup and 3-cup portions for sipping and soups, or in mini portions (½ cup size) for deglazing pans to make quick sauces. Use mason jars, a freezer bag or other airtight container.

    If using a freezer bags, be sure the broth is totally chilled, seal the bags well and lay them flat in your freezer on a small rimmed sheet pan to freeze solid. Then you can remove the sheet pan.

    The reason this is not my favorite freezing method is the bags can get nicked and leak, plus it's plastic. Use glass or try these large silicone molds called Souper Cubes. Love them! Be sure to label and date your containers.

    Pressure Cooker vs Slow Cooker

    For homemade chicken broth, I recommend a pressure cooker (like the Instant Pot) over a slow cooker. Pressure cooking happens in a sealed chamber with steam and pressure, which extracts maximum flavor and nutrients from the chicken and vegetables in a fraction of the time.

    Slow cooker - While convenient, most models only make smaller batches, and the flavor isn't quite as concentrated. I prefer making larger amounts in the Instant Pot so I can freeze the extra.

    Instant Pot or electric pressure cooker - I use a 6-quart Instant Pot Duo Plus. Any brand works, and if you have a larger pot, scale up ingredients to make a bigger batch (cooking time may increase slightly).

    Stovetop pressure cooker - Works just as well if that's what you have.

    Four Ways to Thaw and Reheat Chicken Broth

    • Refrigerator overnight - Transfer frozen broth to the fridge and let it thaw slowly. Reheat gently in a small saucepan over low heat.
    • Microwave + stovetop - Loosen the broth in the microwave, then finish thawing and heating in a pan on the stove.
    • Cold water bath - Place the frozen container in a larger bowl of cold water, changing the water every 30 minutes until thawed enough to transfer to a pan.
    • Silicone cube method - If frozen in cubes, pop one out and melt it directly in a saucepan over low heat, covered.

    Tip: if you use a freezer bag, be sure to place the bag in a large bowl to in case the bag has a hole and leaks.

    Finished broth in a glass container for freezing, with fresh vegetables alongside.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long does it take to make chicken broth in the Instant Pot?

    When making chicken broth in an Instant Pot, it takes approximately 3 hours in total. It takes about 30 minutes to come up to pressure, then 2 hours to cook, then approximately 30 minutes for the pressure to drop before straining and chilling. Can I make a quick chicken broth for a shorter cooking time? Yes, I've made it with a cook time of 90 minutes versus 2 hours still with good results.

    What pressure setting should I use for making chicken broth?

    Use the high pressure setting on an Instant pot when making chicken broth.

    How should I store the Instant Pot chicken broth, and how long will it last?

    Instant Pot chicken broth lasts 3-4 days in the refrigerator or 2-3 months in the freezer in appropriate containers, labeled and dated.

    More Broth and Soup Recipes

    For more broth recipes, try my long-simmered chicken bone broth, roasted turkey broth, and quick vegetable broth. Find chicken soup recipes here.

    • Rich brown roasted turkey broth in glass jars on a kitchen counter.
      Turkey Broth Recipe
    • Golden homemade broth on a counter with onions, carrots, celery, and parsley.
      Low Sodium Vegetable Broth
    • Golden chicken bone broth in glass jars with carrots, celery, and parsley, cooling on the counter.
      Chicken Bone Broth (Homemade)
    • A finished pot of chicken vegetable soup ready to eat on a table.
      Chicken Vegetable Soup Recipe

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make Instant Pot chicken broth, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Instant Pot Chicken Broth | afoodcentriclife.com

    Easy Instant Pot Chicken Broth

    Sally Cameron
    Delicious, nourishing, golden chicken broth, saves time with an Instant Pot. Faster cooking time is great for people sensitive to histamine.
    5 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 2 hours hrs
    Pressure time up and down 3 minutes mins
    Total Time 2 hours hrs 13 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Broth
    Cuisine American
    Servings 9 yield 9 cups
    Calories 35 kcal

    Equipment

    • 6 quart or larger Instant Pot or electric pressure cooker

    Ingredients
      

    • 4 pounds bone-in skinless chicken thighs and legs skinned as much as possible, see note below
    • ½ onion chopped
    • 2 carrots chopped
    • 1 large rib celery chopped
    • ½ medium leek, rinsed of sand chopped, optional
    • 3 garlic cloves peeled and smashed
    • 2-3 fresh thyme springs
    • 1 bay leaf
    • 2 quarts filtered water 8 cups

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Prep the chicken

    • If using a whole chicken cut it into pieces and remove extra fat and as much skin as possible. For help see the photos in the post. If using pieces, also trim off extra fat and skin. Place the chicken in the pot, then add the onions, carrot, celery, leek, garlic, thyme, bay leaf and water.

    Pressure cook

    • Fill the pot up to the line that reads "PC max ⅔" with fresh filtered water, about 2 quarts. Lock on the lid and turn the vent to lock. Press the Soup/Broth button and set the timer for 2 hours. After 2 hours press the cancel button and allow the pressure to release naturally for 20-30 minutes. After that turn the vent button and let any additional pressure release.

    Strain broth

    • Strain the spent chicken, bones and vegetables thorugh a sieve or fine colander into another container. Wash the pot, then add the broth back to the pot for chilling.

    Chill broth

    • Fill a sink half full of ice and cold water for an ice bath. Place the pot in the ice bath and chill for about 1 hour, or until the broth is below 70°F. Cover and place the pot in the refrigerator overnight. In the morning, skim the surface of solidified fat, then portion, label, and freeze.

    Notes

    Chicken feet - Adding a few chicken feet to the pot creates a more gelatinous broth, more collagen. If you've  never bought organic chicken feet it might seem creepy, but they are a good thing when it comes to broth!
    Chicken note - Don't use boneless, skinless chicken breasts or thighs. The point is meaty pieces with bones.
    Nutrition note - Nutrition info is for strained chicken broth only. Values may vary depending on simmering time and how much chicken/skin you use.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cupCalories: 35kcalProtein: 5gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.02gFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 29mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy White Chicken Chili

    11/10/2016 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    white chicken chili

    When your family is hungry and time is short, make this hearty white chicken chili. Done in 30 minutes, use pantry staples like canned white beans, canned chilies, chicken broth, onions, herbs and spices. Add leftover or rotisserie chicken to keep it easy and get your family fed.

    white chicken chili | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Getting home a bit later than planned I was greeted with "I'm hungry". Not hello. Not hi. Nope. Sad faces and I'm hungry. I had to do something quick and reached for leftover chicken as my lifeline.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    I'd been testing this white chicken chili recipe and knew I had all the ingredients. It came together in about 25-30 minutes. Healthy and hearty, it can help you face the "what's for dinner" dilemma.

    white chicken chili | AFoodCentricLife.com
    Pot of white beans.

    Ingredients for White Chicken Chili

    • Leftover chicken or rotisserie chicken from the store
    • Chopped onion and garlic
    • Chicken broth
    • White beans - Cannellini or Great Northern beans, rinsed and drained
    • Canned diced green chilies (mild or hot, your call), 4 ounces
    • Herbs and spices
    • Cheese to garnish (optional if you don't do dairy)
    • 1 avocado, pitted and diced (another optional garnish)

    Prep Ahead Tips for Chili

    Shave a few minutes off the cooking time if you chop your chicken ahead, rinse and drain the beans, even measure out your spices and chop the cilantro. Prep the night ahead or in the morning if you have time.

    You can make this white chicken chili a few days ahead of time, then heat it back up when you are ready to eat. It holds for 3 days in the fridge.

    How to Cook White Chicken Chili

    • Chop the onion and cook in oil until softened
    • Add garlic and chilies for a minute
    • Add spices, cook another minute or two
    • Stir in beans
    • Pour in chicken and broth, stir
    • Sprinkle in cilantro and heat through

    Great garnishes include diced avocado, chopped scallions, or grate a little cheese over the top. Our current favorite is raw sharp white cheddar from Organic Valley.

    Options

    If you need to stretch the quantity, add more broth and turn it into a soup. If you have fresh poblano chilies available, chop one into small dice and sauté with the chopped onion. Another nice add is a couple of fresh chopped tomatillos. Make it simple or add a few options to make it your own.

    White Chicken Chili | AFoodCentricLife.com

    📖 Recipe

    White Chicken Chili | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Fast & Easy White Chicken Chili

    Sally Cameron
    Fast, easy, hearty and healthy, this white chicken chili comes together quickly. Top with diced avocado, or white cheddar or Jack cheese as an option. Make it ahead, reheats very well.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 17 minutes mins
    Total Time 32 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Entree, lunch
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 338 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 tablespoon oil olive, coconut, avocado
    • 1 small onion 1 ¼ cups or an 8 ounce onion, chopped
    • 3 garlic cloves finely chopped
    • 1 small can chopped green chilies 4 ounces
    • 2 teaspoons ground cumin
    • 2 teaspoons ancho chili powder
    • 1 ½ teaspoons dried oregano
    • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
    • 2 15- ounce cans cannellini beans rinsed and drained
    • 2 cups cooked chopped chicken leftover or rotisserie
    • 2 cup chicken broth preferably homemade
    • ¼ cup chopped cilantro or Italian parsley
    • 4 ounces grated white cheddar or Jack cheese optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • In a medium pot (4-5 quarts) over medium low heat, heat the oil. Add chopped onion. Cook onion until softened, about 3-5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook 1 minute. Add the chilies, cumin, ancho, oregano and coriander and cook another minute.
    • Add the beans, broth and chicken and heat through, stirring occasionally. Adjust the thickness with more broth if desired. Stir in the cilantro and serve topped with garnishes as desired,

    Nutrition

    Calories: 338kcalCarbohydrates: 26gProtein: 22gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 0.04gCholesterol: 49mgSodium: 557mgPotassium: 282mgFiber: 8gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 712IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 320mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Old Fashioned Sand Tarts Cookie Recipe

    12/21/2012 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    sand tart cookies

    Baking old fashioned sand tart cookies has been a family Christmas tradition for decades. Baking these thin Pennsylvania Dutch sugar cookies brings back great memories of baking with my mom. If you love baking cookies during the holiday season, add this crispy cookie recipe to your favorite cookie recipe box. They're a sweet and crispy cookie for the holidays, cut into shapes and decorated with colored sugar sprinkles.

    Sand tart cookies on a plate near cookie cutters.

    Sand tarts sometimes go by different names like Pennsylvania Dutch sand tarts. These rolled and cut cookies were always a part of our holiday cookie platters. One addition we made was fresh orange zest for wonderful citrusy flavor.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • It's an old fashioned classic sugar cookie.
    • A great cookie to gather friends and family and make together.
    • Simple ingredients.
    • I'll have a gluten-free version out soon.

    Recipe Ingredients

    While baking with partially hydrogenated shortening (Crisco), white flour and white sugar was standard in the 1940′s, I've adapted my mom's recipe to make it a little more modern.

    I use butter instead of shortening, natural sugar instead or regular white sugar, and doubled the orange zest. In addition to organic ingredients, choose naturally colored sugar sprinkles if you prefer.

    • Flour: Regular all purpose white flour.
    • Baking powder: Buy aluminum free and check the expiration date.
    • Butter: I've swapped unsalted butter for partially hydrogenated shortening (Crisco) often used in 1950's and 1960's baking. If possible, buy an 85% fat butter, sometimes called European butter. Standard American butter is 80% fat.
    • Sugar: White sugar or natural cane sugar. Superfine sugar is good too.
    • Eggs: Large eggs for the dough and to use as an egg wash.
    • Oranges: While not traditional, we added plenty of fresh orange zest for a terrific citrus flavor. it was our family twist.
    • Colored sugar sprinkles: Colored sprinkles make Christmas cookies more festive. If you buy the naturally colored sugar sprinkles the colors are not as bright but they are still beautiful.

    For measurements please see the recipe card.

    Chef's note: I'm working on a gluten-free version of sand tart cookies and will add notes as soon as possible, I testing with King Arthur Measure for Measure.

    Tools for Baking Cookies

    To make these cookies you will need:

    • A rimmed baking sheet or cookie sheet (I use rimmed ones).
    • Rolling pin.
    • Wax paper or parchment paper (I use parchment).
    • A hand mixer.
    • A sifter or fine sieve.
    • A medium sized, simple shaped metal cookie cutters (better than plastic).
    • Pastry brush.
    • Metal spatula (a pancake turner-type spatula).

    How to Make Sand Tarts

    Start by placing dry ingredients into a sifter or fine sieve and shake onto a piece of parchment paper or wax paper. This refines the flours.

    Next, cream butter and sugar together. Technically, creaming means to beat the sugar and butter together with a hand electric mixer or standing mixer until its light, fluffy, and pale yellow in color. It will have a sandy texture.

    Once the sugar and butter are creamed, slowly add a beaten egg and fine orange zest. Tool tip: use a microplane zester for fine orange zest.

    Add the flour mixture in gradually on low speed and mix until dough is smooth. Split the dough into two portions, flatten into disks, wrap well in plastic wrap and refrigerate for 2 hours or overnight. Chilling the dough helps to educe the spread of cookies made with all butter.

    When you want to bake, remove the dough from the refrigerator and allow it to stand for 1 hour before rolling it out. Heat the oven and get your tools ready while you are waiting. You want the dough soft but chilled to roll well.

    Follow the steps below to roll, cut, decorate and bake the cookies. 

    Rolling and cutting cookie dough.

    How to Roll Out Cookie Dough

    Rolled cookies or cut cookies are more work than a drop cookie, but worth it. My mom taught me to roll out cookie dough on a floured pastry cloth.

    Today, I roll the dough between sheets of wax paper or parchment paper. It's easier, less messy, and uses no extra flour (which can toughen cookies). And if the dough gets too warm and soft just put it back in the refrigerator to firm up for a few minutes.

    Colored Sugar Sprinkles

    Colored sugar for decorating cookies is called sanding sugar. Most sugars at the market are made with synthetic foods dyes, chemicals or artificial ingredients and often have preservatives. What else can you use? Naturally colored sprinkles.

    Naturally colored sugar sprinkles may not be as bright as colors of traditional decorative sugars, but they are a better choice (if available). These sugars use colorants from natural sources like fruits and vegetables.

    See what's available at your local market or find options online if you want to go with natural colors. Here's one source of naturally colored sugars with good colors. Find them on Amazon. I used the orange sugar for this batch but red and green are great for Christmas, blue for Hanukkah, or pink and red for Valentines Day cookies.

    A other option is using cinnamon sugar instead of, or along with, the colored sanding sugar.

    Cookie Success Tips

    • Butter must be at room temperature for proper creaming.
    • Thorough chilling of the dough is key to success with a rolled cookie.
    • To keep cookie cutters from sticking, dip the edges in a little flour then shake off the excess before cutting.
    • Cut the cookie close together to minimize waste, then form and re-roll leftover dough.
    • Brush the cut cookies on the baking sheet with beaten egg yolk (egg wash) to get the colored sugar sprinkles to stick.
    Cut out cookies on a baking sheet.

    Cookie Cutter Tips

    Anything with a fancy edge will lose some of its shape as the cookies spread while baking. Don't worry if that happens. Baking on parchment lessens the spread a bit. Simple stars and hearts work well, but I've done angels and other shapes like Christmas trees, rounds, candy canes and snowmen.

    Make Dough Ahead

    Make the cookie dough a day or two ahead as it keeps well wrapped in the refrigerator wrapped in plastic wrap. Allow the dough to stand at room temperature 1 hour before rolling. If the dough softens as you're cutting the cookies and it seems difficult, place the dough in the refrigerator or 10 minutes and they will cut more easily.

    Storing Cookie

    Cookies will keep in an airtight container on the counter for a week, but trust me they won't last that long. They are irresistible.

    A pile of sand tart cookies closeup with sugar sprinkles.

    History and Tradition

    My mom's heritage is from the Amish and Mennonite population of Lancaster County, PA. Our family favorite Christmas cookie recipe is adapted from the 1940's Woman's Home Companion Cookbook. My historic, tattered treasure holds the original recipe for the sand tart cookie.

    Gather up your kids, family, friends or neighbors and start a baking tradition of your own. Enjoy the joy of being together in the kitchen and creating memories that will last forever. Happy baking and Merry Christmas from my kitchen to yours!

    Baked sand tart cookies cooling on a rack and in a gift box.

    📖 Recipe

    Old Fashioned Sand Tart Cookies Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    Adapted from the 1940's Woman's Home Companion Cook Book, this cookie is our favorite family baking tradition at Christmas. It's thin, crisp and scented with lots of fresh orange zest. Make the dough a day or two ahead. The yield of cookies depends on the size of the cookie cutter used. Cookies keep on the counter in an airtight container for a week (but they won't last that long, trust me). Makes about 3 dozen cookies.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Chill time for dough 2 hours hrs
    Total Time 3 hours hrs
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine American
    Servings 18 Yield approximately 3 dozen
    Calories 133 kcal

    Equipment

    • Parchment or waxed paper
    • Fine sieve or sifter
    • Baking sheets
    • Hand mixer
    • Rolling pin
    • Pastry brush
    • Wire cooling rack
    • Metal spatula

    Ingredients
      

    Cookie Dough

    • 1 ¾ cup all purpose unbleached white flour
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder aluminum free
    • ½ cup unsalted butter at room temperature 1 stick
    • 1 cup sugar
    • 2-3 teaspoons fresh orange zest 1 large orange
    • 1 large egg well beaten
    • ½ teaspoon salt

    Cookie Topping

    • 1 large egg for egg wash
    • 1 tablespoon water for egg wash
    • colored sugar sprinkles to decorate

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Place a sheet of wax paper or parchment on a flat surface. Place a sifter or fine sieve in the center. Measure the flour and baking powder into the sifter and sift through.
    • In a medium bowl using a hand mixer, cream together the butter and sugar on medium speed until sandy and fluffy in texture. Slowly add the egg and orange zest and blend in. Add in the flour and blend on lowest speed (or mix by hand) until dough is smooth. The dough will be stiff at first, then soften.
      Split the dough into two portions. Form each piece into a flattened disk shape. Wrap dough disks well and refrigerate about 2 hours or overnight. 
      When ready to bake, remove dough from the refrigerator and allow to stand about 30-60 minutes at room temperature. You want the dough to be soft enough to roll but still chilled.
    • Pre-heat the oven to 325°F. To roll out your cookies, place each dough disk between two sheets of wax paper or parchment, then roll with a rolling pin until about ⅛″ thick. Start in the center and roll out to the edges in all directions. Place the rolled dough in the paper back in the refrigerator for 10 minutes. Remove from the refrigerator and cut out shapes with cookie cutters. Place the cookies on a baking sheet lined with parchment. You can bake cookies directly on a sprayed and wiped cookie sheet. They may spread a bit more.
    • Whisk together the extra egg with 1 tablespoon of water to make an egg wash. This makes your decorations stick. Using a pastry brush, brush the cookies lightly with egg wash and sprinkle with sugars. Bake at 325 degrees approximately 8-10 minutes or until lightly golden brown at the edges. Timing will depend on your ovens. Allow cookies to cool for a minute then remove with a metal spatula to a cooling rack. Cool completely and place in an airtight container.

    Notes

    Adapted from the 1940's Women's Home Companion Cookbook, of which I still have my mom's tattered copy. It's a treasure!
    For naturally color sugar sprinkles, check out this Amazon link for lots of nice colors. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2cookiesCalories: 133kcalCarbohydrates: 20gProtein: 2gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 34mgSodium: 32mgPotassium: 39mgFiber: 1gSugar: 11gVitamin A: 189IUVitamin C: 0.5mgCalcium: 21mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Sour Cream Pork Chops Recipe

    10/14/2022 by Sally Cameron 6 Comments

    Close up of creamy pork chops with sauce.

    No more dry as cardboard pork chops with this sour cream pork chops recipe for juicy, tender chops. For a flavorful dinner tonight, make chops that the whole family will enjoy. It might just become your next family favorite. The sauce is smooth and creamy with caramelized onions, garlic and herbs and the secret ingredient switch? Using French-style sour cream called creme fraiche instead of sour cream. Read on to find out why.

    Sour crem pork chops in cast iron skillet.

    Why use creme fraiche instead of sour cream? Because of the higher fat content. Creme fraiche has twice the fat of traditional sour cream. Unlike sour cream, it won't curdle in sauces or soups and brings richness to simple recipes. Look for it near the sour cream in the refrigerated dairy section. It makes a terrific sour cream sauce or gravy.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Sour Cream Pork Chops

    • The rich and creamy sauce.
    • Great dinner recipe.
    • Made with easy to find boneless pork chops.
    • Make it in 30 minutes for a fast dinner.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    sour cream pork chops ingredients with labels.
    • Boneless pork chops: Many people don't like dealing with bones, so I went with a boneless cut of pork chops for this recipe. Bones generally give flavor and moisture to meat, but you'll find with the cooking method of this recipe (called braising), you get the best pork chops that are moist not dry.
    • Onion: Brown, yellow, or sweet all caramelize well adding great flavor. Don't use red onion because of the color; you will have pink sauce!
    • Thyme leaves: I prefer fresh but dry works too if fresh is not available. Use ⅓ of the amount of fresh is the rule.
    • Fats: Use both extra virgin olive oil and unsalted butter for the best flavor. Always buy unsalted butter so you control the salt in the dish.
    • Broth: Low sodium chicken broth or beef broth. Check the freezer section at the store for good options versus canned or boxed and read labels for salt and ingredients.
    • Wine: Dry white wine is my go-to but a little dry sherry is nice too. Don't buy a big bottle to cook with; get the airline sized bottles. Works great!
    • Dairy: Creme fraiche (French-style sour cream) gives you a smooth, rich sauce. Do not sub regular sour cream as it will curdle. Creme fraiche has double the fat content.
    • Mustard: Dijon mustard give the best flavor. If you like it spicy, try a spicy mustard.

    See recipe card for all ingredients and quantities, salt and black pepper.

    If you enjoy pork, try this roast pork tenderloin with a creamy Dijon mustard sauce.

    Chef's tip: Buying pork chops. Buy boneless pork chops that are 1-inch to 1 ½-inch thick. If they are super thick (2-inches or more) slice them in half yourself or have the butcher do it for you. You can cook the really thick chops, it will just take a little longer, and for most appetites, a 6-8 ounce chop is plenty.

    Substitutions and Variations

    If you'd like to change this up a bit, here are a few variations:

    • Herbs - Instead of thyme, try fresh oregano, marjoram, parsley or sage. Herbs differ in the strength of taste so maybe start with a bit less and taste, then add more if desired.
    • Sherry - Swap dry sherry for the dry white wine (or do half and half)
    • Mushrooms - Add a few thinly sliced mushrooms to the sauce before adding the chops.
    • Brining recipe - If you want to brine your pork chops for extra mpisture and flavor, use my pork brine recipe.

    How to Make Sour Cream Pork Chops

    Get the pork chops out of the refrigerator 45-60 minutes ahead to get the chill off for best results. Please see the recipe card for complete details.

    Seasoned boneless pork chops.
    Step 1: Season chops.
    Browned pork chops in cast iron.
    Step 2: Brown in the pan on one side only, then remove to a plate or rimmed baking sheet.
    Sliced onions cooking in a cast iron pan.
    Step 3: Add butter to the pan and start cooking the onions.
    Caramelized onions in black pan.
    Step 4: Cook onions until caramelized and golden, then add the garlic and cook 1 minute more.
    Golden brown caramelized onions in a black skillet deglazing with wine.
    Step 5: Add the wine and cook until it's almost gone (deglazing the pan).
    Sauce ingredients being whisked together in a pyrex glass measuring cup.
    Step 6: Whisk broth, creme fraiche, thyme, and mustard together.
    Creamy sauce mixture pouring into a pan of caramelized onions to make a sauce.
    Step 7: Pour the sauce mixture into the onions .
    A sour cream onion sauce cooking down on the stovetop in a cast iron pan.
    Step 8: Simmer about 5 minutes until reduced.
    Boneless pork chops in a black skillet on top of sauce to be cooked down.
    Step 9: Add the pork chops back to the pan.
    Pork chops under a glass lid to finish cooking on the stovetop.
    Step 10: Put a lid on the pan, turn heat down a bit, and cook for 5-8 minutes until chops reach 140°F-145°F. Ready to serve.

    To Thicken the Sauce

    The sauce is very juicy. If you want to thicken it into more of a gravy, add 1 tablespoon of cornstarch to 2 tablespoons of water and stir until smooth in a small bowl (called a slurry). Remove the chops to a plate and keep warm. Stir the slurry into the hot sauce and cook for 1 minute to thicken and remove any raw taste from the cornstarch. It's ready to serve when it's thickened.

    Tips for Pork Chop Success

    • Cook time will depend on the thickness of the pork chops. Thin one cooks faster, a thicker cut pork chop will take a little longer.
    • When you slice the onions, it looks like a crazy amount of onions; they cook down as they release moisture.
    • Some recipes use bouillon cubes. All I can say is don't. Use real chicken broth. Those cubes (and jarred pastes) are super high in sodium and filled with unhealthy ingredients.

    Other Ways to Use Creme Fraiche

    • Garnish soup or chili
    • Sweeten with honey and use over berries for dessert
    • Stir into soups for a creamy richness (like tomato soup)
    • Make a decadent hot fudge sauce
    • Dollop next to dessert like an apple cake or pumpkin tart.
    Close up of creamy pork chops with sauce.

    Serving Suggestions

    Sour cream pork chops work well with a simple side vegetable like 5 minute green beans or easy broccolini. And to go with that terrific sauce, mashed potatoes are hard to beat! Also delicious are fluffy white rice, egg noodles, or brown rice pasta (like farfalle) for gluten-free work well too.

    Store any leftovers in an airtight container for 3-4 days. Be sure to label and date.

    How to Reheat

    Leftovers reheat well. Use your oven. Place the chops in a small glass dish and add the leftover sauce. If no sauce, add a little broth, 1-2 tablespoons. Cover tightly with foil and heat for about 30 minutes.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why are my pork chops always tough and dry?

    Pork chops are lean protein, so it's easy to over-cook them. Watch your timing as they cook pretty quickly. The sauce in this recipe keeps them moist and flavorful. Thin chops cook faster than thick ones. Test with a digital thermometer. The perfect temperature is (140°F-145°F).

    Can pork chops be a little pink in the middle?

    A little pink is ok. Rather than guess whether they are properly cooked, use a digital thermometer and cook until they reach 145°F (the safe temperature).

    Should you rinse pork chops before cooking?

    No. Do not wash any kind of meat before cooking. Washing raw poultry, beef, pork, lamb or veal before cooking just spreads and bacteria to other surfaces. Cooking to the proper temperature makes them safe.

    Recipes for Super Side Dishes

    What to add to this delectable dinner? Try one of these side dish options.

    • roasted broccoli
      Roasted Broccoli with Parmesan and Lemon
    • White bowl of golden browned air fryer red potatoes with rosemary.
      Air Fryer Red Potatoes (or oven roasted)
    • A bowl of bright green beans almondine with toasted buttered almonds.
      Fresh Green Beans Almondine Recipe
    • cauliflower puree
      Creamy Cauliflower Puree with Fresh Herbs

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make this pork chop recipe, please comment and let me know,. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I enjoy hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    Sour crem pork chops in cast iron skillet.

    Sour Cream Pork Chops

    Sally Cameron
    Rich and creamy, these tender pork chops are made with French-style creme fraiche instead of sour cream. Don't use regular sour cream as it will curdle the sauce. For best results, get chops out of the refrigerator 45-60 minutes before cooking.
    4.34 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Entree, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 390 kcal

    Equipment

    • 10" cast iron skillet or similar heavy pan
    • Lid for the pan I like glass lids to see in

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 large onion brown, yellow, or sweet
    • 2 garlic cloves
    • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme leaves or 1 teaspoon dry
    • ¾ teaspoon sea salt or kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
    • 2 pounds boneless pork chops 4 chops about 1" to 1 ½" thick each
    • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter
    • 1 cup low sodium chicken broth
    • ⅓ cup dry white wine or dry sherry, or dry white vermouth
    • ¼ cup creme fraiche French-style sour cream
    • 1 tablespoon creamy style Dijon mustard

    For optional thickening

    • 1 tablespoon cornstarch
    • 2 tablespoons water

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Prep work

    • Slice the top end of the onion off and set it flat on your cutting board. Slice the onion in half through the root. Peel the onion, then lay the onion halves flat and sliced into ¼-inch thick slices (half rounds). Place in a small bowl.
    • Peel and chop the garlic cloves fine, and chop the fresh thyme leaves.

    Brown the Pork Chops

    • Heat a cast iron skillet over medium heat. Season pork chops on both sides with salt and black pepper. When the pan is hot, add the olive oil to the pan, then add the pork chops. Sear until that side of the chop is a golden brown, 3-4 minutes. Remove the chops to a plate or small rimmed baking sheet and keep warm. Pour any pan juices over the chops to save.

    Caramelize the Onions

    • Add the butter to the hot pan, then add the sliced onions. Cook the onions until golden brown, stirring occasionally with a wooden spoon or wooden spatula, about 10 minutes. Next, add the garlic and cook 1 minute, stirring. Add the wine and cook down until almost gone (called deglazing).

    Make the Sauce

    • Whisk together the broth, creme fraiche, thyme, and Dijon until smooth, then pour over the onions in the pan. Simmer the onions and sauce over medium to medium low heat for 5 minutes, then add the pork chops back in with any juices.

    Finish the Pork Chops

    • Place a lid on the skillet and simmer the chops on medium-low heat until they reach 140°F-145°F measured with a digital thermometer, 5-8 minutes. Timing depends on the thickness of the pork chops. When done, the sauce should be thickened and the chops tender. Measure the chops temperature early versus late and don't overcook.

    Serving

    • Serve 1 chop per person with sauce and onions spooned over the top.
      If you want a thicker sauce, remove the chops from the pan and keep warm. Add 1 tablespoons of cornstarch to 2 tablespoons of cold water and stir smooth in a small bowl, then add to the bubbling sauce in the pan. Stir and cook for 1 minutes. You should feel the sauce thicken. It's ready to serve.

    Storage

    • Leftovers keep for 3-4 days in an airtight container. To reheat, leave the container on the counter for up to an hour, then heat in a shallow pan with the sauce covered with a lid until heated through or in a 350°F oven in a shallow casserole, covered with foil or a lid.

    Notes

    I developed this recipe for 1-inch to 1 ½-inch thick boneless pork chops. If yours are thicker, say 2-inches, they will take a couple of minutes longer. Take them to 145°F as measured with a digital thermometer. 
    Do not try to substitute regular sour cream for creme fraiche. It will curdle the sauce because it is lower in fat. Serve with green beans or broccoli and mashed potatoes or rice.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 390kcalCarbohydrates: 6gProtein: 39gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 121mgSodium: 595mgPotassium: 774mgFiber: 1gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 182IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 36mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Creamy Mango Sauce

    07/19/2014 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    Citrus mango sauce

    This brightly flavored citrusy mango sauce is a smooth, golden blend that adds fresh tropical flavor to grilled chicken, fish, shrimp, and salads. Made with ripe mango, a medley of citrus juices, a little shallot, and just a touch of honey, it's tangy, lightly sweet, and perfectly balanced. Blended until velvety and pourable, this versatile sauce is an easy way to elevate simple summer meals.

    Citrus mango sauce

    The inspiration for this recipe came from a lobster salad we enjoyed at the Montage in Laguna Beach, CA. The restaurant was nice enough to tell me what was in it so I took notes and came up with my own recipe. Hope you enjoy it. Its a terrific, refreshing summer sauce.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • It's really versatile as both a sauce and a dressing.
    • It's light and bright citrusy mango flavor are terrific.
    • Mango sauce lasts 5 days in the refrigerator.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Mango Sauce Ingredients

    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil.
    • Mango: Either fresh or frozen.
    • Citrus: Pink grapefruit, lemon, orange, and lime for their juices.
    • Shallot: A little more mild and sweet than onion.
    • Sweetener: A little honey balances the citrus, or use the zero-sugar honey.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    Mango sauce is delicious served with this grilled prosciutto or bacon wrapped scallops.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • No mango? Try ripe peaches or pineapple for a similar tropical flavor.
    • Citrus mix: Swap in your favorite combination-lime and orange for something sweeter, or grapefruit and lemon for more tang.
    • Sweetener: Use maple syrup or a sugar-free liquid sweetener in place of honey if preferred.
    • Add a kick: For a spicy variation, blend in a small piece of jalapeño, a pinch of crushed red pepper, or add some of your favorite hot sauce!
    • Make it creamy: Add a spoonful of coconut cream or Greek yogurt for a thicker, richer finish.

    Recipe Directions

    It's so easy to make. Just dump everything for the mango sauce into the blender and puree! Creamy citrus mango sauce lasts for five days in the fridge so extra does not go to waste.

    Grilled scallops wrapped with prosciutto and mango sauce.

    Servings Suggestions for Mango Sauce

    • As a salad dressing over fresh salad greens.
    • With grilled or roasted fish.
    • Grilled or seared scallops (photo above).
    • Grilled or broiled shrimp.
    • Drizzled over vegetables like green beans or broccoli.
    • To jazz up simple boneless, skinless chicken breasts.

    Other Mango Recipes

    Did you know mango is the most widely consumed fruit in the world? With its natural sweetness and versatility, it's no wonder it stars in everything from sauces to smoothies.

    • A bright yellow mango pineapple smoothie in a glass with lime and fruit wedge.
      Tropical Mango Pineapple Smoothie
    • Bowl of bright tropical colored pineapple mango salsa.
      Fresh Pineapple Mango Salsa Recipe
    • Tropical Mango Green Smoothie
      Green Smoothie Recipe with Mango

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this mango sauce, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Citrus mango sauce

    Mango Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Creamy and light, this dressing or sauce can be used with salad as a dressing to over grilled fish, chicken breast, scallops, or shrimp. It's great over an open face avocado and tomato sandwich too. Puree in a blender and taste, then adjust to your preference.
    4.67 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course condiment
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 112 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 3 tablespoons avocado oil or other light neutral oil
    • 2-3 tablespoons finely chopped mango cubes
    • 2 tablespoons pink grapefruit juice
    • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
    • 1 tablespoon orange juice
    • 1 tablespoon lime juice
    • 1 tablespoon finely chopped shallot
    • 1-2 teaspoons honey
    • Sprinkles of salt and white pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Place all ingredients in a blender and puree until light, fluffy and smooth.
    • Taste and make any adjustments for your preference. Keep chilled until serving.

    Notes

    Try this sauce with:
    • Salad greens
    • Lobster salad
    • Grilled or roasted fish
    • Grilled or seared scallops
    • Grilled or broiled shrimp
    • Drizzled over vegetables like green beans or broccoli
    • To jazz up simple boneless, skinless chicken breasts

    Nutrition

    Calories: 112kcalCarbohydrates: 5gProtein: 0.2gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gSodium: 1mgPotassium: 51mgFiber: 0.2gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 91IUVitamin C: 10mgCalcium: 4mgIron: 0.1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Pomegranate and Spinach Salad

    12/18/2017 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

    spinach salad with pomegranate

    Love spinach salads? Try this twist on the classic strawberry spinach salad by swapping in juicy pomegranate seeds for a vibrant, seasonal touch. This pomegranate and spinach salad is perfect for fall when pomegranates are at their peak. It has everything-ruby-red seeds, tender baby spinach, crunchy walnuts, hard-boiled egg, creamy goat cheese, slivered red onion, and crisp bacon. To bring it all together, a homemade pomegranate vinaigrette adds the perfect balance of tangy and sweet.

    A white bowl of spinach leaves, red onion, hard boiled eggs, crisp bacon crumbles and pomegranate seeds.

    While many spinach salads are dressed with a warm bacon dressing, this version takes a fresher approach with an easy pomegranate vinaigrette. It's light, tangy, and lets the vibrant flavors shine. Plus, from a health standpoint, this salad is packed with nutrients while still tasting absolutely delicious. And for all the bacon lovers out there-don't worry! I've kept the crispy crumbles for added crunch, but you can always skip them if you prefer

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • It's easy, healthy, and colorful.
    • A nice trade off from a standard salad.
    • Make the elements ahead of time and toss to serve.

    With any extra baby spinach, use it in smoothies like this blueberry spinach or this refreshing cucumber and spinach smoothie.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Pomegranate and Spinach salad

    • Baby spinach leaves: Grab a container of the baby spinach leaves to save time.
    • Cheese: Goat cheese is lovely with a soft tang, either a log you can crumble yourself or the crumbled container.
    • Nuts: I went with walnuts for this salad for their rich flavor.
    • Pomegranate seeds: Add so much beautiful color and a tart tanginess. Buying a whole pomegranate and seeding it yourself is easy and the seeds are fresher and last longer. If you prefer, buy a container of pomegranate seeds (called arils).
    • Bacon: Adds a nice, salty crunch. Use either pork bacon or turkey bacon.
    • Eggs: Hard boiled eggs take 15 minutes plus a chill in ice water. Read here on how to make perfect hard boiled eggs.
    • Onion: Red onion adds color and a little bite. Use shallot if you prefer.

    Pomegranate Vinaigrette

    • Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil for a nice vinaigrette.
    • Vinegar: Pomegranate vinegar is a fun flavored vinegar to have in your pantry. Find it at Traders Joes and online.
    • Maple syrup: For just a touch of sweetness and helps bring the vinaigrette together.
    • Mustard: Creamy Dijon must is best in vinaigrettes and helps emulsify the dressing.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Substitution and Variations

    • Other fruit vinegar options include red wine vinegar, cranberry vinegar, raspberry vinegar, or cherry vinegar.
    • Try other nuts such as pecan, pine nuts, or sliced almonds. Toasted pepitas are delicious too. For how to toast pepitas see this post.
    • For nut allergies, omit or use sunflower seeds or pumpkins seeds (pepitas).
    • Don't like goat cheese? Try blue cheese crumbles or tangy Greek feta cheese.
    • For vegetarians, skip the bacon.
    • If you're an avocado lover, diced avocado is a great addition with it's creamy rich texture and flavor.

    For a great comfort food meal, try these stuffed pasta shells with spinach and ricotta.

    Chef's tip: Intimidated by opening a pomegranate? It really is easy, and once you do it you might prefer doing it yourself as the seeds are fresher and last a lot longer in the refrigerator than buying a container. For instructions on how to open a pomegranate see this post. Be sure to wear an apron!

    Recipe Instructions

    All of the components of this baby spinach salad are easily made ahead of time and assembled at serving time.

    • Step 1: Get the bacon frying, either in a pan or the oven. When cool, chop or crumble.
    • Step 2: Hard boil your eggs.
    • Step 3: Seed the pomegranate if using a fresh one.
    • Step 4: Slice your onion or shallot.
    • Step 5: Crumble the cheese (if using) and chop the nuts if needed.
    • Step 6: Make the vinaigrette.

    Chef's tip: Cooking bacon in the oven. If you want a hands off way to cook bacon and not mess up your stovetop, try baking it in the oven. Line a rimmed baking sheet with foil, top with a wire cooking rack, and top with raw bacon strips. Bake at 350°F for 15 minutes on each side, or until golden and crisp. Cool and crumble.

    A serving bowl of a baby spinach salad, small plates in the background, and a glass pitcher of dressing.

    How to Make a Basic Vinaigrette

    The general rule for making vinaigrettes is one part of acid (vinegar) to three parts of fat (oil). My first choice is a good extra virgin olive oil, but other oils works such as avocado oil. I love to use flavored olive oils to keep things interesting. Depending on the flavor you want to achieve there are many options.

    Basic vinegars for vinaigrette include red wine vinegar, champagne vinegar, and apple cider vinegar, but again there are many fun options. You can also use citrus juice such as lemon, orange, and lime. A little Dijon mustard emulsifies the vinaigrette (holds it together).

    Taste the vinaigrette and adjust for yourself. I added a little more vinegar for more tang. A little salt and pepper and you are good to go.

    colorful spinach salad with pomegranate.

    Serving Suggestions

    Keep all elements in the refrigerator in an airtight container until serving time, then toss with a little dressing and serve more at the table if desired.

    Without dressing, this salad holds pretty well overnight. If you think you won't use all of the salad, don't toss the baby spinach salad with dressing but serve it at the table for each person to drizzle on.

    This is a great side salad but if you want to add protein, try a little sliced grilled chicken or steak.

    Dietary Notes

    For most people, spinach is a great add to your diet, but it is high in natural compounds called oxalates.  If you suffer with kidney or gallbladder issues, check with your healthcare provider before consuming spinach. It's also high risk for people with histamine intolerance.

    Recipe FAQs

    What are some variations of baby spinach salad?

    To change up a baby spinach salad, vary the fruits using strawberries in summer or pears and apples in fall. Add grains such as cooked quinoa. For summer, add what in season such as cucumber, bell peppers. In fall roast beets are a great addition. Change m up the cheese, nuts, and try a vinaigrette dressing instead of the standard warm bacon dressing.

    How do I make a simple baby spinach salad?

    For a simple baby spinach salad, limit the elements you are adding to 1 or 2, such as a fruit and nuts, or cheese and nuts. Use what is best seasonally. Dress with a simple vinaigrette dressing versus a more time-consuming warm spinach dressing. A good dressing makes even a simple salad terrific.

    What dressings pair well with baby spinach?

    While tradition might be a warm bacon dressing, many other dressing pair well with a baby spinach salad. Try a balsamic vinaigrette or a honey mustard dressing. Try a vinegar made with a fruit flavored oil and vinegar. Just be sure the dressing compliments the other elements of the salad.

    More Terrific Salad Recipes

    Boost your salad creativity with these salad recipe ideas. Banish boring salads all year long and make them something to look forward to for your family. One more great use for baby spinach, try this versatile ricotta filling made with spinach.

    • Tomato and cucumber salad, with red onion, feta, and garbanzo beans with greek dressing.
      Cucumber Tomato and Feta Salad (Greek Salad)
    • Fennel orange salad with avocado, pomegranate seeds, and orange slices on a plate.
      Fennel Orange Salad with Orange Vinaigrette
    • leafy green and berry salad
      Strawberry Goat Cheese Salad
    • Color Hawaiian salad with tomatoes, avocado, pineapple, beets. macadamia nuts and more in a bowl with utensils.
      Hawaiian Salad With Goat Cheese

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this pomegranate and spinach salad, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other reader and I appreciate hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    pomegranate spinach salad | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Pomegranate and Spinach Salad

    Sally Cameron
    Crisp greens, crunchy bacon and walnuts, egg, red onions, and pomegranate seeds. An almost classic spinach salad with a few delicious twists, including a pomegranate vinaigrette.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 20 minutes mins
    Course Salad
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 307 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    Pomegranate Vinaigrette

    • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 2-3 teaspoons pomegranate vinegar see swaps below
    • 1 teaspoon real maple syrup
    • ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard
    • 2 pinches sea salt
    • 2 pinches ground black pepper

    Spinach Salad

    • 6-8 ounces clean baby spinach leaves
    • 4 ounces goat cheese crumbles or try blue cheese or feta
    • ⅓ cup chopped walnut pieces about 2 ounces
    • ⅓ cup pomegranate seeds
    • 4-6 strips bacon, turkey or pork cooked crisp, crumbled
    • 2 hard boiled eggs peeled and chopped
    • ¼ small red onion sliced thin, or sub shallot

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Start by making the vinaigrette. Add the oil, vinegar, maple syrup, mustard, salt and pepper to a small bowl and whisk until smooth. 
    • Add spinach leaves to a large bowl and toss with the dressing. Scatter the cheese, walnuts, seeds, bacon, egg and onion over the top and toss again and serve family style or on four individual plates. 

    Notes

    Substitutions and variations: 
    • Try pecans, pine nuts, or sliced almonds. Toasted pepitas are delicious too. For how to toast pepitas see this post.
    • For nut allergies, omit or use sunflower seeds or pumpkins seeds (pepitas).
    • Don't like goat cheese? Try blue cheese crumbles or tangy Greek feta cheese.
    • For vegetarians, skip the bacon.
    • If you're an avocado lover, diced avocado is a great addition with it's creamy rich texture and flavor.
    • Use red wine vinegar, cherry vinegar, or a cranberry vinegar.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 307kcalCarbohydrates: 8gProtein: 14gFat: 25gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 6gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 114mgSodium: 505mgPotassium: 414mgFiber: 2gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 4419IUVitamin C: 14mgCalcium: 113mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    One-Pan Mediterranean Chicken Thighs

    11/06/2015 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    Mediterranean chicken thighs

    Need a fresh idea for chicken dinner? Try these Mediterranean chicken thighs-a one-pan meal bursting with sunny Mediterranean flavors. Last night, I picked up chicken thighs with no plan, and this delicious dish came together with tomatoes, thyme, olives, and veggies. The sauce is rich, flavorful, and perfect on its own or served over pasta. Easy and packed with flavor-this is a must-add to your chicken recipe collection.

    Mediterranean Chicken | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Quick recipes are a lifesaver for busy cooks, and these Mediterranean chicken thighs come together in about 30 minutes. Make them fresh for a fast, flavorful dinner or prep them on Sunday for easy reheating during the week-they'll keep well for up to 4 days in the fridge. Leftovers? They make a fantastic lunch, and the juicy vegetables and rich sauce only get better with time.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Takes about 30 minutes.
    • Make it ahead and reheat during the week if desired.
    • Tasty sauce with lots of veggies.

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Chicken: Bone-in chicken thighs.
    • Onion: Yellow, brown, or white onion.
    • Celery: Supports flavor.
    • Carrots: For flavor and sweetness.
    • Wine: Use white wine such as a Chardonnay or a Sauvignon Blanc.
    • Oil: Olive oil or avocado oil.
    • Broth: Low sodium or homemade chicken broth.
    • Tomatoes: Canned diced tomatoes work fine, petite diced if you can find them.
    • Olives: Pitted Kalamata olives.
    • Garlic: For flavor, fresh is best.
    • Herbs: Either fresh thyme or dried thyme, or use an dried Italian blend, and a bay leaf.
    • Saffron: Adds beautiful color and flavor, optional (as it is expensive).

    Please see the recipe card for measurement, salt, and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Substitute bone-in chicken breasts for thighs, cutting them in half crosswise.
    • If you don't cook with wine, use chicken broth.

    Recipe Instructions

    Chicken Thighs|AFoodCentricLife.com

    Step 1: Place chicken thighs top down on a cutting board and trim any extra fat and skin. Season with salt and pepper.

    Mediterranean Chicken | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Step 2: Brown the chicken thighs in oil in a medium dutch oven or other large heavy pot until golden brown.

    Step 3: Add the veggies, broth, cover and finish cooking in 15-18 minutes. Cook until the thighs read 165°F with a digital kitchen thermometer.

    Mediterranean Chicken | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve mediterranean chicken thighs alone in a shallow bowl as there is lots of veggies and broth. Or you can serve with a little brown rice, pasta (brown rice pasta for gluten-free) or zucchini noodles for low carb. Riced mashed potatoes work well too.

    Storage and Reheating

    If you have leftovers, save extra chicken and the juices and vegetables in an airtight container for up to four days. Reheat gently on the stovetop covered with a lid to maintain moisture. Reheating in the oven works as well, at 350°F until heated through to 165°F.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use boneless, skinless chicken thighs instead of bone-in?

    Yes, you can use boneless, skinless chicken thighs instead of bone-in chicken thighs. The cooking time will be reduced. Before you do, remember that the bone adds flavor and moisture, but do what works best.

    What are suitable substitutes for Kalamata olives?

    If you can't get the blackish-purple Kalamata olives, try the green Castelvetrano olives and be sure they are pitted.

    Can I use chicken breasts instead of thighs?

    Yes, chicken breasts work really well. Use bone-in chicken breasts and cut them in half crosswise before cooking. You can also use boneless chicken breasts.

    More Chicken Recipe

    Can you ever have too many chicken recipes? I don't think so. Try some of these to add to your recipe file. And be sure to checkout the chicken recipe index for more inspriation!

    • Platter of grilled chicken breasts with herbs.
      Easy Blender Lemon Chicken Marinade
    • A platter of sliced glazed teriyaki chicken with broccoli, carrots and zucchini.
      Baked Teriyaki Chicken Thighs
    • Golden baked chicken breasts on the dinner table.
      Roast Split Chicken Breast
    • A gray platter of sals verde chicken breasts with tomatillo sauce, grated cheese and chopped cilantro.
      Easy Salsa Verde Chicken (green salsa chicken)

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make these Mediterranean chicken thighs, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Mediterranean chicken thighs

    Mediterranean Chicken Thighs

    Sally Cameron
    Mediterranean Chicken. Fresh flavors with economical chicken thighs. An easy dinner plus leftovers make a nice lunch. Serve in a shallow bowl with the broth and veggies or over brown rice pasta (GF), or zucchini noodles.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine Mediterranean
    Servings 4
    Calories 660 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 ½-3 pounds bone-in chicken thighs or 3-4 bone-in chicken breasts, 3 pounds
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 cup finely chopped onion 1 small
    • ¾ cup finely chopped celery 2 large ribs
    • ¾ cup finely chopped carrots 2 large
    • 2-3 garlic cloves finely chopped
    • ½ cup dry white wine substitute chicken broth
    • 1 cup chicken broth low sodium or homemade
    • 1 cup canned diced tomatoes
    • 16 pitted Kalamata olives
    • 1 teaspoon dried thyme or 1 tablespoon chopped fresh
    • 1-2 pinches saffron threads optional
    • 1 bay leaf

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Trim chicken thighs of excess fat or skin. Sprinkle with salt, pepper and granulated garlic. Heat olive oil in a medium Dutch oven (5 ½ quart) or other heavy wide pan over medium low heat. When oil is hot (but not smoking), place seasoned chicken skin side down in a single layer in the pot. The chicken should sizzle when it hits the heat. Cook chicken until it is golden brown, 5-7 minutes. Remove chicken to a plate and keep warm. Turn the heat down to medium low. Drain off excess fat with a spoon but leave a little.
    • To the pot add chopped onion, celery and carrots. Cook, stirring occasionally, until the vegetables are soft, about 5 minutes. Add the garlic and cook 1 minute. Add the wine (or sub broth) and cook until it is reduced by half. Add the broth, tomatoes, olives, thyme, saffron and bay leaf. Add the chicken back into the pot, nestling it into the vegetables. Cover the pot and cook until the chicken reaches 165°F, 15-18 minutes. Serve chicken thighs in 4 shallow bowls covered with the vegetables and juices.

    Notes

    Leftovers will keep 4 days tightly covered and refrigerated. Re-heat in a covered pan over low heat until hot, about 20 minutes depending on how cold they are out of the refrigerator.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 660kcalCarbohydrates: 13gProtein: 42gFat: 47gSaturated Fat: 12gPolyunsaturated Fat: 9gMonounsaturated Fat: 21gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 236mgSodium: 865mgPotassium: 888mgFiber: 3gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 4430IUVitamin C: 11mgCalcium: 85mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!
    • « Previous Page
    • 1
    • …
    • 4
    • 5
    • 6
    • 7
    • 8
    • …
    • 10
    • Next Page »
    Chef Sally Cameron of aFoodcentricLife.com in her kitchen.

    Welcome! I'm Sally, a professionally trained chef, former personal chef and caterer, lover of fresh healthy food, and sharing it with others.

    More about me →

    4th of July Recipes

    • Sliced of golden pound cake with strawberries and a small bowl of whipped cream.
      Gluten Free Pound Cake with Cream Cheese
    • A glass jar of deep red homemade bbq sauce.
      Gluten-Free BBQ Sauce Recipe
    • BBQ glazed smoked pork tenderloin sliced on a gray platter for serving.
      Smoked Pork Tenderloin (pellet grill)
    • A bowl of slow cooker pinto beans topped with jalapeno slices, cilantro, and chopped white onion.
      Crock Pot Pinto Beans

    More Recipe Ideas

    • Grilled chicken kabobs glazed with hoisin sauce on a baking sheet.
      Grilled Hoisin Chicken Skewers
    • Broccoli bacon salad
      Crunchy Broccoli Salad with Bacon
    • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
      Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe
    • Sliced flank steak on a cutting board with flank steak marinade in a small bowl.
      Carne Asada Marinade (for Grilled Steak)

    Father's Day Recipes -->

    Footer

    as seen on

    Logos of Featured Publications

    About

    • Privacy Policy
    • Disclaimer
    • Terms & Conditions
    • Accessibility policy

    Newsletter

    • Sign Up! for emails and recipes.

    Menu

    • Home
    • About
    • Contact
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest

    As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

    Copyright © 2026 aFoodcentricLife.com

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required